Introduction and Planning Guide

Transcription

1 IBM System Storage N series Introduction and Planning Guide GA

2 Note: Before using this information and the product it supports, read the general information in Notices on page 309. The following paragraph does not apply to any country (or region) where such proisions are inconsistent with local law. INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states (or regions) do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you. Order publications through your IBM representatie or the IBM branch office sering your locality. Copyright IBM Corporation 2005, US Goernment Users Restricted Rights Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.

3 Safety notices Safety notices and labels This section contains information about: Safety notices and labels Laser safety on page i Rack safety on page ii Fire suppression systems on page xi For information about enironmental notices, see the IBM Enironmental Notices and User Guide, Z When using this product, obsere the danger, caution, and attention notices contained in this guide. The notices are accompanied by symbols that represent the seerity of the safety condition. The following sections define each type of safety notice and proide examples. The following notices and statements are used in IBM documents. They are listed below in order of increasing seerity of potential hazards. Follow the links for more detailed descriptions and examples of the danger, caution, and attention notices in the sections that follow. Note: These notices proide important tips, guidance, or adice. Attention notices on page : These notices indicate potential damage to programs, deices, or data. Caution notices on page : These statements indicate situations that can be potentially hazardous to you. Danger notices : These statements indicate situations that can be potentially lethal or extremely hazardous to you. Safety labels are also attached directly to products to warn of these situations. In addition to these notices, Labels on page i may be attached to the product to warn of potential hazards. Danger notices A danger notice calls attention to a situation that is potentially lethal or extremely hazardous to people. A lightning bolt symbol accompanies a danger notice to represent a dangerous electrical condition. A sample danger notice follows. DANGER An electrical outlet that is not correctly wired could place hazardous oltage on metal parts of the system or the deices that attach to the system. It is the responsibility of the customer to ensure that the outlet is correctly wired and grounded to preent an electrical shock. Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2014 iii

4 A comprehensie danger notice proides instructions on how to aoid shock hazards when sericing equipment. Unless instructed otherwise, follow the procedures in the following danger notice. DANGER Electrical oltage and current from power, telephone, and communication cables are hazardous. To aoid a shock hazard: Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation, maintenance, or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical storm. Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded electrical outlet. Ensure outlet supplies proper oltage and phase rotation according to the system rating plate. Connect any equipment that will be attached to this product to properly wired outlets. When possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect signal cables. Neer turn on any equipment when there is eidence of fire, water, or structural damage. Disconnect the attached power cords, telecommunications systems, networks, and modems before you open the deice coers, unless instructed otherwise in the installation and configuration procedures. Connect and disconnect cables as described below when installing, moing, or opening coers on this product or attached deices. To Disconnect: 1. Turn eerything OFF (unless instructed otherwise). 2. Remoe power cords from the outlet. 3. Remoe signal cables from connectors. 4. Remoe all cables from deices. To Connect: 1. Turn eerything OFF (unless instructed otherwise). 2. Attach all cables to deices. 3. Attach signal cables to connectors. 4. Attach power cords to outlet. 5. Turn deice ON. Labels As an added precaution, safety labels are often installed directly on products or product components to warn of potential hazards. The actual product safety labels may differ from these sample safety labels: i IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

5 DANGER Hazardous oltage, current, or energy leels are present inside any component that has this label attached. Do not serice, there are no sericeable parts. DANGER Multiple power cords To remoe all power to the deice, disconnect all power cords. Caution notices A caution notice calls attention to a situation that is potentially hazardous to people because of some existing condition. A caution notice can be accompanied by different symbols, as in the examples below: If the symbol is... It means... A hazardous electrical condition with less seerity than electrical danger. A generally hazardous condition not represented by other safety symbols. A hazardous condition due to the use of a laser in the product. Laser symbols are always accompanied by the classification of the laser as defined by the U. S. Department of Health and Human Serices (for example, Class I, Class II, and so forth). Sample caution notices: CAUTION: This product is equipped with a 3 wire (two conductors and ground) power cable and plug. Use this power cable with a properly grounded electrical outlet to aoid electrical shock. CAUTION: Data processing enironments can contain equipment transmitting on system links with laser modules that operate at greater than Class 1 power leels. For this reason, neer look into the end of an optical fiber cable or open receptacle. Attention notices An attention notice indicates the possibility of damage to a program, deice, or system, or to data. An exclamation point symbol may accompany an attention notice, but is not required. A sample attention notice follows: Safety notices

6 Attention: Do not bend a fibre cable to a radius less than 5 cm (2 in.); you can damage the cable. Tie wraps are not recommended for optical cables because they can be easily oertightened, causing damage to the cable. Laser safety When using an NVRAM5 or NVRAM6 cluster media conerter, the storage system must be installed in a restricted access location. CAUTION: This product contains a Class 1M laser. Do not iew directly with optical instruments. (C028) This equipment contains Class 1 laser products, and complies with FDA radiation Performance Standards, 21 CFR Subchapter J and the international laser safety standard IEC CAUTION: Data processing enironments can contain equipment transmitting on system links with laser modules that operate at greater than Class 1 power leels. For this reason, neer look into the end of an optical fiber cable or open receptacle. (C027) Attention: In the United States, use only SFP or GBIC optical transceiers that comply with the FDA radiation performance standards, 21 CFR Subchapter J. Internationally, use only SFP or GBIC optical transceiers that comply with IEC standard Optical products that do not comply with these standards may product light that is hazardous to the eyes. Usage restrictions The optical ports of the modules must be terminated with an optical connector or with a dust plug. i IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

7 Rack safety Rack installation DANGER Always lower the leeling pads on the rack cabinet. Always install stabilizer brackets on the rack cabinet. To aoid hazardous conditions due to uneen mechanical loading, always install the heaiest deices in the bottom of the rack cabinet. Always install serers and optional deices starting from the bottom of the rack cabinets. Rack-mounted deices are not to be used as a shelf or work space. Do not place any object on top of rack-mounted deices. Each rack cabinet might hae more than one power cord. Be sure to disconnect all power cords in the rack cabinet before sericing any deice in the rack cabinet. Connect all deices installed in a rack cabinet to power deices installed in the same rack cabinet. Do not plug a power cord from a deice installed in one rack cabinet into a power deice installed in a different rack cabinet. CAUTION: Do not install a unit in a rack where the internal rack ambient temperatures will exceed the manufacturer's recommended ambient temperature for all your rack-mounted deices. Do not install a unit in a rack where the air flow is compromised. Ensure that air flow is not blocked or reduced on any side, front, or back of a unit used for air flow through the unit. Consideration should be gien to the connection of the equipment to the supply circuit so that oerloading of the circuits does not compromise the supply wiring or oercurrent protection. To proide the correct power connection to a rack, refer to the rating labels located on the equipment in the rack to determine the total power requirement of the supply circuit. This drawer is a fixed drawer and should not be moed for sericing unless specified by manufacturer. Attempting to moe the drawer partially or completely out of the rack may cause the rack to become unstable or cause the drawer to fall out of the rack. Safety inspection procedure Perform a safety inspection on the rack when any of the following conditions occur: The rack is inspected under a maintenance agreement. Serice is requested and serice has not recently been performed. An alterations-and-attachments reiew is performed. Changes hae been made to the equipment that might affect the safe operation of the equipment. External deices with an attached power cord are connected to the rack. Safety notices ii

8 Be cautious of potential safety hazards that are not coered in the safety checks. If the inspection indicates an unacceptable safety condition, the condition must be corrected before you can serice the machine. Note: It is the responsibility of the owner of the system to correct any unsafe condition. Do the following safety checks: 1. If the rack is bolted down, ensure that the rack is firmly secured to the floor. 2. If the rack is not bolted down, ensure that the stabilizers are firmly attached to both the bottom front and bottom rear of the rack. CAUTION: The stabilizer must be firmly attached to the bottom front and bottom rear of the rack to preent the rack from turning oer when the filers or storage expansion units are pulled out of the rack. Do not pull out or install any filer or storage expansion unit or feature if the stabilizer is not attached to the rack. 3. Check the coers for sharp edges and for damage or alterations that expose the internal parts of the rack. 4. Check the coers for a proper fit to the rack. The coers should be in place and secure. 5. Open the back door of the rack. 6. Perform the power-off procedure for the power distribution unit (PDU) that is installed in the rack. 7. Check for alterations or attachments. If there are any, check for obious safety hazards such as broken wires, sharp edges, or broken insulation. 8. Check the internal cables for damage. 9. Check for dirt, water, and any other contamination within the rack. 10. Check the oltage label on the back of the system unit to ensure that it matches the oltage at the outlet. 11. Check the external power cable for damage. 12. Perform the following grounding checks: a. With the external power cord connected to the system unit, check for 0.1 ohm or less resistance between the ground plug on the external power cord plug and the metal frame. See Figure 1 on page ix. iii IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

9 L1 L1 L1 Rear View RT Figure 1. Ground check b. Using the appropriate probe, check for 0.1 ohm or less resistance between the metal frame and the grounding pin on each of the power outlets on each power distribution bus. 13. Check for the following conditions for each external deice that has an attached power cord: Damage to the power cord. The correct grounded power cord. With the external power cord connected to the deice, check for 0.1 ohm or less resistance between the ground lug on the external power cord plug and the metal frame of the deice. 14. Close the rear coer of the rack. 15. Perform the power-on procedure for the PDU that is installed in the rack. Safety notices ix

10 Rack relocation (19" rack) CAUTION: Remoing components from the upper positions in the rack cabinet improes rack stability during relocation. Follow these general guidelines wheneer you relocate a populated rack cabinet within a room or building: Reduce the weight of the rack cabinet by remoing equipment starting at the top of the rack cabinet. When possible, restore the rack cabinet to the configuration of the rack cabinet as you receied it. If this configuration is not known, you must do the following: Remoe all deices in the 32U position and aboe. Ensure that the heaiest deices are installed in the bottom of the rack cabinet. Ensure that there are no empty U-leels between deices installed in the rack cabinet below the 32U leel. If the rack cabinet you are relocating is part of a suite of rack cabinets, detach the rack cabinet from the suite. Inspect the route that you plan to take when moing the rack to eliminate potential hazards. Verify that the route that you choose can support the weight of the loaded rack cabinet. Refer to the documentation that came with your rack cabinet for the weight of a loaded rack cabinet. Verify that all door openings are at least 760 x 2030 mm (30 x 80 in.). Ensure that all deices, sheles, drawers, doors, and cables are secure. Ensure that the four leeling pads are raised to their highest position. Ensure that there is no stabilizer bracket installed on the rack cabinet during moement. Do not use a ramp inclined at more than ten degrees. Once the rack cabinet is in the new location, do the following: - Lower the four leeling pads. - Install stabilizer brackets on the rack cabinet. - If you remoed any deices from the rack cabinet, repopulate the rack cabinet from the lowest position to the highest position. If a long distance relocation is required, restore the rack cabinet to the configuration of the rack cabinet as you receied it. Pack the rack cabinet in the original packaging material, or equialent. Also, lower the leeling pads to raise the casters off of the pallet and bolt the rack cabinet to the pallet. For additional information, see the documentation for your rack cabinet. x IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

11 Fire suppression systems Relocating the rack The following safety notices apply to the procedures in this section. CAUTION: Make sure that you do the following: Before you add or remoe drawers, always hae the leeling feet lowered and the front and rear stabilizer installed, or hae the rack bolted to the floor. Always install drawers at the bottom of the rack first. Always remoe drawers from the top of the rack first. Always install the heaiest drawers on the bottom of the rack. Remoe two or three drawers from the top of the rack before you relocate it. Neer push on the sides of the rack. Attention: If the rack has equipment located aboe EIA location 32, you must remoe the equipment in position 32 and aboe from the rack before you moe it. Always remoe the equipment from the top of the rack first. Complete the following steps before you relocate a rack: 1. Turn off all power to the rack and the system that is installed. 2. Disconnect all power cables. 3. Make sure that the rack is either bolted down or has the stabilizers installed before continuing this procedure. 4. Before remoing any drawers from the rack, ensure that the battery LEDs on the controller units are NOT blinking. A blinking LED indicates that the batteries are in use. To ensure that the batteries do not discharge during the relocation process, remoe and reseat the battery packs before remoing the drawer. Complete the following steps to relocate the rack: 1. Unbolt the rack from the floor or remoe the stabilizers. 2. Raise all the leeling feet. 3. Unlock each caster wheel by loosening the screw on the caster. 4. Moe the rack to the new position. 5. Reposition the rack. For additional information, see the documentation for your rack cabinet. A fire suppression system is the responsibility of the customer. The customer's own insurance underwriter, local fire marshal, or a local building inspector, or both, should be consulted in selecting a fire suppression system that proides the correct leel of coerage and protection. IBM designs and manufactures equipment to internal and external standards that require certain enironments for reliable operation. Because IBM does not test any equipment for compatibility with fire suppression systems, IBM does not make compatibility claims of any kind nor does IBM proide recommendations on fire suppression systems. Safety notices xi

12 xii IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

13 Contents Safety notices iii Safety notices and labels iii Danger notices iii Labels i Caution notices Attention notices Laser safety i Usage restrictions i Rack safety ii Rack installation ii Safety inspection procedure ii Rack relocation (19" rack) x Relocating the rack xi Fire suppression systems xi Figures xxi Tables xxiii About this document xxix Who should read this document xxix Related documents xxix Supported features xxx Websites xxx How this document is organized xxx Notices and statements used in this document xxxi Getting information, help, and serice xxxi Taiwan Contact Information xxxi Before you call xxxii Using the documentation xxxii Hardware serice and support xxxii Firmware updates xxxii Terminology and conentions used in this document xxxii Actie/actie and high-aailability terms xxxiii Storage terms xxxiii Command conentions xxxi Formatting conentions xxxi Keyboard conentions xxxi How to send your comments xxx Chapter 1. Planning for the IBM N series storage system IBM N series storage systems and storage expansion units Storage expansion unit support Intermixing EXN units Connecting storage expansion units to N series systems Storage expansion unit cabling requirements Connecting a gateway to external storage Data ONTAP Write Anywhere File Layout (WAFL) Interoperability Adapter support High aailability or actie/actie configurations Supported Flash Pool configurations Supported aggregate size, Infinite Volume size, and olume count Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2014 xiii

14 Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features N3150 hardware features N3150 A N3150 A Connecting storage expansion units to the N N3150 feature codes N3220 hardware features N3220 A N3220 A Connecting storage expansion units to the N N3220 feature codes N3240 hardware features N3240 A N3240 A Connecting storage expansion units to the N N3240 feature codes N3300 hardware features N3300 A N3300 A Connecting storage expansion units to the N N3300 feature codes N3400 hardware features N3400 A N3400 A Connecting storage expansion units to the N N3400 feature codes N3600 hardware features N3600 A N3600 A Connecting storage expansion units to the N N3600 feature codes N6040 hardware features N6040 Model A N6040 Model A Connecting storage expansion units to the N N6040 feature codes N6060 hardware features N6060 Model A N6060 Model A Connecting storage expansion units to the N N6060 feature codes N6070 hardware features N6070 Model A N6070 Model A Connecting storage expansion units to the N N6070 feature codes N6210 hardware features N6210 models Connecting storage expansion units to the N N6210 feature codes N6220 hardware features N6220 models Connecting storage expansion units to the N N6220 feature codes N6240 hardware features N6240 models Connecting storage expansion units to the N N6240 feature codes N6250 hardware features N6250 models Connecting storage expansion units to the N xi IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

15 N6250 feature codes N6270 hardware features N6270 models Connecting storage expansion units to the N N6270 feature codes N7700 filer hardware features N7700 A N7700 A Connecting storage expansion units to the N7700 filer Connecting an N7700 gateway to external storage N7700 filer feature codes N7900 filer hardware features N7900 A N7900 A Connecting storage expansion units to the N7900 filer Connecting an N7900 gateway to external storage N7900 filer feature codes N7550T hardware features N7550T model C Connecting storage expansion units to the N7550T N7550T feature codes N7950T hardware features N7950T model E Connecting storage expansion units to the N7950T N7950T feature codes Clustered Data ONTAP hardware features EXN1000 storage expansion unit hardware features EXN1000 feature codes EXN3000 storage expansion unit hardware features FC/SAS bridge (FC 2100) for stretch or fabric-attached MetroCluster systems Supporting FC/SAS bridge configurations EXN3000 feature codes EXN3200 storage expansion unit hardware features EXN3200 feature codes EXN3500 storage expansion unit hardware features FC/SAS bridge (FC 2100) for stretch or fabric-attached MetroCluster systems Supporting FC/SAS bridge configurations EXN3500 feature codes EXN4000 storage expansion unit hardware features EXN4000 feature codes Rack mount requirements Chapter 3. IBM N series storage system software features Software packs Software bundles IBM N series controller software feature codes IBM N series host software features Chapter 4. Site planning System connectiity requirements Fibre Channel connectiity Ethernet connectiity Using older cables with PCI-X and PCIe 10GBASE-SR cards Circuit breaker and power outlet balancing requirements Balancing the load across PDUs Examples of balancing the load with a single component Examples of balancing the load with two components Connecting your system to an ASCII terminal console ASCII terminal console wiring DB-9 to RJ-45 console adapter pin connections Contents x

16 Connecting to an ASCII terminal console Hardware specifications How the measurements are made Conerting watts to olt-amps (VA) Important information about ambient temperature N3150 hardware specifications N3220 and N3240 hardware specifications N3300, N3400 and N3600 hardware specifications N6000 series system hardware specifications N6200 series hardware specifications N7000 series hardware specifications N7x50T series hardware specifications EXN1000 hardware specifications EXN4000 hardware specifications EXN3000 hardware specifications EXN3200 hardware specifications EXN3500 hardware specifications Important factors to consider when installing N series systems Rack considerations Power supplies and power requirements System input power Electrical considerations Primary computer power serice Grounding Computer room emergency power-off controls Lightning protection Three-phase power Thermal considerations Floor-loading specifications Floor plan considerations Creating a floor plan Security Chapter 5. Cable planning General considerations Cable measuring Cable labeling Optical SAS cables for SAS or SATA storage expansion units Chapter 6. AutoSupport How does AutoSupport work? Interaction with mail hosts Subject line of AutoSupport messages Short messages for urgent eents Recipients of AutoSupport messages Technical Support response High-aailability considerations Appendix A. Recommended power line sizes Recommended AC power line sizes Appendix B. Power cord list for N series storage systems FRU/CRU list for N series products Power cord list for N series products Appendix C. Specifications for IBM and non-ibm racks Model N00 rack specifications Model N42 rack specifications Rack specifications Model T00 rack xi IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

17 Model T42 Rack T00 and T42 serice clearances and caster location T00 and T42 racks multiple attachments T00 and T42 rack weight distribution and floor loading Rack specifications General safety requirements for IBM products installed in a non-ibm rack Appendix D. Optional adapter cards supported by the N GbE Mezzanine card (FC 2031) Appendix E. Optional adapter cards supported by the N3220 and N Gb Mezzanine card (FC 2030) GbE Mezzanine card (FC 2031) Appendix F. Optional adapter cards supported by the N Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012) Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1013) Dual-port 4-Gbps FC HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014) Dual-port 4-Gbps FC HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015) Dual-port GbE iscsi target adapter (optical) (FC 1021) Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1023) Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iscsi target adapter (copper) (FC 1026) Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk and tape attachment (FC 1029) Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1030) SnapMirror oer Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1033) Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1036) Dual-port Mini-SAS Adapter (FC 1060) Single-port 10-Gbps NIC (FC 1062) Dual-port Fibre Channel oer Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (optical) (FC 1063) Dual-port Fibre Channel oer Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (copper) (FC 1064) Appendix G. Optional adapter cards supported by N6000 series systems Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012) Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1013) Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014) Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015) Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017) Dual-port GbE iscsi adapter (optical) (FC 1021) Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1023) Dual-port GbE iscsi target adapter (copper) (FC 1026) Quad-port Copper GbE NIC (FC 1028) Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk and tape attachment (FC 1029) Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (FC 1030) Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter (FC 1031) Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA (Models A20/A21/A22 only) (FC 1032) SnapMirror oer Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1033) Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment (FC 1035) Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1036) GB Performance Acceleration Module (FC 1056) GB Flash Cache module (FC 1057) GB Flash Cache module (FC 1058) Quad-port 3-Gbps SAS Adapter (FC 1061) Dual-port Fibre Channel oer Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (optical) (FC 1063) Dual-port Fibre Channel oer Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (copper) (FC 1064) Dual-port 10-Gbps NIC (FC 1065) GB Flash Cache II module (FC 1070) GB Flash Cache II module (FC 1071) Appendix H. Optional adapter cards supported by N6200 series systems Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012) Contents xii

18 Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014) Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015) Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017) Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1023) Quad-port Copper GbE NIC (FC 1028) Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1029) Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (FC 1030) Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1036) GB Flash Cache module (FC 1057) Quad-port 3/6-Gbps SAS Adapter (FC 1061) Dual-port Fibre Channel oer Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (optical) (FC 1063) Dual-port Fibre Channel oer Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (copper) (FC 1064) Dual-port 10-Gbps Ethernet NIC (FC 1065) Gbps MetroCluster VI Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1066) Gbps SnapMirror oer Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1067) GB Flash Cache II module (FC 1070) GB Flash Cache II module (FC 1071) TB Flash Cache II module (FC 1072) GB Flash Cache II ersion 2 (FC 1073) TB Flash Cache II module ersion 2 (FC 1074) Dual-Port 10-GbE NIC (FC 1078) Quad-port, 8 Gbps FC adapter (FC 1081) Quad-Port, 1-GbE optical adapter (FC 1082) Dual-port, 10G-Base-T NIC (FC 1084) SFP+ Optical mod. for 1078 (FC 2014) Appendix I. Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems PCI-X Adapters Quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1007) Single-port 10 GbE TOE adapter (FC 1008) Quad-port Gigabit Ethernet TOE adapter (FC 1009) Dual-port GbE iscsi target adapter (copper) (FC 1010) Dual-port GbE iscsi target adapter (optical) (FC 1011) SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel LVD tape adapter (FC 1016) SnapMirror oer Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1034) PCI-Express (PCIe) adapters Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012) Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1013) Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014) Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015) Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017) Dual-port GbE iscsi target adapter (optical) (FC 1021) Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1023) Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iscsi target adapter (copper) (FC 1026) Quad-port Copper GbE NIC (FC 1028) Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk or tape attachment (FC 1029) Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1030) Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter (FC 1031) Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA (Models A20/A21 only) (FC 1032) SnapMirror oer Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1033) Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment (FC 1035) Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1036) GB Performance Acceleration Module I (FC 1056) GB Flash Cache module (FC 1057) Quad-port 3-Gbps SAS Adapter (FC 1061) Dual-port Fibre Channel oer Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (optical) (FC 1063) Dual-port Fibre Channel oer Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (copper) (FC 1064) Dual-port 10-Gbps NIC (FC 1065) GB Flash Cache II module (FC 1071) xiii IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

19 Appendix J. Optional adapter cards supported by N7x50T series systems Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012) Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014) Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015) Quad-port Copper GbE NIC (FC 1028) Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1029) Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (FC 1030) Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1036) Quad-port 6-Gbps SAS Adapter (FC 1061) Dual-port Fibre Channel oer Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (optical) (FC 1063) Dual-port Fibre Channel oer Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (copper) (FC 1064) Gbps MetroCluster VI Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1066) Gbps SnapMirror oer Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1067) GB Flash Cache II module (FC 1071) TB Flash Cache II module (FC 1072) GB Flash Cache II module ersion 2 (FC 1073) TB Flash Cache II module ersion 2 (FC 1074) TB Flash Cache II module ersion 2 (FC 1075) Dual-port 10-GbE NIC SFP+ (FC 1078) Quad-port 8 Gbps FC HBA (FC 1079) Quad-port 6-Gbps SAS HBA (FC 1080) Quad-port, 8 Gbps FC adapter (FC 1081) Quad-Port, 1-GbE optical adapter (FC 1082) Dual-port, 10G-Base-T NIC (FC 1084) Appendix K. Installing or replacing a Flash Cache module or PAM Installing or replacing a caching module Before you begin installing or replacing a caching module Installing or replacing a caching module Running diagnostics Running system-leel diagnostics Running SYSDIAG tool diagnostics Completing the replacement process Appendix L. IBM System Storage N series documentation N7x50T series systems library (coering N7550T and N7950T) N7000 series systems library N6200 series systems library (coering N6210, N6220, N6240, N6250, and N6270) N6000 series systems library (coering N6040, N6060 and N6070) N3300, N3400, and N3600 storage systems library N3150, N3220, and N3240 storage systems library N series storage expansion units library Clustered Data ONTAP 8.2 library Clustered Data ONTAP Switch library Data ONTAP Mode library Data ONTAP Mode library Data ONTAP Mode library Data ONTAP 7.3 library Data ONTAP 7.2 library Data ONTAP 7.1 library Gateway systems library (Data ONTAP 7.2 and later, including Data ONTAP Mode) Data ONTAP 7.1 gateway systems library Other N series and N series-related documents Notices Copyrights Trademarks Electronic emission notices Federal Communications Commission Statement Contents xix

20 Industry Canada Compliance Statement Australia and New Zealand Class A Statement European Union Electromagnetic Compatibility Directie Germany Electromagnetic Compatibility Directie People's Republic of China Class A Statement Taiwan Class A Statement Taiwan Contact Information Japan Voluntary Control Council for Interference Class A Statement Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association Statement Korean Communications Commission Class A Statement Russia Electromagnetic Interference Class A Statement Index xx IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

21 Figures 1. Ground check ix 2. LC connector Base-T/100Base-T/1000Base-T NICs Base-SX NICs PSUs on opposite sides of the component PSUs on the same side of the component PSUs stacked on the same side of the component PSUs on opposite sides of the component PSUs on the same side of the component PSUs stacked on the same side of the component Example of cold aisle/hot aisle rack cabinet configuration Serice clearances and caster locations for the T00 and T42 racks Model T00 and T42 racks multiple attachments Top iew of non-ibm rack specifications dimensions Rack specifications dimensions, top front iew Rack specifications dimensions, bottom front iew Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2014 xxi

22 xxii IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

23 Tables 1. Supported Flash Pool configurations N3150 physical storage capacity N3150 external physical storage capacity N3150 feature codes N3150 Clustered Data ONTAP feature codes N3150 installation feature codes N3220 raw storage capacity N3220 feature codes N3220 Clustered Data ONTAP feature codes N3220 installation features codes N3240 raw storage capacity N3240 feature codes N3240 Clustered Data ONTAP feature codes N3240 installation features codes N3300 raw storage capacity N3300 feature codes N3300 installation features codes N3400 raw storage capacity N3400 feature codes N3400 installation features codes N3600 raw storage capacity N3600 feature codes N3600 installation features codes N6040 raw storage capacity N6040 feature codes N6040 Clustered Data ONTAP feature codes N6040 installation feature codes N6060 raw storage capacity N6060 feature codes N6060 Clustered Data ONTAP feature codes N6060 installation feature codes N6070 raw storage capacity N6070 feature codes N6070 Clustered Data ONTAP feature codes N6070 installation feature codes N6210 physical attributes N6210 raw storage capacity N6210 feature codes N6210 Clustered Data ONTAP feature codes N6220 physical attributes N6220 raw storage capacity N6220 feature codes N6220 Clustered Data ONTAP feature codes N6240 physical attributes N6240 raw storage capacity N6240 feature codes N6240 Clustered Data ONTAP feature codes N6250 physical attributes N6250 raw storage capacity N6250 feature codes N6250 Clustered Data ONTAP feature codes N6270 physical attributes N6270 raw storage capacity N6270 feature codes N6270 Clustered Data ONTAP feature codes Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2014 xxiii

24 56. N7700 raw storage capacity N7700 filer feature codes N7700 Clustered Data ONTAP feature codes N7700 filer installation feature codes N7900 raw storage capacity N7900 filer feature codes N7900 Clustered Data ONTAP feature codes N7900 filer installation feature codes N7550T physical attributes N7550T raw storage capacity N7550T feature codes N7550T Clustered Data ONTAP feature codes N7550T filer installation feature codes N7950T physical attributes N7950T raw storage capacity N7950T feature codes N7950T Clustered Data ONTAP feature codes EXN1000 feature codes EXN3000 feature codes EXN3200 feature codes EXN3200 installation feature code EXN3500 feature codes EXN4000 feature codes N series software packs N3300, N3400, N3600, and N6040 software bundles N3150, N3220, N3240, N6200 series and N7x50T series software bundles N series software licensed function indicators for N3150 (Model 2857) N series software licensed function indicators for N3220 and N3240 (Model 2857) N series software licensed function indicators for N6210, N6240, N6270 (Model 2858) N series software licensed function indicators for N6220 and N6250 (Model 2858) N series software licensed function indicators for N7550T and N7950T (Model 2867) N series software licensed function indicators for N6040, N6060, and N6070 (Model 2858) N series software licensed function indicators for N3300, N3400 and N3600 (Models 2859 to 2862) N series software licensed function indicators for N7600, N7700, N7800, and N7900 (Models 2866 to 2867) IBM N series host software RJ-45 connection pinout for the ASCII terminal wiring Console adapter pin number connections Communication parameters N3150 physical characteristics N3150 system clearance dimensions N3150 enironmental requirements N3150 electrical power requirements N3150 electrical requirements with one controller module, with and without the 10-GbE mezzanine card N3150 electrical requirements with two controller modules, with and without the 10-GbE mezzanine card N3220 and N3240 system physical characteristics N3220 and N3240 system clearance dimensions N3220 and N3240 system enironmental requirements N3220 and N3240 maximum electrical power N3220 electrical requirements with one controller module with a FC or 10 GbE mezzanine card and either 450 GB or 600 GB disks N3220 electrical requirements with one controller module, no mezzanine card and either 450 GB or 600 GB disks N3220 electrical requirements with two controller modules with a FC or 10GbE mezzanine card and either 450 GB or 600 GB disks N3220 electrical requirements with two controller modules with a FC or 10GbE mezzanine card and 900 GB disks N3220 electrical requirements with two controller modules, no mezzanine card and either 450 GB or 600 GB disks N3220 electrical requirements with two controller modules, no mezzanine card and 900 GB disks N3220 electrical requirements with two controller modules, no mezzanine card, and 800 GB disk dries N3220 electrical requirements with two controller modules, no mezzanine card and 200 GB SSD dries 156 xxi IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

25 112. N3220 electrical requirements with two controller modules, no mezzanine card, and 1.2 TB disk dries N3240 electrical requirements with one controller module with an FC or a 10 GbE mezzanine card and either 1 TB, 2 TB, or 3 TB disks N3240 electrical requirements with one controller module, no mezzanine card and either 1 TB or 2 TB disks N3240 electrical requirements with one controller module, no mezzanine card and 3 TB disks N3240 electrical requirements with two controller modules with an FC or a 10 GbE mezzanine card and either 1 TB or 2 TB disk dries, or a 10 GbE mezzanine card and 3 TB disks N3240 electrical requirements with two controller modules with an FC mezzanine card and 3 TB disks N3240 electrical requirements with two controller modules, no mezzanine card and either 1 TB or 2 TB disks N3240 electrical requirements with two controller modules, no mezzanine card and 3 TB disks N3240 electrical requirements with two controller modules and 12 disks N3240 electrical requirements with two controller modules and 24 SAS 4 TB disks N3240 electrical requirements with two controller modules, no mezzanine card and 200 GB SSD disk dries N3300, N3400 and N3600 system physical characteristics N3300, N3400 and N3600 system clearance dimensions N3300, N3400 and N3600 system enironmental requirements N3300, N3400 and N3600 maximum electrical power N3300 electrical requirements - one controller module N3300 electrical requirements - two controller modules N3300 electrical requirements - one controller module, no disks N3300 electrical requirements - two controller modules, no disks N3400 electrical requirements - one controller module N3400 electrical requirements - two controller modules N3400 electrical requirements - one controller module, no disks N3400 electrical requirements - two controller modules, no disks N3600 electrical requirements - one controller module N3600 electrical requirements - two controller modules N3600 electrical requirements - one controller module, no disks N3600 electrical requirements - two controller modules, no disks N6000 series physical characteristics N6000 series clearance dimensions N6000 series enironmental requirements N6000 series systems maximum electrical power N6040 electrical requirements one controller module N6040 electrical requirements two controller modules N6040 electrical requirements with two PAM I or II cards one controller module N6040 electrical requirements with four PAM I or II cards two controller modules N6060 electrical requirements one controller module N6060 electrical requirements two controller modules N6060 electrical requirements with two PAM I or II cards one controller module N6060 electrical requirements with four PAM I or II cards two controller modules N6070 electrical requirements one controller module N6070 electrical requirements two controller modules N6070 electrical requirements with four PAM I or II cards one controller module N6070 electrical requirements with eight PAM I or II cards two controller modules N6200 series physical characteristics N6200 series clearance dimensions N6200 series enironmental requirements N6200 series systems maximum electrical power N6210 electrical requirements one controller node, with one 256-Gb Flash Cache module N6210 electrical requirements two controller nodes, with one 256-Gb Flash Cache module per node N6220 electrical requirements one controller node, with one 512-GB Flash Cache module N6220/N6240 electrical requirements two controller nodes, with one 256-GB or one 512-GB Flash Cache module per controller node N6220/N6240 electrical requirements one controller node, with one 256-GB or one 512-GB Flash Cache module, and one I/O expansion module N6270 electrical requirements two controller nodes, with one 512-GB or one 1-TB Flash Cache module per controller node N6250/N6270 electrical requirements one controller node, with one 512-GB or one 1-TB Flash Cache module, and one I/O expansion module Tables xx

26 166. N7000 series system physical characteristics N7000 series system clearance dimensions N7000 series system enironmental requirements N7600 and N7700 electrical requirements N7600 and N7700 electrical requirements with four Performance Accelerator Module I or II cards N7800 and N7900 electrical requirements N7800 and N7900 electrical requirements with fie Performance Accelerator Module I or II cards N7x50T series physical characteristics N7x50T series clearance dimensions N7x50T series enironmental requirements N7x50T series systems maximum electrical power N7550T two controller modules electrical requirements: Electrical requirements N7950T controller module and I/O expansion module, with all card slots filled, 25W draw per card EXN1000 physical characteristics EXN1000 clearance dimensions EXN1000 enironmental requirements EXN1000 electrical requirements (7.2K speed dries, HE PSUs) EXN1000 electrical requirements (7.2K speed dries) EXN4000 physical characteristics EXN4000 clearance dimensions EXN4000 enironmental requirements EXN4000 electrical requirements (10K speed dries) EXN4000 electrical requirements (15K speed dries) EXN4000 electrical requirements (HE PSUs, 15K speed dries) EXN3000 physical characteristics EXN3000 clearance dimensions EXN3000 enironmental requirements EXN3000 electrical requirements EXN3000 electrical requirements SAS dries EXN3000 electrical requirements 4TB SAS dries EXN3000 electrical requirements SATA dries Electrical requirements SATA dries, GB or GB disk dries: Electrical requirements SATA dries, 6-100GB SSD dries with 18-1TB or 18-3TB disk dries: EXN3200 physical characteristics EXN3200 clearance dimensions EXN3200 enironmental requirements EXN3200 electrical power requirements EXN3200 electrical requirements EXN3500 physical characteristics EXN3500 clearance dimensions EXN3500 enironmental and electrical requirements EXN3500 electrical requirements SAS dries EXN3500 electrical requirements 200 GB SSD dries EXN3500 electrical requirements 800 GB SSD dries Infiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables V, single phase recommended conductor sizes V, single phase recommended conductor sizes American Wire Gage to Harmonized Cordage equialents IBM 2101 Model N00 rack specifications IBM 2101 Model N42 rack specifications IBM 7014 Model T00 rack specifications IBM 7014 Model T42 rack specifications T00 and T42 rack weight distribution T00 and T42 rack floor-loading specifications Mezzanine cards supported by the N Mezzanine cards supported by the N3220 and N Optional adapter cards supported by the N Dual-port 4 Gbps FC HBA for disk - maximum cable lengths Dual-port 4-Gbps FC HBA for tape - maximum cable lengths Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk and tape attachment (FC 1029) - maximum cable lengths 237 xxi IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

27 226. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1030) - maximum cable lengths Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1036) - maximum cable lengths Optional adapter cards supported by N6000 series systems Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk (FC 1014) - maximum cable lengths Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape (FC 1015) - maximum cable lengths Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017) - maximum cable lengths Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk and tape attachment (FC 1029) - maximum cable lengths Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1030) - maximum cable lengths Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment (FC 1035) - maximum cable lengths Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1036) - maximum cable lengths Optional adapter cards supported by N6200 series systems Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk (FC 1014) - maximum cable lengths Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape (FC 1015) - maximum cable lengths Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017) - maximum cable lengths Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1029) - maximum cable lengths Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1030) - maximum cable lengths Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1036) - maximum cable lengths Optional PCI-X Adapters Optional PCIe adapters Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk (FC 1014) - maximum cable lengths Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape (FC 1015) - maximum cable lengths Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017) - maximum cable lengths Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk or tape attachment (FC 1029) - maximum cable lengths Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1030) - maximum cable lengths Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment (FC 1035) - maximum cable lengths Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1036) - maximum cable lengths Optional adapter cards supported by N7x50T series systems Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk (FC 1014) - maximum cable lengths Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape (FC 1015) - maximum cable lengths Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1029) - maximum cable lengths Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1030) - maximum cable lengths Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1036) - maximum cable lengths Tables xxii

28 xxiii IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

29 About this document This document proides introductory and planning information for the following IBM System Storage N series products: N3150 filers N3220 and N3240 filers N3300, N3400, N3600 filers N6000 series filers and gateways (N6040, N6060, and N6070) N6200 series filers and gateways (N6210, N6220, N6240, N6250, and N6270) N7000 series filers and gateways (N7700 and N7900) N7x50T series filers and gateways (N7550T and N7950T) EXN1000, EXN3000, EXN3200, EXN3500, and EXN4000 storage expansion units Note: This guide applies to systems, including systems with gateway functionality, running Data ONTAP 7.x or Data ONTAP 8.x 7-Mode. In the Data ONTAP 8.x 7-Mode product name, the term 7-Mode signifies that the 8.x release has the same features and functionality found in Data ONTAP 7.3 release family. Note: Gateway functionality is not supported with the Data ONTAP 8.2x release family. Who should read this document Related documents This guide is for qualified system administrators and serice personnel who are familiar with IBM storage systems. This document is for customer use. This document is intended to proide information to customers, operators, administrators, installers, and serice personnel. The following documents, as well as documentation for Data ONTAP and other software, are aailable on the IBM N series support website, which is accessed and naigated as described in Websites on page xxx. For information about installation and setup of your N series system, see the Installation and Setup Instructions that shipped with your system. For information about replacing components in your N series system, see the Hardware and Serice Guide for with your system. For information about error messages, troubleshooting, and monitoring the LEDs for your N series system and optional adapter cards, see the IBM System Storage N series Platform Monitoring Guide. For diagnostic information about your N series system, see the IBM System Storage N series Diagnostics Guide or the IBM System Storage N series System Leel Diagnostics Guide, as applicable for your hardware platform. Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2014 xxix

30 Supported features Websites IBM System Storage N series storage systems are drien by NetApp Data ONTAP software. Some features described in the product software documentation are neither offered nor supported by IBM. Please contact your local IBM representatie or reseller for further details. Information about supported features can also be found on the N series support website, which is accessed and naigated as described in Websites. IBM maintains pages on the World Wide Web where you can get the latest technical information and download deice driers and updates. The following web pages proide N series information: A listing of currently aailable N series products and features can be found at the following web page: The IBM System Storage N series support website requires users to register in order to obtain access to N series support content on the web. To understand how the N series support web content is organized and naigated, and to access the N series support website, refer to the following publicly accessible web page: This web page also proides links to AutoSupport information as well as other important N series product resources. IBM System Storage N series products attach to a ariety of serers and operating systems. To determine the latest supported attachments, go to the IBM N series interoperability matrix at the following web page: For the latest N series hardware product documentation, including planning, installation and setup, and hardware monitoring, serice and diagnostics, see the IBM N series Information Center at the following web page: publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/nasinfo/nseries/index.jsp How this document is organized This document contains the following chapters: Chapter 1, Planning for the IBM N series storage system, on page 1 Chapter 2, IBM N series hardware features, on page 13 Chapter 3, IBM N series storage system software features, on page 119 Chapter 4, Site planning, on page 141 Chapter 5, Cable planning, on page 207 Chapter 6, AutoSupport, on page 211 Appendix A, Recommended power line sizes, on page 213 Appendix B, Power cord list for N series storage systems, on page 215 Appendix C, Specifications for IBM and non-ibm racks, on page 219 Appendix E, Optional adapter cards supported by the N3220 and N3240, on page 233 Appendix F, Optional adapter cards supported by the N3600, on page 235 xxx IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

31 Appendix G, Optional adapter cards supported by N6000 series systems, on page 241 Appendix H, Optional adapter cards supported by N6200 series systems, on page 253 Appendix I, Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems, on page 265 Appendix K, Installing or replacing a Flash Cache module or PAM, on page 289 Appendix L, IBM System Storage N series documentation, on page 299 Notices and statements used in this document The caution and danger statements used in this document also appear in the multilingual IBM Safety Information document. Each caution and danger statement is numbered for easy reference to the corresponding statements in the safety document. The following types of notices and statements are used in this document: Note: These notices proide important tips, guidance, or adice. Important: These notices proide information or adice that might help you aoid inconenient or problem situations. Attention: These notices indicate possible damage to programs, deices, or data. An attention notice is placed just before the instruction or situation in which damage could occur. Caution: These statements indicate situations that can be potentially hazardous to you. A caution statement is placed just before the description of a potentially hazardous procedure step or situation. Danger: These statements indicate situations that can be potentially lethal or extremely hazardous to you. A danger statement is placed just before the description of a potentially lethal or extremely hazardous procedure step or situation. Getting information, help, and serice If you need help, serice, or technical assistance or just want more information about IBM products, you will find a wide ariety of sources aailable from IBM to assist you. This section contains information about where to go for additional information about IBM and IBM products, what to do if you experience a problem with your IBM N series product, and whom to call for serice, if it is necessary. Taiwan Contact Information IBM Taiwan Product Serice Contact Info: IBM Taiwan Corporation 3F, No 7, Song Ren Rd., Taipei Taiwan Tel: About this document xxxi

32 Before you call Before you call, make sure you hae taken these steps to try to sole the problem yourself: Check all cables to make sure they are connected. Check the power switches to make sure the system is turned on. Use the troubleshooting information in your system documentation and use the diagnostic tools that come with your system. Refer to the IBM support website for information on known problems and limitations. Using the documentation The latest ersions of N series software documentation, including Data ONTAP and other software products, are aailable on the IBM N series support website, which is accessed and naigated as described in Websites on page xxx. Current N series hardware product documentation is shipped with your hardware product in printed documents or as PDF files on a documentation CD. For the latest N series hardware product documentation PDFs, go to the IBM N series support website. Hardware documentation, including planning, installation and setup, and hardware monitoring, serice, and diagnostics, is also proided in an IBM N series Information Center at the following web page: publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/nasinfo/nseries/index.jsp Hardware serice and support You can receie hardware serice through IBM Integrated Technology Serices. Visit the following web page for support telephone numbers: Firmware updates IBM N series product firmware is embedded in Data ONTAP. As with all deices, it is recommended that you run the latest leel of firmware. Any firmware updates are posted to the IBM N series support website, which is accessed and naigated as described in Websites on page xxx. Note: If you do not see new firmware updates on the IBM N series support website, you are running the latest leel of firmware. Verify that the latest leel of firmware is installed on your machine before contacting IBM for technical support. Terminology and conentions used in this document This guide uses the following terminology, command conentions, format conentions and keyboard conentions. The term filer describes IBM N series storage systems that either contain internal disk storage or attach to disk storage expansion units specifically designed for the IBM N series storage systems. Filer storage systems do not support using xxxii IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

33 third-party disk storage systems. The following disk storage expansion units are specifically designed for the IBM N series filers: IBM EXN4000 Fibre Channel disk storage expansion unit IBM EXN3500 SAS disk storage expansion unit IBM EXN3000 SAS/SATA disk storage expansion unit IBM EXN3200 SATA disk storage expansion unit IBM EXN1000 Serial Adanced Technology Attachment (SATA) storage expansion unit In this document, the term gateway describes IBM N series storage systems that hae been ordered with gateway functionality. Gateways support arious types of storage, and they are used with third-party disk storage systems. In this case, disk storage for customer data and the RAID controller functionality is proided by the back-end disk storage system. A gateway might also be used with disk storage expansion units specifically designed for the IBM N series models. The terms system or storage system refer to either a gateway by itself or a filer, either by itself or with additional disk dries. Actie/actie and high-aailability terms actie/actie configuration In the Data ONTAP 7.2 and 7.3 release families, refers to a pair of storage systems (sometimes called nodes) configured to sere data for each other if one of the two systems stops functioning. Also sometimes referred to as actie/actie pairs. cluster In the Data ONTAP 7.1 release family, refers to a pair of storage systems (sometimes called nodes) configured to sere data for each other if one of the two systems stops functioning. In Data ONTAP 8.x, acluster is a group of connected nodes (storage systems) that share a global namespace and that you can manage as a single irtual serer or multiple irtual serers, proiding performance, reliability, and scalability benefits. HA (high aailability) In Data ONTAP 8.x, the recoery capability proided by a pair of nodes (storage systems), called an HA pair, that are configured to sere data for each other if one of the two nodes stops functioning. HA pair In Data ONTAP 8.x, a pair of nodes (storage systems) configured to sere data for each other if one of the two nodes stops functioning. Storage terms AT-FCX The controller module of the EXN1000 serial adanced technology attachment (SATA) storage expansion unit. Disk Any hard disk drie Disk shelf or shelf Any storage expansion unit containing hard disk dries. ESH The controller module of Fibre Channel disk storage expansion units. IOM The Input/Output module of SAS disk storage expansion units. About this document xxxiii

34 Loop or Fibre-Channel Arbitrated Loop One or more daisy-chained Fibre Channel storage expansion units connected to an N series storage system. Node The system controller module that executes the software on an N series system. There is one node in single-controller models; there are two nodes in actie/actie or high aailability models. Stack or SAS stack A stack of one or more SAS storage expansion units using IOM modules connected to the storage system. The maximum number of storage expansion units in a stack of storage expansion units and the number of storage expansion unit stacks in a configuration are dependent on the type of storage system. Command conentions You can enter commands on the system console or from any client that can obtain access to the storage system using a Telnet session. In examples that illustrate commands executed on a UNIX workstation, the command syntax and output might differ, depending on your ersion of UNIX. Formatting conentions The following table lists different character formats used in this guide to set off special information. Formatting conention Type of information Italic type Words or characters that require special attention. Placeholders for information you must supply. For example, if the guide requires you to enter the fctest adaptername command, you enter the characters fctest followed by the actual name of the adapter. Book titles in cross-references. Monospaced font Command and daemon names. Bold monospaced font Information displayed on the system console or other computer monitors. The contents of files. Words or characters you type. What you type is always shown in lowercase letters, unless your program is case-sensitie and uppercase letters are necessary for it to work properly. Keyboard conentions This guide uses capitalization and some abbreiations to refer to the keys on the keyboard. The keys on your keyboard might not be labeled exactly as they are in this guide. xxxi IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

35 What appears in this guide... hyphen (-) Enter type enter What it means... Used to separate indiidual keys. For example, Ctrl-D means holding down the Ctrl key while pressing the D key. Note: Alternatiely, this may be expressed as Ctrl+D. Used to refer to the key that generates a carriage return, although the key is named Return on some keyboards. Used to mean pressing one or more keys on the keyboard. Used to mean pressing one or more keys and then pressing the Enter key. How to send your comments Your feedback is important in helping us proide the most accurate and high-quality information. If you hae comments or suggestions for improing this document, send us your comments by to starpubs@us.ibm.com. Be sure to include the following information: Exact publication title Publication form number (for example, GC ) Page, table, or illustration numbers A detailed description of any information that should be changed About this document xxx

36 xxxi IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

37 Chapter 1. Planning for the IBM N series storage system Successful installation of the IBM System Storage N series storage system requires careful planning. You are the most aluable resource in site planning because you hae the most detailed understanding of how the N series storage system and deices attached to it will be used. Site preparation is the responsibility of the customer and this document will proide basic information required to do this preparation. You may want to also enlist the help of your Field Technical Support Specialist, marketing representatie, or other support personnel. Your marketing representatie is aailable to ensure that the hardware and software that you hae chosen will meet your needs. Planning for the IBM N series storage system consists of these main tasks: 1. Understanding the features and functions of the N series storage system and selecting the proper feature codes (FCs) for your business as described in Chapter 2, IBM N series hardware features, on page 13 and Chapter 3, IBM N series storage system software features, on page Planning for the physical enironment where the equipment will operate. This planning step includes the physical space, electrical, temperature, humidity, altitude, air flow, serice clearance, and similar requirements as described in Chapter 4, Site planning, on page Planning for cabling depends on the adapter feature codes (FCs) selected as described in Chapter 5, Cable planning, on page If required, planning for a dual-node (actie/actie or high aailability) configuration for as described in High aailability or actie/actie configurations on page Planning for reporting error information to IBM as described in Chapter 6, AutoSupport, on page 211. This chapter also introduces the following topics: IBM N series storage systems and storage expansion units Storage expansion unit support on page 2 Data ONTAP on page 5 Write Anywhere File Layout (WAFL) on page 5 Interoperability on page 6 Adapter support on page 6 High aailability or actie/actie configurations on page 7 Supported Flash Pool configurations on page 8 IBM N series storage systems and storage expansion units The following IBM System Storage N series storage systems and storage expansion units are described in Chapter 2, IBM N series hardware features, on page 13. N3150 hardware features on page 13 N3220 hardware features on page 18 N3240 hardware features on page 23 Copyright IBM Corp. 2005,

38 N3300 hardware features on page 28 N3400 hardware features on page 31 N3600 hardware features on page 34 N6040 hardware features on page 39 N6060 hardware features on page 45 N6070 hardware features on page 51 N6210 hardware features on page 57 N6220 hardware features on page 62 N6240 hardware features on page 68 N6250 hardware features on page 74 N6270 hardware features on page 80 N7700 filer hardware features on page 86 N7900 filer hardware features on page 91 N7550T hardware features on page 97 N7950T hardware features on page 103 EXN1000 storage expansion unit hardware features on page 109 EXN3000 storage expansion unit hardware features on page 111 EXN3200 storage expansion unit hardware features on page 113 EXN3500 storage expansion unit hardware features on page 115 EXN4000 storage expansion unit hardware features on page 116 Storage expansion unit support The following N series disk storage expansion units are specifically designed for IBM N series systems: IBM EXN4000 Fibre Channel (FC) disk storage expansion unit IBM EXN3000 SAS and SATA disk storage expansion unit IBM EXN3200 SATA disk storage expansion unit IBM EXN3500 SAS disk storage expansion unit IBM EXN1000 serial adanced technology attachment (SATA) storage expansion unit Multiple EXN1000s, each haing different SATA disk drie feature codes, may be attached to the same N series system on the same Fibre Channel loop. Multiple EXN4000s, each haing different Fibre Channel disk drie feature codes, may be attached to the same N series system on the same Fibre Channel loop. Within an EXN3000, SAS and SATA dries cannot be intermixed. For detailed information about the important differences between EXN3000s, EXN3200,and EXN3500s and EXN1000/2000/4000 storage expansion units, see the IBM System Storage N series Uniersal SAS and ACP Cabling Guide. For the latest N series storage expansion unit support information, isit the IBM N series support website, which is accessed and naigated as described in Websites on page xxx. Starting with Data ONTAP 7.3, gateway expands its support matrix to include storage for natie disk sheles and natie disks. Gateways can now irtualize 2 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

39 storage from both third-party storage array enders and natie disk sheles. The Data ONTAP software proides a unified storage software platform that simplifies managing both natie disk sheles and LUNs on storage arrays. You can add storage when and where you need it, without disruption. See the Gateway Implementation Guide for Natie Disk Sheles for additional information about this feature. Intermixing EXN units EXN4000s are Fibre Channel disk storage expansion units. EXN4000 storage expansion units can be mixed within the same loop, but the speed switches on all EXN4000s must be set to the same speed (either 1 Gbps or 2 Gbps). Intermixing Fibre Channel and SATA disk dries in a supported N series system configuration is supported as follows: Intermixing Fibre Channel disk storage expansion units with SATA disk storage expansion units on the same loop is not supported. EXN4000s (Fibre Channel disk dries) and EXN1000s (SATA disk dries) may be attached to the same N series system only if the Fibre Channel disk storage expansion units (EXN4000s ) are on separate loops than the SATA disk storage expansion units (EXN1000s). IBM N series systems with Data ONTAP or higher that support SAS HBAs also support stacks of EXN3000s as well as Fibre Channel loops of EXN1000s, and EXN4000s. A single EXN3000 storage expansion unit must contain only SAS disk dries or only SATA disk dries. Howeer, a stack of EXN3000 storage expansion units can contain storage expansion units with SAS disk dries and storage expansion units with SATA disk dries. IBM N series systems with Data ONTAP P2 or higher (except N3400 and N3600 storage systems, which require Data ONTAP or higher) that support SAS HBAs also support stacks of EXN3500s as well as Fibre Channel loops of EXN1000s and EXN4000s. On IBM N series systems that support SAS HBAs, EXN3000s, EXN3200s, and EXN3500s are supported within the same system configuration, but they cannot be connected in the same SAS stack. A single SAS stack must contain only EXN3000s, EXN3200s, or EXN3500s. Connecting storage expansion units to N series systems This section describes the requirements for connecting a storage expansion unit to N series systems and other storage expansion units. For detailed instructions about how to install and connect one or more storage expansion units in a rack, or to connect a storage expansion unit to your filer storage system, see the Installation and Setup Instructions and the Hardware and Serice Guide for your N series controllers and storage expansion units. For connections to EXN1000/4000 storage expansion units, IBM strongly recommends using optical (Fibre Channel) cabling wheneer possible. See Chapter 2, IBM N series hardware features, on page 13 for details about the maximum number of drie loops, maximum number of storage expansion units or hard disk dries per loop, maximum total storage capacity, and maximum total number of hard disk dries for configurations using your N series system. Chapter 1. Planning for the IBM N series storage system 3

40 Multipath looping is recommended for all configurations to proide additional redundancy. This includes single or dual controller and single or multiple storage expansion units. Do not mix Fibre Channel EXN4000s and SATA EXN1000 storage expansion units in the same loop. EXN4000 storage expansion units can be mixed within the same loop, but the speed switches on all EXN4000s must be set to the same speed (either 1 Gbps or 2 Gbps). For detailed information about the important differences between EXN3000, EXN3200, and EXN3500, and EXN1000/4000 storage expansion units, see the IBM System Storage N series Uniersal SAS and ACP Cabling Guide. For detailed information about the FC/SAS Atto Bridges, see the ATTO FibreBridge 6500N Installation and Operation Manual. Note: One optical cable feature code order proides two cables. One SFP feature code order proides two SFPs. Storage expansion unit cabling requirements You must meet the cabling requirements discussed in the following sections when connecting the storage expansion unit to an N series system or to other storage expansion units. For the latest information on cabling requirements, see Installation and Setup Instructions and the Hardware and Serice Guide for your storage system. Connecting the storage expansion unit to the N series system: EXN4000: For EXN1000 and When connecting EXN1000 and EXN4000 storage expansion units to an N series system, you must use LC-to-LC Fibre Channel optical cables and SFPs. For EXN3000, EXN3200, and EXN3500: For information about cabling EXN3000s, EXN3200s, and EXN3500s, see the IBM System Storage N series Uniersal SAS and ACP Cabling Guide. Connecting the storage expansion unit to other storage expansion units: For EXN1000 and EXN4000: When connecting a storage expansion unit to other storage expansion units, IBM strongly recommends using two LC-to-LC Fibre Channel optical cables and four SFPs (two SFPs per LC-to-LC Fibre Channel optical cable). Note: SFP-to-SFP Fibre Channel copper cables may also be used for connections (to a maximum of three meters) between storage expansion units. You must order one cable feature code and two SFP feature codes per storage expansion unit. For EXN3000, EXN3200, and EXN3500: Connections between EXN3000s and EXN3200s are made using SAS and ACP cables. For information about cabling EXN3000s, EXN3200s, and EXN3500s, see the IBM System Storage N series Uniersal SAS and ACP Cabling Guide. 4 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

41 For detailed information about the FC/SAS Atto Bridges, see the ATTO FibreBridge 6500N Installation and Operation Manual. Connecting a gateway to external storage You must use fiber optic cables to connect a gateway to external storage on a Fibre Channel SAN. See the Interoperability Matrix at the following web page for supported deices for your gateway system. Refer to the documentation for your external storage for additional information. Data ONTAP N series storage systems are drien by the Data ONTAP operating system. Data ONTAP is a highly optimized, scalable, and flexible operating system that can handle mixed SAN and NAS enironments. Data ONTAP deliers flexible management and high aailability, ensures business continuance, and proides data permanence, thereby reducing storage management complexity in your enterprise. Data ONTAP software integrates seamlessly into UNIX, Windows, and web enironments and proides the foundation to build your storage infrastructure and an enterprise-wide data fabric for mission-critical business applications. The operating system includes integrated secure access capabilities (SSL, SSH) and System Manager, a web-based administration tool that allows IT administrators to fully manage N series systems from remote locations. The innoatie Data ONTAP architecture deliers scalable performance and a flexible storage enironment, that can be applied in many enironments ranging from small workgroups to enterprise data centers. Data ONTAP stores and seres applications, consolidates data, and proides reliable data access throughout the enterprise. The Data ONTAP operating system simplifies management and optimizes storage utilization by combining file-system technology and a microkernel design, enabling such features as flexible data management, scalability, and heterogeneous access. Clustered Data ONTAP is an option of Data ONTAP that proides a scale-out solution allowing customers to gradually increase the performance and capacity of a single name space enironment (horizontal scaling) to meet the needs of their organization. This proides a more flexible enironment and enables customers to presere their inestment beyond simple capacity scaling (ertical scaling). Write Anywhere File Layout (WAFL) The WAFL (Write Anywhere File Layout) file system contributes to a high leel of data aailability while proiding dynamic and flexible data storage containers using Flexible Volume technology as well as data protection using integrated, nonolatile RAM and a block-leel checksum capability. The WAFL file system is designed specifically to work in an NFS appliance. The primary focus is on the algorithms and data structures that WAFL uses to implement Snapshots, which are read-only clones of the actie file system. WAFL uses a copy-on-write technique to minimize the disk space that Snapshots consume. Chapter 1. Planning for the IBM N series storage system 5

42 Interoperability Adapter support The latest information on software and hardware interoperability can be accessed from the following web page: Most IBM System Storage N series controller models feature PCI adapter slots. Adapters must be added in pairs, one per node, to dual-controller models, so that both nodes are populated with the same number of each type of PCI adapters. There are no standard PCI adapter slots on the N3220 and N3240 series storage systems. There is a custom PCI connection that allows for either of the following: A Mezzanine adapter with two Fibre Channel ports that will auto- negotiate to 2, 4, or 8 Gbps speeds. A Mezzanine adapter with two 10 Gbps Ethernet ports that utilize SFP+ connections to the network. There are no PCI adapter slots on the N3150, N3300, and N3400 systems. No additional adapter options are supported for the N3150, N3300, and N3400 systems. There is one aailable PCIe adapter slot per node on the N3600 storage system. The PCIe adapters supported by the N3600 are described in Appendix F, Optional adapter cards supported by the N3600, on page 235. There are fie aailable PCIe adapter slots and three aailable PCI-X adapter slots per node on the N7700 and N7900 storage systems. (The sixth PCIe adapter slot on each N7700 or N7900 node is resered for the NVRAM6 adapter and is not aailable for PCIe adapter card use). The PCIe and PCI-X adapters supported by the N7700 and N7900 storage systems are described in Appendix I, Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems, on page 265. There are three PCIe X8 expansion slots and one PCIe X4 expansion slot per node on the N6000 series storage systems. The PCIe adapters supported by the N6000 series storage systems are described in Appendix G, Optional adapter cards supported by N6000 series systems, on page 241. There are two PCIe expansion slots per controller node on the N6200 series storage systems. N6220, N6240, N6250, and N6270 Exx models also include one I/O expansion module per controller node; each I/O expansion module proides four additional PCIe slots. Note: The I/O expansion module is not aailable on N6210 Cxx models. The PCIe adapters supported by the N6200 series storage systems are described in Appendix H, Optional adapter cards supported by N6200 series systems, on page 253. There are two aailable ertical expansion slots and four PCIe expansion slots per controller node on the N7x50T storage systems. The N7950T also includes one I/O expansion module per controller node; each I/O expansion module proides two additional ertical slots and eight PCIe slots, which means a total of 4 aailable 6 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

43 ertical slots and twele PCIe slots for adapter expansion per node. One ertical slot per controller is occupied by the NVRAM card and the other three ertical slots are resered for features 1079 and Any and all adapter cards (hardware features) added to an N7950T configuration must be added in equal numbers to the two nodes of the N7950T. The two nodes must be identically configured. The PCIe adapters supported by the N7x50T storage systems are described in Appendix J, Optional adapter cards supported by N7x50T series systems, on page 279. High aailability or actie/actie configurations Before beginning hardware planning, decide if the higher aailability obtained by clustering two N series storage system nodes is needed. These higher aailability configurations are referred to as HA (high aailability) pairs in Data ONTAP 8.x, as actie/actie configurations in Data ONTAP 7.2 and 7.3, and as clustered configurations in Data ONTAP 7.1. An HA pair (or actie/actie configuration) consists of two storage systems (nodes) whose controllers are connected to each other either directly or, in the case of a fabric-attached MetroCluster, through switches and FC-VI interconnect adapters. You can configure the HA pair so that each node in the pair shares access to a common set of storage, subnets, and tape dries, or each node can own its own distinct set of storage. The nodes are connected to each other through a NVRAM adapter, or, in the case of systems with two controllers in a single chassis, through an internal interconnect. This allows one node to sere data that resides on the disks of its failed partner node. Each node continually monitors its partner, mirroring the data for each other s nonolatile memory (NVRAM or NVMEM). Two N series storage system nodes can be clustered together for higher aailability using the Cluster Failoer (CFO) software feature. IBM N3150 consists of single-node (A15) and dual-node (A25) (actie-actie) base units. IBM N3220 (A12 and A22) and N3240 (A14 and A24) hae two models each. N3220 and N3240 are aailable in a single enclosure system where models A12 and A14 are aailable as a single node and models A22 and A24 are aailable as dual node. Actie/actie or high aailability configuration IBM N3300, N3400, N3600 and N6000 series systems all contain both clustered (actie/actie or high aailability) nodes in the same enclosure. IBM N6200 series HA models that do not include Input/Output expansion modules contain both nodes in the same enclosure. Dual-controller IBM N6200 series models that do include Input/Output expansion modules contain controller nodes in separate enclosures. IBM N7x50T series includes N7950T Model E22 that is a dual node, dual enclosure system. It has one controller module and one Input/Output expansion module in each enclosure. N7550T is an actie/actie dual-node base unit. Chapter 1. Planning for the IBM N series storage system 7

44 Configuring storage systems in an HA pair (or actie/actie configuration) proides the following benefits: Fault tolerance When one node fails or becomes impaired, a takeoer occurs, and the partner node continues to sere the failed node s data. Nondisruptie software upgrades When you halt one node and allow takeoer, the partner node continues to sere data for the halted node while you upgrade the node you halted. For more information about nondisruptie upgrades, see the Data ONTAP Upgrade Guide or Upgrade and Reert/Downgrade Guide for your ersion of Data ONTAP. Nondisruptie storage system and disk maintenance When you halt one node and allow takeoer, the partner node continues to sere data for the halted node while you replace or repair hardware in the node you halted. More information about actie/actie or high aailability configurations is proided in the following documents: IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.x High Aailability Configuration Guide IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Actie/Actie Configuration Guide IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Actie/Actie Configuration Guide IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Cluster Installation and Administration Guide IBM System Storage N series MetroCluster Redbook, REDP Supported Flash Pool configurations Flash Pools enable you to add one or more RAID groups composed of SSDs to an aggregate that is otherwise composed of HDDs. The SSDs function as a high-performance cache for the working data set, increasing the performance of the aggregate without incurring the expense of using SSDs for the entire aggregate. For more information about the Flash Pool feature, refer to Data ONTAP Storage Management Guide for your ersion of Data ONTAP. Table 1 describes the supported Flash Pool configurations: Table 1. Supported Flash Pool configurations Supported Flash Pool System configuration N x 200 GB SSD dries +8x 2 TB SATA or 900 GB SAS disk dries Required Data ONTAP ersion Data ONTAP N3220 N x 200 GB SSD dries +8x 4 TB NL SAS disk dries 4 x 200 GB SSD dries + 20 x 900 GB SAS disk dries 4 x 200 GB SSD dries + 20 x 2 TB SATA disk dries 4 x 200 GB SSD dries + 20 x 4 TB NL SAS disk dries Data ONTAP Data ONTAP IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

45 Table 1. Supported Flash Pool configurations (continued) System EXN3000 EXN3000 Supported Flash Pool configuration 6 x 100 GB SSD dries + 18 x 1 TB or 3 TB SATA disk dries 4 x 200 GB SSD dries + 20 x 2 TB SATA disk dries Required Data ONTAP ersion Data ONTAP Data ONTAP EXN3500 4x200GBSSD+20x4TB NL SAS disk dries 4 x 200 GB SSD dries + 20 x 900 GB SAS disk dries Data ONTAP Supported aggregate size, Infinite Volume size, and olume count Storage system N3150 N3220 N3240 N6040 N6060 Data ONTAP release Clustered Data ONTAP RC1 Data ONTAP RC1 for 7-Mode Data ONTAP for 7-Mode Clustered Data ONTAP RC1 Data ONTAP RC1 for 7-Mode Data ONTAP for 7-Mode Clustered Data ONTAP RC1 Data ONTAP RC1 for 7-Mode Data ONTAP for 7-Mode Clustered Data ONTAP RC1 Data ONTAP RC1 for 7-Mode Data ONTAP for 7-Mode Clustered Data ONTAP RC1 Data ONTAP RC1 for 7-Mode Data ONTAP for 7-Mode Maximum aggregate size 32-bit (TB) 1 Maximum aggregate size 64-bit (TB) 1 Maximum Infinite Volume size (TB) Maximum olume count (Single) Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported 500 Chapter 1. Planning for the IBM N series storage system 9

46 Clustered Data ONTAP RC N6070 N6210 N6220 N6240 N6250 N6270 N7700 N7900 Data ONTAP RC1 for 7-Mode Data ONTAP for 7-Mode Clustered Data ONTAP RC1 Data ONTAP RC1 for 7-Mode Data ONTAP for 7-Mode Clustered Data ONTAP RC1 Data ONTAP RC1 for 7-Mode Data ONTAP for 7-Mode Clustered Data ONTAP RC1 Data ONTAP RC1 for 7-Mode Data ONTAP for 7-Mode Clustered Data ONTAP RC1 Data ONTAP RC1 for 7-Mode Data ONTAP for 7-Mode Clustered Data ONTAP RC1 Data ONTAP RC1 for 7-Mode Data ONTAP for 7-Mode Clustered Data ONTAP RC1 Data ONTAP RC1 for 7-Mode Data ONTAP for 7-Mode Clustered Data ONTAP RC1 Data ONTAP RC1 for 7-Mode Data ONTAP for 7-Mode Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

47 N7550T Clustered Data ONTAP RC1 Data ONTAP RC1 for 7-Mode Data ONTAP for 7-Mode Not Supported Not Supported 500 Clustered Data ONTAP RC N7950T Data ONTAP RC1 for 7-Mode Not Supported 500 Data ONTAP for 7-Mode Not Supported 500 Note: 1 The maximum usable aggregate capacity is roughly 90 percent of the alues shown in the table. Note: 2 The maximum olume count is the total number of FlexVol olumes and Infinite Volume constituents where Infinite Volume is supported. Chapter 1. Planning for the IBM N series storage system 11

48 12 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

49 Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features N3150 hardware features This chapter describes the hardware features for the following N series products. N3150 hardware features N3220 hardware features on page 18 N3240 hardware features on page 23 N3300 hardware features on page 28 N3400 hardware features on page 31 N3600 hardware features on page 34 N6040 hardware features on page 39 N6060 hardware features on page 45 N6070 hardware features on page 51 N6210 hardware features on page 57 N6220 hardware features on page 62 N6250 hardware features on page 74 N6240 hardware features on page 68 N6270 hardware features on page 80 N7700 filer hardware features on page 86 N7900 filer hardware features on page 91 N7550T hardware features on page 97 N7950T hardware features on page 103 Clustered Data ONTAP hardware features on page 109 EXN1000 storage expansion unit hardware features on page 109 EXN3000 storage expansion unit hardware features on page 111 EXN3200 storage expansion unit hardware features on page 113 EXN3500 storage expansion unit hardware features on page 115 EXN4000 storage expansion unit hardware features on page 116 This chapter also proides rack mounting information in Rack mount requirements on page 117. The IBM System Storage N3150 storage controller consists of single-node (Model A15) and dual-node (Model A25) (actie-actie) base units. Both models are designed to proide fast data access, simultaneous multiprotocol support, expandability, upgradability, and low maintenance. N3150 storage controllers are designed to interoperate with products capable of data transmission in the industry-standard iscsi, CIFS, and NFS protocols. These include IBM eserer System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z (NFS only) serers. Details and current information on N3150 interoperability is aailable at: Copyright IBM Corp. 2005,

50 N3150 A15 The N3150 Model A15 is designed to proide a single-node storage controller with iscsi, NFS, and CIFS support. This model is a 2U rack-mountable storage controller. The N3150 Model A15 includes: 2U, standard 19-inch rackmount enclosure One 1.73 GHz Intel dual-core processor Up to 6 GB random access ECC memory Four integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ45 ports Two SAS ports One serial console port One integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) port Redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fans The N3150 Model A15 may be upgraded to an N3150 Model A25, howeer, this is a disruptie upgrade. N3150 A25 The N3150 Model A25 is designed to proide identical functions as the N3150 Model A15, but with the addition of a second PCM and the CFO licensed function. Model A25 also supports a maximum of 60 dries. The two PCMs are designed to proide failoer and failback functions, helping improe oerall aailability. The Model A25 is a 2U rack-mountable storage controller. The N3150 Model A25 includes: 2U, standard 19-inch rackmount enclosure Two 1.73 GHz Intel dual-core processors Up to 12 GB random access ECC memory (6 GB per controller) Eight integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ45 ports Four SAS ports Two serial console ports Two integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) ports Redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fans Connecting storage expansion units to the N3150 N3150 storage controllers support the EXN3000 SAS/SATA storage expansion unit and the high-density EXN3500 SAS storage expansion unit. N3150 storage controllers can attach a The maximum number of EXN3000 SAS/SATA or EXN3500 SAS storage expansion units that can be attached to N3150 storage controllers is two. The EXN3000 storage expansion unit is a 4U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing a maximum of 24 SAS or SATA disk dries. The supported disk dries are: SAS: 300 GB, 450 GB, 600 GB, and 4 TB physical capacities SATA: 500 GB, 1 TB, 2 TB, and 3 TB physical capacities Solid state disk (SSD): 100 GB and 200 GB physical capacities SED SAS: 3 TB and 4 TB physical capacities 14 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

51 The EXN3500 storage expansion unit is a 2U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing a maximum of 24, 2.5-inch, small form factor (SFF) SATA disk dries. The supported disk dries are: SAS: 450 GB, 600 GB, 900 GB, and 1.2 TB physical capacities Solid state disk (SSD): 200 GB, 400 GB, 800 GB, and 1.6 TB physical capacities SED SAS: 900 GB physical capacity Table 2 describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for the N3150 Model A15 and Model A25: Table 2. N3150 physical storage capacity Disk enclosure Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal Disk drie capacity 450 GB SAS disk dries 600 GB SAS disk dries 900 GB SAS disk dries 1.2 TB SAS disk dries 1 TB SATA disk dries 2 TB SATA disk dries 3 TB SATA disk dries 4 TB SED NL SAS and4tbnlsas disk dries Maximum disk dries TB TB TB TB TB TB TB TB Maximum physical capacity 1 Internal 100 GB SSD dries TB Internal 200 GB SSD dries TB Internal 800 GB SSD dries TB 1 The maximum raw storage capacity of the N3150 system is determined by the maximum number of disk dries supported and a maximum physical storage limit (in TB). Both limits must be honored. Table 3 describes the maximum supported total external physical storage capacity for the N3150 Model A15 and Model A25: Table 3. N3150 external physical storage capacity Disk enclosure EXN3000 EXN3000 EXN3000 Disk drie capacity 300 GB SAS disk dries 450 GB SAS disk dries 600 GB SAS disk dries Maximum storage enclosures Maximum disk dries Maximum physical capacity TB TB TB Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 15

52 Table 3. N3150 external physical storage capacity (continued) Disk enclosure EXN3000 EXN3000 EXN3000 EXN3000 EXN3000 EXN3000 EXN3500 EXN3500 EXN3500 EXN3500 EXN3500 EXN3500 EXN3500 EXN3500 Disk drie capacity 4 TB SED NL SAS and 4 TB NL SAS disk dries 500 GB SATA disk dries 1 TB SATA disk dries 2 TB SATA disk dries 3 TB SATA disk dries 200 GB solid state dries 200 GB solid state dries 400 GB solid state dries 800 GB solid state dries 1.6 TB solid state dries 450 GB SAS disk dries 600 GB SAS disk dries 900 GB SAS disk dries 1.2 TB SAS disk dries Maximum storage enclosures Maximum disk dries Maximum physical capacity TB TB TB TB TB TB TB TB TB TB TB TB TB TB 1 The maximum raw storage capacity of the N3150 system is determined by the maximum number of disk dries supported and a maximum physical storage limit (in TB). Both limits must be honored. EXN3000 SAS/SATA storage expansion units may share a SAS stack with EXN3500 SAS storage expansion units. N3150 feature codes Table 4. N3150 feature codes Description Machine Model Feature 10 GbE Mezzanine A15, A TB SATA Drie 2857 A15, A TB SATA Drie 2857 A15, A TB SATA Drie 2857 A15, A IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

53 Table 4. N3150 feature codes (continued) Description Machine Model Feature 4 TB NL SAS Drie 2857 A15, A GB SSD Drie 2857 A15, A GB SSD Drie 2857 A15, A GB SAS SFF Disk 2857 A15, A Drie 600 GB SAS SFF Disk 2857 A15, A Drie 900 GB SAS SFF Disk 2857 A15, A Drie 1.2 TB SAS SFF Disk 2857 A15, A Drie 800 GB SSD Drie 2857 A15, A GB SAS SFF SED 2857 A15, A Disk Drie 900 GB SAS SFF SED 2857 A15, A Disk Drie 3 TB SED SAS Disk 2857 A15, A Drie 4 TB SED NL SAS 2857 A15, A Disk Drie HDD Blank Panel 2857 A15, A Data ONTAP 8.2+ Indicator 2857 A15, A Table 5. N3150 Clustered Data ONTAP feature codes Description Machine Model Feature Clustered Data 2857 A ONTAP base license Cluster machine 2857 A identifier 16-port cluster 2857 A interconnect switch TwinAx cable, 0.5m, for CN1610 (16-port cluster interconnect switch) 2857 A TwinAx cable, 2m, for CN1610 (16-port cluster interconnect switch) TwinAx cable, 5m, for CN1610 (16-port cluster interconnect switch) 2857 A A GbE SFP A15, A Embedded NIC 2 Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 17

54 Note: 1 Feature code 2031 must be assigned if you hae installed Clustered Data ONTAP. Note: 2 Feature code 2013 is used in the cluster interconnect switch with optical cables if TwinAx cables are not used. Table 6. N3150 installation feature codes Description Machine Model Feature Field install rack 2857 A15, A mount kit Uninstalled code authorization 2857 A15, A N3220 hardware features The power cord features for the N3150 are listed in Appendix B, Power cord list for N series storage systems, on page 215. The IBM System Storage N3220 storage controller includes the Model A12, a single-node base unit, and the Model A22, an actie/actie dual-node base unit. Both models are designed to proide fast data access, simultaneous multiprotocol support, expandability, upgradability, and low maintenance requirements. The N3220 is designed to interoperate with products capable of data transmission in the industry-standard iscsi, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These include the IBM eserer System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z (NFS only) serers. Details and current information on N3220 interoperability is aailable at: For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel, Fibre Channel oer Ethernet, and iscsi, see the IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iscsi Configuration Guide for your ersion of Data ONTAP. N3220 A12 The N3220 Model A12 is designed to proide a single-node storage controller with HTTP, iscsi, NFS, CIFS, and FCP support ia optional features. The N3220 Model A12 is a 2U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The base chassis includes: 2U, standard 19-inch rackmount enclosure One 1.73 GHz Intel dual-core processor 6 GB random access ECC memory Four integrated gigabit Ethernet RJ45 ports Two SAS ports One serial console port One integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) port Redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies with integrated cooling fans The N3220 Model A12 may be upgraded to an N3220 Model A22. The upgrade from a Model A12 to a Model A22 is a disruptie upgrade. 18 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

55 N3220 A22 The N3220 Model A22 is designed to proide identical function to the N3220 Model A12, but with the addition of a second processor control module (PCM) and the Clustered Failoer (CFO) licensed function. The Model A22 consists of two PCMs that are designed to proide failoer and failback function, helping improe oerall aailability. The Model A22 is a 2U rack-mountable storage controller. The N3220 Model A22 includes: 2U, standard 19-inch rackmount enclosure (A22) Two 1.73 GHz Intel dual-core processor 12 GB random access ECC memory (6 GB per controller) Eight integrated gigabit Ethernet RJ45 ports Four SAS ports Two serial console ports Two integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) port Redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies with integrated cooling fans Connecting storage expansion units to the N3220 The N3220 storage controller supports both the EXN1000 Serial Adanced Technology Attachment (SATA) storage expansion unit, the EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units, the EXN3000 SAS/SATA storage expansion unit, and the high-density EXN3500 SAS storage expansion units. The maximum number of EXN1000/EXN4000 storage expansion units that may be attached to either the Model A12 or A22 is six. The maximum number of EXN3000/EXN3500 SAS/SATA storage expansion units that can be attached is nine. On the initial order of an N3220 system, either SAS-attached or FC-attached expansion units may be ordered, but not both. The EXN1000 storage expansion unit proides a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing a minimum of fie, up to a maximum of 14, serial adanced technology attachment (SATA) disk dries, either in 250 GB, 320 GB, 500 GB, 750 GB, 1 TB, or 2 TB physical capacities. The EXN4000 storage expansion units proide a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing a minimum of 5, up to a maximum of 14, Fibre Channel disk dries. The EXN4000 support the following Fibre Channel disk drie speeds and capacities: 15,000 reolutions per minute (15K RPM) of 144 GB, 300 GB, 450 GB and 600 GB capacities 10,000 reolutions per minute (10K RPM) of 144 GB and 300 GB capacities The EXN3000 storage expansion units proide a 4U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing a maximum of 24 SAS or SATA disk dries. The EXN3000 support the following capacities: SAS: 300 GB, 450 GB, 600 GB, and 4 TB physical capacities SATA: 500 GB, 1 TB, 2 TB, and 3 TB physical capacities Solid state disk (SSD): 100 GB and 200 GB physical capacities SED SAS: 3 TB and 4 TB physical capacities Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 19

56 The EXN3500 storage expansion units proide a 2U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing a maximum of 24 SAS disk dries. The EXN3500 support the following capacities: SAS: 450 GB, 600 GB, 900 GB, and 1.2 TB physical capacities Solid state disk (SSD): 200 GB, 400 GB, 800 GB, and 1.6 TB physical capacities SED SAS: 900 GB physical capacity Each storage expansion unit contains a maximum of 14 (for EXN1000 and EXN4000) disk dries and 24 (for EXN3000 and EXN3500), all of a particular type (rotational speed and capacity). For the initial order of the IBM System Storage N3220, you may not include storage expansion units containing more than two types (rotational speed and capacity) of disk dries. Table 7 describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for the N3220 Model A12 and Model A22. Table 7. N3220 raw storage capacity Disk enclosure Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN3000 EXN3000 EXN3000 EXN3000 Disk drie capacity 200 GB solid state dries 450 GB SAS disk dries 600 GB SAS disk dries 1.2 TB SAS disk dries 900 GB SAS disk dries 800 GB solid state dries 250 GB SATA disk dries 500 GB SATA disk dries 750 GB SATA disk dries 1 TB SATA disk dries 2 TB SATA disk dries 100 GB solid state dries 200 GB solid state dries 300 GB SAS disk dries 450 GB SAS disk dries Maximum storage enclosures Maximum disk dries Maximum physical capacity 1 n/a TB n/a TB n/a TB n/a TB n/a TB n/a TB TB TB TB TB TB TB TB TB TB 20 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

57 Table 7. N3220 raw storage capacity (continued) Disk enclosure EXN3000 EXN3000 EXN3000 EXN3000 EXN3000 EXN3000 EXN3500 EXN3500 EXN3500 EXN3500 EXN3500 EXN3500 EXN3500 EXN3500 EXN4000 EXN4000 EXN4000 Disk drie capacity 600 GB SAS disk dries 4 TB SED NL SAS and 4 TB SAS disk dries 500 GB SATA disk dries 1 TB SATA disk dries 2 TB SATA disk dries 3 TB SATA disk dries 200 GB solid state dries 400 GB solid state dries 800 GB solid state dries 1.6 TB solid state dries 450 GB SAS disk dries 600 GB SAS disk dries 900 GB SAS disk dries 1.2 TB SAS disk dries 144 GB Fibre Channel disk dries 300 GB Fibre Channel disk dries 450 GB Fibre Channel disk dries Maximum storage enclosures Maximum disk dries Maximum physical capacity TB TB TB TB TB TB TB TB TB TB TB TB TB TB TB TB TB 1 The maximum raw storage capacity of the N3220 system is determined by the maximum number of disk dries supported and a maximum physical storage limit (in TB). Both limits must be honored. EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units must not share a Fibre Channel loop with EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units. EXN3000 SAS/SATA storage expansion units must not share a SAS stack with EXN3500 SAS storage expansion units. Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 21

58 N3220 feature codes Table 8. N3220 feature codes Description Machine Model Feature Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC 2857 A12, A m 50-micron Fibre Channel 2857 A12, A cable (LC/LC) FCoE SFP+ COPPER CABLE, 5M 2857 A12, A Gb FC Mezzanine 2857 A12, A GbE Mezzanine A12, A HDD Blank Panel 2857 A12, A GB, SAS HDD 2857 A12, A GB, SAS HDD 2857 A12, A GB SAS HDD 2857 A12, A TB SAS HDD 2857 A12, A GB, SED-SAS HDD 2857 A12, A GB, SED-SAS HDD 2857 A12, A GB SSD 2857 A12, A GB SSD 2857 A12, A Data ONTAP 8.2+ Indicator 2857 A12, A Table 9. N3220 Clustered Data ONTAP feature codes Description Machine Model Feature Clustered Data 2857 A ONTAP base license Cluster machine 2857 A identifier 16-port cluster 2857 A interconnect switch TwinAx cable, 0.5m, for CN1610 (16-port cluster interconnect switch) 2857 A TwinAx cable, 2m, for CN1610 (16-port cluster interconnect switch) TwinAx cable, 5m, for CN1610 (16-port cluster interconnect switch) 2857 A A GbE SFP A12, A Embedded NIC 2 Note: 1 Feature code 2031 must be assigned if you hae installed Clustered Data ONTAP. 22 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

59 Note: 2 Feature code 2013 is used in the cluster interconnect switch with optical cables if TwinAx cables are not used. Table 10. N3220 installation features codes Description Machine Model Feature Field install rack mount kit 2857 A12, A N3240 hardware features The power cord features for the N3220 are listed in Appendix B, Power cord list for N series storage systems, on page 215. The IBM System Storage N3240 storage controller includes the Model A14, a single-node base unit, and the Model A24, an actie/actie dual-node base unit. Both models are designed to proide fast data access, simultaneous multiprotocol support, expandability, upgradability, and low maintenance requirements. The N3240 is designed to interoperate with products capable of data transmission in the industry-standard iscsi, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These include the IBM eserer System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z (NFS only) serers. Details and current information on N3240 interoperability is aailable at: For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel, Fibre Channel oer Ethernet, and iscsi, see the IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iscsi Configuration Guide for your ersion of Data ONTAP. N3240 A14 The N3240 Model A14 is designed to proide a single-node storage controller with HTTP, iscsi, NFS, CIFS, and FCP support ia optional features. The N3240 Model A14 is a 4U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The base chassis includes: 4U, standard 19-inch rackmount enclosure One 1.73 GHz Intel dual-core processor 6 GB random access ECC memory Four integrated gigabit Ethernet RJ45 ports Two SAS ports One serial console port One integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) port Redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies with integrated cooling fans The N3240 Model A14 may be upgraded to an N3240 Model A24. The upgrade from a Model A14 to a Model A24 is a disruptie upgrade. N3240 A24 The N3240 Model A24 is designed to proide identical function to the N3240 Model A14, but with the addition of a second processor control module (PCM) and the Clustered Failoer (CFO) licensed function. The Model A24 consists of two PCMs that are designed to proide failoer and failback function, helping improe oerall aailability. The Model A24 is a 4U rack-mountable storage controller. Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 23

60 The N3240 Model A24 includes: 4U, standard 19-inch rackmount enclosure Two 1.73 GHz Intel dual-core processor 12 GB random access ECC memory (6 GB per controller) Eight integrated gigabit Ethernet RJ45 ports Four SAS ports Two serial console ports Two integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) port Redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies with integrated cooling fans Connecting storage expansion units to the N3240 The N3240 storage controller supports both the EXN1000 Serial Adanced Technology Attachment (SATA) storage expansion unit, the EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units, the EXN3000 SAS/SATA storage expansion unit, and the high-density EXN3500 SAS storage expansion units. The maximum number of EXN1000/EXN4000 storage expansion units that may be attached to either the Model A14 or A24 is six. The maximum number of EXN3000/EXN3500 SAS/SATA storage expansion units that can be attached is nine. On the initial order of an N3240 system, either SAS-attached or FC-attached expansion units may be ordered, but not both. The EXN1000 storage expansion unit proides a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing 5, up to a maximum of 14, serial adanced technology attachment (SATA) disk dries, either in 250 GB, 320 GB, 500 GB, 750 GB, 1 TB, or 2 TB physical capacities. The EXN4000 storage expansion units proide a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing 5, up to a maximum of 14, Fibre Channel disk dries. TheEXN4000 support the following Fibre Channel disk drie speeds and capacities: 15,000 reolutions per minute (15K RPM) of 144 GB, 300 GB, 450 GB and 600 GB capacities 10,000 reolutions per minute (10K RPM) of 144 GB and 300 GB capacities The EXN3000 storage expansion unit is a 4U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing a maximum of 24 SAS or SATA disk dries. The supported disk dries are: SAS: 300 GB, 450 GB, 600 GB, and 4 TB physical capacities SATA: 500 GB, 1 TB, 2 TB, and 3 TB physical capacities Solid state disk (SSD): 100 GB and 200 GB physical capacities SED SAS: 3 TB and 4 TB physical capacities The EXN3500 storage expansion unit is a 2U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing a maximum of 24, 2.5 inch, small form factor (SFF) SAS disk dries. The supported disk dries are: SAS: 450 GB, 600 GB, 900 GB, and 1.2 TB physical capacities Solid state disk (SSD): 200 GB, 400 GB, 800 GB, and 1.6 TB physical capacities SED SAS: 900 GB physical capacity Each storage expansion unit contains a maximum of 14 (for EXN1000 and EXN4000) disk dries and 24 (for EXN3000 and EXN3500), all of a particular type 24 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

61 (rotational speed and capacity). For the initial order of the IBM System Storage N3240, you may not include storage expansion units containing more than two types (rotational speed and capacity) of disk dries. Table 11 describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for the N3240 Model A14 and Model A24. Table 11. N3240 raw storage capacity Disk enclosure Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN3000 EXN3000 EXN3000 EXN3000 EXN3000 EXN3000 EXN3000 EXN3000 Disk drie capacity 1 TB SATA disk dries 2 TB SATA disk dries 3 TB SATA disk dries 100 GB solid state dries 200 GB solid state dries 4 TB SED NL SAS and 4 TB NL SAS dries 250 GB SATA disk dries 500 GB SATA disk dries 750 GB SATA disk dries 1 TB SATA disk dries 2 TB SATA disk dries 100 GB solid state dries 200 GB solid state dries 300 GB SAS disk dries 450 GB SAS disk dries 600 GB SAS disk dries 4 TB SED NL SAS and 4 TB SAS disk dries 500 GB SATA disk dries 1 TB SATA disk dries Maximum storage enclosures Maximum disk dries Maximum physical capacity 1 n/a TB n/a TB n/a TB n/a TB n/a TB n/a TB TB TB TB TB TB TB TB TB TB TB TB TB TB Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 25

62 Table 11. N3240 raw storage capacity (continued) Disk enclosure EXN3000 EXN3000 EXN3500 EXN3500 EXN3500 EXN3500 EXN3500 EXN3500 EXN3500 EXN3500 EXN4000 EXN4000 EXN4000 Disk drie capacity 2 TB SATA disk dries 3 TB SATA disk dries 200 GB solid state dries 400 GB solid state dries 800 GB solid state dries 1.6 TB solid state dries 450 GB SAS disk dries 600 GB SAS disk dries 900 GB SAS disk dries 1.2 TB SAS disk dries 144 GB Fibre Channel disk dries 300 GB Fibre Channel disk dries 450 GB Fibre Channel disk dries Maximum storage enclosures Maximum disk dries Maximum physical capacity TB TB TB TB TB TB TB TB TB TB TB TB TB 1 The maximum raw storage capacity of the N3240 system is determined by the maximum number of disk dries supported and a maximum physical storage limit (in TB). Both limits must be honored. EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units must not share a Fibre Channel loop with EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units. EXN3000 SAS/SATA storage expansion units must not share a SAS stack with EXN3500 SAS storage expansion units. N3240 feature codes Table 12. N3240 feature codes Description Machine Model Feature Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC 2857 A14, A m 50-micron Fibre Channel 2857 A14, A cable (LC/LC) FCoE SFP+ COPPER CABLE, 5M 2857 A14, A IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

63 Table 12. N3240 feature codes (continued) Description Machine Model Feature 8 Gb FC Mezzanine 2857 A GbE Mezzanine A14, A TB SATA HDD 2857 A14, A TB SATA HDD 2857 A14, A TB SATA HDD 2857 A14, A TB NL SAS HDD 2857 A14, A GB SSD 2857 A14, A TB SED SAS HDD 2857 A14, A TB SED NL SAS HDD 2857 A14, A HDD Blank Panel 2857 A14, A Data ONTAP 8.2+ Indicator 2857 A14, A Table 13. N3240 Clustered Data ONTAP feature codes Description Machine Model Feature Clustered Data 2857 A ONTAP base license Cluster machine 2857 A identifier 16-port cluster 2857 A interconnect switch TwinAx cable, 0.5m, for CN1610 (16-port cluster interconnect switch) 2857 A TwinAx cable, 2m, for CN1610 (16-port cluster interconnect switch) TwinAx cable, 5m, for CN1610 (16-port cluster interconnect switch) 2857 A A GbE SFP A14, A Embedded NIC 2 Note: 1 Feature code 2031 must be assigned if you hae installed Clustered Data ONTAP. Note: 2 Feature code 2013 is used in the cluster interconnect switch with optical cables if TwinAx cables are not used. Table 14. N3240 installation features codes Description Machine Model Feature Field install rack mount kit 2857 A14, A Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 27

64 N3300 hardware features The power cord features for the N3240 are listed in Appendix B, Power cord list for N series storage systems, on page 215. The IBM System Storage N3300 storage controller includes the Model A10, a single-node base unit, and the Model A20, an actie/actie dual-node base unit. Both models are designed to proide fast data access, simultaneous multiprotocol support, expandability, upgradability, and low maintenance requirements. The N3300 is designed to interoperate with products capable of data transmission in the industry-standard iscsi, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These include the IBM eserer System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z (NFS only) serers. Details and current information on N3300 interoperability is aailable at: For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel, Fibre Channel oer Ethernet, and iscsi, see the IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iscsi Configuration Guide for your ersion of Data ONTAP. N3300 A10 The N3300 Model A10 is designed to proide a single-node storage controller with iscsi support, and NFS, CIFS, and FCP support ia optional features. The N3300 Model A10 is a 2U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The base chassis includes: One 2.2 GHz 32-bit processor 1 GB random access ECC memory Two integrated gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports Two integrated 4-Gbps small form factor (SFF) Fibre Channel ports One serial console port One integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) port Redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fans Support for 12 Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) or SATA disk dries The N3300 Model A10 may be upgraded to an N3300 Model A20. The upgrade from a Model A10 to a Model A20 is a disruptie upgrade. N3300 A20 The N3300 Model A20 is designed to proide identical function as the N3300 Model A10, but with the addition of a second processor control module (PCM) and the Clustered Failoer (CFO) licensed function. The Model A20 consists of two PCMs that are designed to proide failoer and failback function, helping improe oerall aailability. The Model A20 is a 2U rack-mountable storage controller. The N3300 Model A20 includes: Two 2.2 GHz 32-bit processors 2 GB random access ECC memory Four integrated gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports Four integrated 4-Gbps SFF Fibre Channel ports Two serial console ports 28 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

65 Two integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) ports Redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fans Support for 12 Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) or SATA disk dries Connecting storage expansion units to the N3300 The N3300 storage controller supports both the EXN1000 Serial Adanced Technology Attachment (SATA) storage expansion unit, and the EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units. The maximum number of storage expansion units that may be attached to either the Model A10 or A20 is four. Note: The N3300 does not support attachment of SAS-based storage expansion units. The EXN1000 storage expansion unit proides a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing a minimum of fie, up to a maximum of 14, serial adanced technology attachment (SATA) disk dries, either in 250 GB, 320 GB, 500 GB, 750 GB, 1 TB, or 2 TB physical capacities. The EXN4000 storage expansion units proide a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing a minimum of 5, up to a maximum of 14, Fibre Channel disk dries. The EXN4000 support the following Fibre Channel disk drie speeds and capacities: 15,000 reolutions per minute (15K RPM) of 144 GB, 300 GB, 450 GB and 600 GB capacities 10,000 reolutions per minute (10K RPM) of 144 GB and 300 GB capacities Each storage expansion unit contains a maximum of 14 disk dries, all of a particular type (rotational speed and capacity). For the initial order of the IBM System Storage N3300, you may not include storage expansion units containing more than two types (rotational speed and capacity) of disk dries. Table 15 describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for the N3300 Model A10 and Model A20. Table 15. N3300 raw storage capacity Disk enclosure Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal Internal Disk drie capacity 300 GB SAS disk dries 450 GB SAS disk dries 600 GB SAS disk dries 500 GB SATA disk dries 750 GB SATA disk dries 1 TB SATA disk dries 2 TB SATA disk dries Maximum storage enclosures Maximum disk dries Maximum physical capacity 1 n/a TB n/a TB n/a TB n/a 12 6 TB n/a 12 9 TB n/a TB n/a TB Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 29

66 Table 15. N3300 raw storage capacity (continued) Disk enclosure EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN4000 EXN4000 EXN4000 EXN4000 Disk drie capacity 250 GB SATA disk dries 750 GB SATA disk dries 1 TB SATA disk dries 2 TB SATA disk dries 144 GB Fibre Channel disk dries 300 GB Fibre Channel disk dries 450 GB Fibre Channel disk dries 600 GB Fibre Channel disk dries Maximum storage enclosures Maximum disk dries Maximum physical capacity TB TB TB TB TB TB TB TB 1 The maximum raw storage capacity of the N3300 system is determined by the maximum number of disk dries supported (68, including 12 internal dries and 56 dries in storage expansion units) and a maximum physical storage limit of 68 TB. Both limits must be honored. EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units must not share a Fibre Channel loop with EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units. N3300 feature codes Table 16. N3300 feature codes Description Machine Model Feature Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC 2859 A10, A m 50-micron Fibre Channel 2859 A10, A cable (LC/LC) 4-Gbps SFP GBIC 2859 A10, A GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 2859 A10, A GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 2859 A10, A GB SATA HDD 2859 A10, A GB SATA HDD 2859 A10, A TB SATA HDD 2859 A10, A TB SATA HDD 2859 A10, A HDD Blank Panel 2859 A10, A IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

67 Table 17. N3300 installation features codes Description Machine Model Feature Field install rack mount kit 2859 A10, A N3400 hardware features The power cord features for the N3300 are listed in Appendix B, Power cord list for N series storage systems, on page 215. The IBM System Storage N3400 storage controller includes the Model A11, a single-node base unit, and the Model A21, an actie/actie (or high aailability) dual-node base unit. The two models of the N3400 are designed to proide fast data access, simultaneous multiprotocol support, expandability, upgradability, and low maintenance requirements. Additional functions, such as snapshot, mirroring, and business continuance capability, are aailable through optional licensed functions. The N3400 is designed to interoperate with products capable of data transmission in the industry-standard iscsi, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These include the IBM eserer System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z (NFS only) serers. Details and current information on N3400 interoperability is aailable at: For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel, Fibre Channel oer Ethernet, and iscsi, see the IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iscsi Configuration Guide for your ersion of Data ONTAP. N3400 A11 The N3400 Model A11 is designed to proide a single-node storage controller with iscsi support, and NFS, CIFS, and FCP support ia optional features. The N3400 Model A11 is a 2U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The base chassis includes: Two 1.66 GHz Intel dual-core Xeon LV processors 8 GB random access ECC memory Four integrated gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports Two integrated 4-Gbps small form factor (SFF) Fibre Channel ports One SAS port - Quad Small Form Factor Pluggable (QSFP) One serial console port Two integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) ports Redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fans Support for 6 to 12 Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) or SATA disk dries The N3400 Model A11 may be upgraded to an N3400 Model A21. The upgrade from a Model A11 to a Model A21 is a disruptie upgrade. N3400 A21 The N3400 Model A21 is designed to proide identical function as the N3400 Model A11, but with the addition of a second processor control module (PCM) and the Clustered Failoer (CFO) licensed function. The Model A21 consists of two Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 31

68 PCMs that are designed to proide failoer and failback function, helping improe oerall aailability. The Model A21 is a 2U rack-mountable storage controller. The N3400 Model A21 includes: Four 1.66 GHz Intel dual-core Xeon LV processors 16 GB random access ECC memory Eight integrated gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports Four integrated 4-Gbps small form factor (SFF) Fibre Channel ports Two SAS ports -- Quad Small Form Factor Pluggable (QSFP) Two serial console ports Four integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) ports Redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fans Support for 6 to 12 Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) or SATA disk dries Connecting storage expansion units to the N3400 The N3400 storage controller Models A11 and A21 can attach a maximum of eight Serial Adanced Technology Attachment (SATA) or Fibre Channel storage expansion units, either EXN1000 or EXN4000. The maximum number of EXN3000 or EXN3500 storage expansion units that can be attached is four. On the initial order of an N3400, either SAS-attached or Fibre Channel-attached expansion units may be ordered, not both. For an initial order, no more than six Fibre Channel-attached expansion units may be ordered. Both N3400 models support either one backend FC loop (for EXN1000 or EXN4000 storage expansion units) or one SAS stack (for EXN3000 or EXN3500 storage expansion units). EXN3000s and EXN3500s cannot be connected in the same SAS stack. A single SAS stack must contain only EXN3000s or EXN3500s. The EXN1000 storage expansion unit is a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing a minimum of 5, up to a maximum of 14, serial adanced technology attachment (SATA) disk dries, either in 250 GB, 320 GB, 500 GB, 750 GB, 1 TB, or 2 TB physical capacities. EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units must not share a Fibre Channel loop with EXN4000 FC storage expansion units. The EXN4000 storage expansion units are 3U rack-mountable disk enclosures containing a minimum of 5, up to a maximum of 14, Fibre Channel disk dries. The EXN4000 support the following Fibre Channel disk drie speeds and capacities: 15,000 reolutions per minute (15K RPM) of 144 GB, 300 GB, 450 GB, and 600 GB capacities 10,000 reolutions per minute (10K RPM) of 144 GB and 300 GB capacities The EXN3000 storage expansion unit is a 4U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing a maximum of 24 SAS or SATA disk dries. The supported disk dries are: SAS: 300 GB, 450 GB, 600 GB, and 4 TB physical capacities SATA: 500 GB, 1 TB and 2 TB physical capacities The EXN3500 storage expansion unit is a 2U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing a maximum of 24 SAS disk dries. The supported disk drie physical capacities are 450 GB, 600 GB, 900 GB, and 1.2 TB. 32 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

69 Each storage expansion unit contains a maximum of 14 (24 for SAS) disk dries, all of a particular type (rotational speed and capacity). For the initial order of the IBM System Storage N3400, you may not include storage expansion units containing more than two types (rotational speed and capacity) of disk dries. Table 18 describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for the N3400 Model A11 and Model A21. Table 18. N3400 raw storage capacity Disk enclosure Disk drie capacity Maximum storage enclosures Maximum disk dries Maximum physical capacity 1 Internal 300 GB SAS disk dries n/a TB Internal 450 GB SAS disk dries n/a TB Internal 600 GB SAS disk dries n/a TB Internal 500 GB SATA disk dries n/a 12 6 TB Internal 1 TB SATA disk dries n/a TB Internal 2 TB SATA disk dries n/a TB EXN GB SATA disk dries TB EXN GB SATA disk dries TB EXN GB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA In a system TB disk dries running Data ONTAP 7.3.x In a system running Data ONTAP 8.0.x TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN TB NL SAS disk dries *Requires Data ONTAP or higher TB EXN GB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries In a system running Data ONTAP 7.3.x TB In a system running Data ONTAP 8.0.x TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN TB SAS disk dries TB Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 33

70 Table 18. N3400 raw storage capacity (continued) Disk enclosure EXN4000 EXN4000 EXN4000 EXN4000 Disk drie capacity 144 GB Fibre Channel disk dries 300 GB Fibre Channel disk dries 450 GB Fibre Channel disk dries 600 GB Fibre Channel disk dries Maximum storage enclosures Maximum disk dries Maximum physical capacity TB TB TB TB 1 The maximum raw storage capacity of the N3400 system is determined by the maximum number of disk dries supported (136) and a maximum physical storage limit of 136 TB. Both limits must be honored. N3400 feature codes Table 19. N3400 feature codes Description Machine Model Feature Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC 2859 A11, A m 50-micron Fibre Channel 2859 A11, A cable (LC/LC) 4-Gbps SFP GBIC 2859 A11, A GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 2859 A11, A GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 2859 A11, A GB SED SAS HDD 2859 A11, A GB SATA HDD 2859 A11, A GB SATA HDD 2859 A11, A TB SATA HDD 2859 A11, A TB SATA HDD 2859 A11, A HDD Blank Panel 2859 A11, A Table 20. N3400 installation features codes Description Machine Model Feature Field install rack mount kit 2859 A11, A N3600 hardware features The power cord features for the N3400 are listed in Appendix B, Power cord list for N series storage systems, on page 215. The IBM System Storage N3600 storage controller includes the Model A10, a single-node base unit, and the Model A20, an actie/actie dual-node base unit. Both models are designed to proide fast data access, simultaneous multiprotocol support, expandability, upgradability, and low maintenance requirements. 34 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

71 The N3600 is designed to interoperate with products capable of data transmission in the industry-standard iscsi, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These include the IBM eserer System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z (NFS only) serers. Details and current information on N3600 interoperability is aailable at: For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel, Fibre Channel oer Ethernet, and iscsi, see the IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iscsi Configuration Guide for your ersion of Data ONTAP. N3600 A10 The Model A10 is designed to proide a single-node storage controller with iscsi support, and NFS, CIFS, and FCP support ia optional features. The N3600 Model A10 is a 4U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The base chassis includes: One 2.2 GHz 32-bit processor 2 GB random access ECC memory Two integrated gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports Two integrated 4-Gbps small form factor (SFF) Fibre Channel ports One serial console port One integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) port Redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fans Support for 20 Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) or SATA disk dries The Model A10 supports a maximum of one dual-path Fibre Channel loop or SAS stack. The Model A10 can be up upgraded to a maximum of 4 gigabit Ethernet ports ia the addition of one optional dual-port Ethernet NIC (feature number 1012 or 1013). The Model A10 may be upgraded to a Model A20. The upgrade from a Model A10 to a Model A20 is a disruptie upgrade. N3600 A20 The Model A20 is designed to proide identical function as the N3600 Model A10, but with the addition of a second processor control module (PCM) and the Clustered Failoer (CFO) licensed function. The Model A20 also supports a maximum of 104 dries. The Model A20 consists of two PCMs that are designed to proide failoer and failback function, helping improe oerall aailability. The Model A20 is a 4U rack-mountable storage controller. The Model A20 includes: Two 2.2 GHz 32-bit processors 4 GB random access ECC memory Four integrated gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports Four integrated 4-Gbps SFF Fibre Channel ports Two PCIe expansion slots Two serial console ports Two integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) ports Redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fans Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 35

72 Support for 20 Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) or SATA disk dries For the Model A20, the maximum number of additional expansion adapters is two (one per node). The Model A20 supports a maximum of one dual-path Fibre Channel loop or SAS stack. The Model A20 can be upgraded to a maximum of eight gigabit Ethernet ports ia the addition of two optional dual-port gigabit Ethernet NIC (feature number 1012 or 1013). Connecting storage expansion units to the N3600 The EXN1000 storage expansion unit is a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing a minimum of 5, up to a maximum of 14, serial adanced technology attachment (SATA) disk dries, either in 250 GB, 320 GB, 500 GB, 750 GB, 1 TB, or 2 TB physical capacities. EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units must not share a Fibre Channel loop with EXN4000 FC storage expansion units. Note: EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units must not share a Fibre Channel loop with EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units. The EXN4000 storage expansion units are 3U rack-mountable disk enclosures containing a minimum of 5, up to a maximum of 14, Fibre Channel disk dries. The EXN4000 support the following Fibre Channel disk drie speeds and capacities: 15,000 reolutions per minute (15K RPM) of 144 GB, 300 GB, 450 GB, and 600 GB capacities 10,000 reolutions per minute (10K RPM) of 144 GB and 300 GB capacities The EXN3000 storage expansion unit is a 4U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing a maximum of 24 SAS or SATA disk dries. The supported disk dries are: SAS: 300 GB, 450 GB, and 600 GB physical capacities SATA: 500 GB, 1 TB and 2 TB physical capacities The EXN3500 storage expansion unit is a 2U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing a maximum of 24 SAS disk dries. The supported disk drie physical capacities are 450 GB, 600 GB, and 900 GB. For the initial order of the N3600, you may not include storage expansion units containing more than two types (rotational speed and capacity) of disk dries. Table 21 describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for the N3600 Model A10 and Model A20. Table 21. N3600 raw storage capacity Disk enclosure Internal Internal Disk drie capacity 300 GB SAS disk dries 450 GB SAS disk dries Maximum storage enclosures Maximum disk dries Maximum physical capacity 1 n/a TB n/a TB 36 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

73 Table 21. N3600 raw storage capacity (continued) Disk enclosure Internal Internal Internal Internal EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN1000 EXN3000 EXN3000 EXN3000 EXN3000 EXN3000 EXN3000 EXN3500 EXN3500 EXN3500 EXN4000 EXN4000 EXN4000 Disk drie capacity 600 GB SAS disk dries 500 GB SATA disk dries 750 GB SATA disk dries 1 TB SATA disk dries 250 GB SATA disk dries 500 GB SATA disk dries 750 GB SATA disk dries 1 TB SATA disk dries 2 TB SATA disk dries 300 GB SAS disk dries 450 GB SAS disk dries 600 GB SAS disk dries 500 GB SATA disk dries 1 TB SATA disk dries 2 TB SATA disk dries 450 GB SAS disk dries 600 GB SAS disk dries 900 GB SAS disk dries 144 GB Fibre Channel disk dries 300 GB Fibre Channel disk dries 450 GB Fibre Channel disk dries Maximum storage enclosures Maximum disk dries Maximum physical capacity 1 n/a TB n/a TB n/a TB n/a TB TB TB TB TB TB TB TB TB TB TB TB TB TB TB TB TB TB Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 37

74 Table 21. N3600 raw storage capacity (continued) Disk enclosure EXN4000 Disk drie capacity 600 GB Fibre Channel disk dries Maximum storage enclosures Maximum disk dries Maximum physical capacity TB 1 The maximum raw storage capacity of the N3600 Model A10 and Model A20 is determined by the maximum number of disk dries supported (104, 20 internal and 84 ia storage expansion units) and a maximum physical storage limit of 104 TB. Both limits must be honored. N3600 feature codes The following table lists the feature codes for N3600 cables, connectors, and hard disk dries. For a list of the HBA feature codes supported for the N3600, see Appendix F, Optional adapter cards supported by the N3600, on page 235. Table 22. N3600 feature codes Description Machine Model Feature Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC 2862 A10, A m 50-micron Fibre Channel 2862 A10, A cable (LC/LC) 1m FCoE SFP+ copper cable 2862 A10, A m FCoE SFP+ copper cable 2862 A10, A m FCoE SFP+ copper cable 2862 A10, A FCoE SFP+ actie copper cable, A10, A m FCoE SFP+ actie copper cable, A10, A m FCoE SFP+ actie copper cable, A10, A m 4-Gbps SFP GBIC 2862 A10, A GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 2862 A10, A GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 2862 A10, A GB SATA HDD 2862 A10, A GB SATA HDD 2862 A10, A TB SATA HDD 2862 A10, A HDD Blank Panel 2862 A10, A Table 23. N3600 installation features codes Description Machine Model Feature Field install rack mount kit 2862 A10, A The power cord features for the N3600 are listed in Appendix B, Power cord list for N series storage systems, on page IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

75 N6040 hardware features The N6040 storage controllers consist of the Model A10 and Model A20 and associated software with gateway options. The N6040 is a 6U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The N6040 storage controller does not include storage in the base chassis. Note: All N6040 models may be configured as gateways. If they are to be used as gateways, all Licensed Function Indicator features must be those with the suffix, GW (for example, SnapRestore - GW). The IBM System Storage N6040 storage controllers are designed to interoperate with products capable of data transmission in the industry-standard iscsi, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These include the IBM eserer System p, System i (NFS only), System x, and System z (NFS only) serers. See the Interoperability Matrix at the following web page for supported deices for your N series filer system. For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel, Fibre Channel oer Ethernet, and iscsi, refer to the IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iscsi Configuration Guide for your ersion of Data ONTAP. N6040 Model A10 The N6040 Model A10 is designed to proide a single-node storage controller with iscsi support and NFS, CIFS, and FCP support ia optional features. The N6040 is a 6U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The N6040 storage controller does not include storage in the base chassis. The base chassis includes: One dual-core AMD 2.4 GHz 64-bit processor 4 GB of random access ECC memory Two integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports Four integrated 4-Gbps SFP Fibre Channel ports Dual redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fans Three PCIe X8 expansion slots and one PCIe X4 expansion slot One serial console port One integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) port The maximum number of additional expansion adapters for the N6040 Model A10 is four. Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N6040 storage systems are described in Appendix G, Optional adapter cards supported by N6000 series systems, on page 241. The N6040 Model A10 can be upgraded to a maximum of ten dual-path (loop A and loop B) Fibre Channel loops ia the addition of four optional Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk/Tape Attachment (feature number 1029). The Model A10 supports a maximum of 420 total disk dries. Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 39

76 The N6040 Model A10 can be upgraded to a maximum of 18 Gigabit Ethernet ports ia the addition of four optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface cards (NICs) (feature number 1023). The N6040 Model A10 may be upgraded to a Model A20. The upgrade from a Model A10 to a Model A20 is a disruptie upgrade. N6040 Model A20 The N6040 Model A20 is designed to proide a dual-node storage controller with iscsi support and NFS, CIFS, and FCP support ia optional features. The N6040 Model A20 is designed to proide identical function to the Model A10, but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failoer (CFO) licensed function. The Model A20 supports a maximum of 420 dries. The Model A20 consists of two storage controllers housed in a single chassis, 6U in height. They are designed to proide failoer and failback function, helping improe oerall aailability. The base chassis includes: Two dual-core AMD 2.4 GHz 64-bit processors (one per node) 8 GB of random access ECC memory (4 GB per node) Four integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports (two per node) Eight integrated 4-Gbps SFP Fibre Channel ports (four per node) Dual redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fans Six PCIe X8 expansion slots (three per node) and two PCIe X4 expansion slots (one per node) Two serial console ports (one per node) Two integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) ports (one per node) The maximum number of additional expansion adapters for the N6040 Model A20 is eight (four per node). Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N6040 storage systems are described in Appendix G, Optional adapter cards supported by N6000 series systems, on page 241. The N6040 Model A20 can be upgraded to a maximum of 20 dual-path (loop A and loop B) Fibre Channel loops (20 4-Gbps FC ports) ia the addition of eight optional Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk/Tape Attachment (feature number 1029). The Model A20 supports a maximum of 420 total disk dries. The N6040 Model A20 can be upgraded to a maximum of 36 Gigabit Ethernet ports ia the addition of eight optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface cards (NICs) (feature number 1023). Connecting storage expansion units to the N6040 Both N6040 models require the addition of at least one N series storage expansion unit per node. The EXN1000 storage expansion unit is a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing a minimum of 5, up to a maximum of 14, serial adanced technology attachment (SATA) disk dries, either in 250 GB, 320 GB, 500 GB, 750 GB, 1 TB, or 40 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

77 2 TB physical capacities. EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units must not share a Fibre Channel loop with EXN4000 FC storage expansion units. The EXN4000 storage expansion units are 3U rack-mountable disk enclosures containing a minimum of fie, up to a maximum of fourteen, Fibre Channel disk dries. The EXN4000 support the following Fibre Channel disk drie speeds and capacities: 15,000 reolutions per minute (15K RPM) of 144 GB, 300 GB, 450 GB, and 600 GB capacities 10,000 reolutions per minute (10K RPM) of 144 GB and 300 GB capacities The EXN3000 storage expansion unit is a 4U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing a maximum of 24 SAS or SATA disk dries. The supported disk dries are: SAS: 300 GB, 450 GB, 600 GB, and 4 TB physical capacities SATA: 500 GB, 1 TB, 2 TB, and 3 TB physical capacities (3 TB dries require Data ONTAP Mode or higher) SSD: 100 GB and 200 GB physical capacities SED SAS: 3 TB and 4 TB physical capacities The EXN3500 storage expansion unit is a 2U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing a maximum of 24 SAS disk dries. The supported disk drie physical capacities are: SAS: 450 GB, 600 GB, 900 GB, and 1.2 TB. Solid state disk (SSD): 200 GB, 400 GB, 800 GB, and 1.6 TB physical capacities Within a single N series storage expansion unit, all disk dries must be of a particular type (rotational speed/capacity). Although the original order for storage expansion units may contain storage expansion units with no more than two different types (rotational speed/capacity) of disk dries, later upgrades to add additional storage expansion units do not hae to meet this requirement. Table 24 describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for the N6040. Table 24. N6040 raw storage capacity Disk enclosure Disk drie capacity Maximum storage enclosures Maximum disk dries Maximum physical capacity 1 EXN GB SATA disk dries TB EXN GB SATA disk dries TB EXN GB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries In systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.x TB In systems running Data ONTAP 8.0.x 7-Mode TB Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 41

78 Table 24. N6040 raw storage capacity (continued) Disk enclosure Disk drie capacity Maximum storage enclosures Maximum disk dries Maximum physical capacity 1 EXN GB SSD 2 *Requires Data TB ONTAP Mode or higher EXN GB SSD 2 *Requires Data ONTAP Mode or higher TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN TB SAS disk dries *Requires Data ONTAP or higher TB EXN GB SATA dries TB EXN TB SATA dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries In systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.x TB EXN3000 EXN TB SATA disk dries 4 TB SED NL SAS disk dries In systems running Data ONTAP 8.0.x 7-Mode *Requires Data ONTAP Mode or higher *Requires Data ONTAP 8.2.x 7-Mode or higher EXN GB SSD 2 *Requires Data ONTAP or higher EXN GB SSD 2 *Requires Data ONTAP Mode or higher EXN GB SSD 2 *Requires Data ONTAP or higher EXN TB SSD 2 *Requires Data ONTAP Mode or higher TB TB TB TB TB TB TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB 42 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

79 Table 24. N6040 raw storage capacity (continued) Disk enclosure Disk drie capacity Maximum storage enclosures Maximum disk dries Maximum physical capacity 1 EXN TB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB Fibre Channel disk TB dries EXN GB Fibre Channel disk TB dries EXN GB Fibre Channel disk TB dries EXN GB Fibre Channel disk dries TB 1 The maximum raw storage capacity of the N6040 is determined by the maximum number of disk dries supported (420) and a maximum physical storage limit of 420 TB in systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.x or 1260 TB in systems running Data ONTAP Mode or higher. Both limits must be honored. 2 Storage systems using Solid-state disk (SSD) dries require at least one stack of rotating disk dries in addition to the SSD stack. For the disk shelf supporting SSD dries to function properly, a minimum of four SSD dries must be installed in the disk shelf. EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units and EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units must not share Fibre Channel loops. A maximum of six storage expansion units (EXN1000, or EXN4000) is supported on a single Fibre Channel loop. A SAS stack can contain a maximum of ten EXN3000 EXN3000 or EXN3500 storage expansion units. The maximum number of supported SAS stacks and total EXN3000 or EXN3500 storage expansion units depends upon the storage controller configuration. EXN3000s and EXN3500s are supported within the same system configuration, but they cannot be connected in the same SAS stack. A single SAS stack must contain only EXN3000s or EXN3500s. Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is supported for the N6040 system. Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is designed to improe reliability, aailability and sericeability of the storage expansion units attached to the storage controller by creating two redundant paths from each storage controller to each loop of the storage expansion units. For more information about using dual-path Fibre Channel cabling, see the Installation and Setup Instructions that came with your system. N6040 feature codes The following table lists the feature codes for N6040 cables and connectors. For a list of the HBA feature codes supported for the N6040, see Appendix G, Optional adapter cards supported by N6000 series systems, on page 241. Table 25. N6040 feature codes Feature Code Description Machine Model Feature Code Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC 2858 A10, A m 50-micron MMF cable 2858 A10, A (LC/SC) 4-Gbps extended longwae SFP 2858 A Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 43

80 Table 25. N6040 feature codes (continued) Feature Code Description Machine Model Feature Code 31m 50-micron Fibre Channel 2858 A10, A cable (LC/LC) 1m FCoE SFP+ copper cable A10, A m FCoE SFP+ copper cable A10, A m FCoE SFP+ copper cable A10, A Dual-port 10-Gbps Ethernet PCIe 2858 A10, A NIC adapter 3 FCoE SFP+ actie copper cable, A10, A m 2 FCoE SFP+ actie copper cable, A10, A m 2 FCoE SFP+ actie copper cable, A10, A m 2 10-Gbps Ethernet SFP A10, A Data ONTAP 8.2+ Indicator 2857 A10, A Feature code 2012 is for use only with FC 1065 (Dual-port 10-Gbps Ethernet PCIe NIC adapter). 2 For use with FCoE adapters wheneer copper cables are required. Table 26. N6040 Clustered Data ONTAP feature codes Description Machine Model Feature Clustered Data 2858 A ONTAP base license Cluster machine 2858 A identifier 16-port cluster 2858 A interconnect switch TwinAx cable, 0.5m, for CN1610 (16-port cluster interconnect switch) 2858 A TwinAx cable, 2m, for CN1610 (16-port cluster interconnect switch) TwinAx cable, 5m, for CN1610 (16-port cluster interconnect switch) 2858 A A GbE SFP A Embedded NIC 4 Note: 3 Feature code 1065 must be assigned if you hae installed Clustered Data ONTAP. 44 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

81 Note: 4 Feature code 2013 is used in the cluster interconnect switch with optical cables if TwinAx cables are not used. Table 27. N6040 installation feature codes Description Machine Model Feature Plant install in 2101 rack 2858 A10, A Field install rack mount kit 2858 A10, A N6060 hardware features The power cord features for the N6040 are listed in Appendix B, Power cord list for N series storage systems, on page 215. The N6060 storage controllers consist of the Model A12 and Model A22 and associated software with gateway options. The N6060 is a 6U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The N6060 storage controller does not include storage in the base chassis. Note: All N6060 models may be configured as gateways. If they are to be used as gateways, all Licensed Function Indicator features must be those with the suffix, GW (for example, SnapRestore - GW). The IBM System Storage N6060 storage controllers are designed to interoperate with products capable of data transmission in the industry-standard iscsi, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These include the IBM eserer System p, System i (NFS only), System x, and System z (NFS only) serers. See the Interoperability Matrix at the following web page for supported deices for your N series filer system. For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel, Fibre Channel oer Ethernet, and iscsi, refer to the IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iscsi Configuration Guide for your ersion of Data ONTAP. N6060 Model A12 The N6060 Model A12 is designed to proide a single-node storage controller with iscsi support and NFS, CIFS, and FCP support ia optional features. The N6060 is a 6U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The N6060 storage controller does not include storage in the base chassis. The base chassis includes: One dual-core AMD 2.4 GHz 64-bit processor 8 GB of random access ECC memory Two integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports Four integrated 4-Gbps SFP Fibre Channel ports Dual redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fans Three PCI-e X8 expansion slots and one PCI-e X4 expansion slot One serial console port One integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) port Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 45

82 The maximum number of additional expansion adapters for the N6060 Model A12 is four. Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N6060 storage systems are described in Appendix G, Optional adapter cards supported by N6000 series systems, on page 241. The N6060 Model A12 can be upgraded to a maximum of ten dual-path (loop A and loop B) Fibre Channel loops ia the addition of four optional Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk/Tape Attachment (feature number 1029). The Model A12 supports a maximum of 672 total disk dries. The N6060 Model A12 can be upgraded to a maximum of 18 Gigabit Ethernet ports ia the addition of four optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface cards (NICs) (feature numbers 1023). The N6060 Model A12 may be upgraded to a Model A22. The upgrade from a Model A12 to a Model A22 is a disruptie upgrade. N6060 Model A22 The N6060 Model A22 is designed to proide a dual-node storage controller with iscsi support and NFS, CIFS, and FCP support ia optional features. The N6060 Model A22 is designed to proide identical function to the Model A12, but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failoer (CFO) licensed function. The Model A22 consists of two storage controllers housed in a single chassis, 6U in height. They are designed to proide failoer and failback function, helping improe oerall aailability. The base chassis includes: Two dual-core AMD 2.4 GHz 64-bit processors (one per node) 16 GB of random access ECC memory (8 GB per node) Four integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports (two per node) Eight integrated 4-Gbps SFP Fibre Channel ports (four per node) Dual redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fans Six PCIe X8 expansion slots (three per node) and two PCIe X4 expansion slots (one per node) Two serial console ports (one per node) Two integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) ports (one per node) The maximum number of additional expansion adapters for the N6060 Model A22 is eight (four per node). Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N6060 storage systems are described in Appendix G, Optional adapter cards supported by N6000 series systems, on page 241. The N6060 Model A22 can be upgraded to a maximum of 20 dual-path (loop A and loop B) Fibre Channel loops (20 4-Gbps FC ports) ia the addition of eight optional Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk/Tape Attachment (feature number 1029). The Model A22 supports a maximum of 672 total disk dries. 46 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

83 The N6060 Model A22 can be upgraded to a maximum of 36 Gigabit Ethernet ports ia the addition of eight optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface cards (NICs) (feature number 1023). Connecting storage expansion units to the N6060 Both N6060 models require the addition of at least one N series storage expansion unit per node. The EXN1000 storage expansion unit is a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing a minimum of 5, up to a maximum of 14, serial adanced technology attachment (SATA) disk dries, either in 250 GB, 320 GB, 500 GB, 750 GB, 1 TB, or 2 TB physical capacities. EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units must not share a Fibre Channel loop with EXN4000 FC storage expansion units. The EXN4000 storage expansion units are 3U rack-mountable disk enclosures containing a minimum of 5, up to a maximum of 14, Fibre Channel disk dries. The EXN4000 support the following Fibre Channel disk drie speeds and capacities: 15,000 reolutions per minute (15K RPM) of 144 GB, 300 GB, 450 GB, and 600 GB capacities 10,000 reolutions per minute (10K RPM) of 144 GB and 300 GB capacities The EXN3000 storage expansion unit is a 4U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing a maximum of 24 SAS or SATA disk dries. The supported disk dries are: SAS: 300 GB, 450 GB, 600 GB, and 4 TB physical capacities SATA: 500 GB, 1 TB, 2 TB, and 3 TB physical capacities (3 TB dries require Data ONTAP or higher) SSD: 100 GB and 200 GB physical capacities SED SAS: 3 TB and 4 TB physical capacities The EXN3500 storage expansion unit is a 2U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing a maximum of 24 SAS disk dries. The supported disk drie physical capacities are: SAS: 450 GB, 600 GB, 900 GB, and 1.2 TB. Solid state disk (SSD): 200 GB, 400 GB, 800 GB, and 1.6 TB physical capacities Within a single N series storage expansion unit, all disk dries must be of a particular type (rotational speed/capacity). Although the original order for storage expansion units may contain storage expansion units with no more than two different types (rotational speed/capacity) of disk dries, later upgrades to add additional storage expansion units do not hae to meet this requirement. Table 28 describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for the N6060. Table 28. N6060 raw storage capacity Disk enclosure Disk drie capacity Maximum storage enclosures Maximum disk dries Maximum physical capacity 1 EXN GB SATA disk dries TB EXN GB SATA disk dries TB Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 47

84 Table 28. N6060 raw storage capacity (continued) Disk enclosure Disk drie capacity Maximum storage enclosures Maximum disk dries Maximum physical capacity 1 EXN GB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA In systems TB disk dries running Data ONTAP 7.3.x In systems TB running Data ONTAP 8.0.x EXN GB SSD 2 *Requires Data TB ONTAP or higher EXN GB SSD TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN TB NL SAS disk dries *Requires Data ONTAP or higher TB EXN GB SATA dries TB EXN TB SATA dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries In systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.x TB EXN3000 EXN TB SATA disk dries 4 TB SED NL SAS disk dries In systems running Data ONTAP 8.0.x *Requires Data ONTAP or higher *Requires Data ONTAP 8.2.x or higher EXN GB SSD 2 *Requires Data ONTAP or higher EXN GB SSD 2 *Requires Data ONTAP 8.2 or higher EXN GB SSD 2 *Requires Data ONTAP or higher EXN TB SSD 2 *Requires Data ONTAP 8.2 or higher TB TB TB TB TB TB TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB 48 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

85 Table 28. N6060 raw storage capacity (continued) Disk enclosure Disk drie capacity Maximum storage enclosures Maximum disk dries Maximum physical capacity 1 EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN TB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB Fibre Channel disk TB dries EXN GB Fibre Channel disk TB dries EXN GB Fibre Channel disk TB dries EXN GB Fibre Channel disk dries TB 1 The maximum raw storage capacity of the N6060 is determined by the maximum number of disk dries supported (672) and a maximum physical storage limit of 672 TB in systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.x or 2016 TB in systems running Data ONTAP or higher. Both limits must be honored. 2 Storage systems using Solid-state disk (SSD) dries require at least one stack of rotating disk dries in addition to the SSD stack. For the disk shelf supporting SSD dries to function properly, a minimum of four SSD dries must be installed in the disk shelf. EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units and EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units must not share Fibre Channel loops. A maximum of six storage expansion units (EXN1000, or EXN4000) is supported on a single Fibre Channel loop. A SAS stack can contain a maximum of ten EXN3000 or EXN3500 storage expansion units. The maximum number of supported SAS stacks and total EXN3000 or EXN3500 storage expansion units depends upon the storage controller configuration. EXN3000s and EXN3500s are supported within the same system configuration, but they cannot be connected in the same SAS stack. A single SAS stack must contain only EXN3000s or EXN3500s. Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is supported for the N6060 system. Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is designed to improe reliability, aailability and sericeability of the storage expansion units attached to the storage controller by creating two redundant paths from each storage controller to each loop of the storage expansion units. For more information about using dual-path Fibre Channel cabling, see the Installation and Setup Instructions that came with your system. N6060 feature codes The following table lists the feature codes for N6060 cables and connectors. For a list of the HBA feature codes supported for the N6060, see Appendix G, Optional adapter cards supported by N6000 series systems, on page 241. Table 29. N6060 feature codes Feature Code Description Machine Model Feature Code Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC 2858 A12, A m 50-micron MMF cable (LC/SC) 2858 A12, A Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 49

86 Table 29. N6060 feature codes (continued) Feature Code Description Machine Model Feature Code 4-Gbps extended longwae SFP 2858 A m 50-micron Fibre Channel 2858 A12, A cable (LC/LC) 1m FCoE SFP+ copper cable A12, A m FCoE SFP+ copper cable A12, A m FCoE SFP+ copper cable A12, A Dual-port 10-Gbps Ethernet PCIe 2858 A12, A NIC adapter 3 FCoE SFP+ actie copper cable, A12, A m 2 FCoE SFP+ actie copper cable, A12, A m 2 FCoE SFP+ actie copper cable, A12, A m 2 Data ONTAP 8.2+ Indicator 2857 A12, A Gbps Ethernet SFP A12, A Feature code 2012 is for use only with Feature code 1065 (Dual-port 10-Gbps Ethernet PCIe NIC adapter). 2 For use with FCoE adapters wheneer copper cables are required. Table 30. N6060 Clustered Data ONTAP feature codes Description Machine Model Feature Clustered Data 2858 A ONTAP base license Cluster machine 2858 A identifier 16-port cluster 2858 A interconnect switch TwinAx cable, 0.5m, for CN1610 (16-port cluster interconnect switch) 2858 A TwinAx cable, 2m, for CN1610 (16-port cluster interconnect switch) TwinAx cable, 5m, for CN1610 (16-port cluster interconnect switch) 2858 A A GbE SFP A Embedded NIC 4 Note: 3 Feature code 1065 must be assigned if you hae installed Clustered Data ONTAP. 50 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

87 Note: 4 Feature code 2013 is used in the cluster interconnect switch with optical cables if TwinAx cables are not used. Table 31. N6060 installation feature codes Description Machine Model Feature Plant install in 2101 rack 2858 A12, A Field install rack mount kit 2858 A12, A N6070 hardware features The power cord features for the N6060 are listed in Appendix B, Power cord list for N series storage systems, on page 215. The N6070 storage controllers consist of the Model A11 and Model A21 and associated software with gateway options. The N6070 is a 6U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The N6070 storage controller does not include storage in the base chassis. Note: All N6070 models may be configured as gateways. If they are to be used as gateways, all Licensed Function Indicator features must be those with the suffix, GW (for example, SnapRestore - GW). The IBM System Storage N6070 storage controllers are designed to interoperate with products capable of data transmission in the industry-standard iscsi, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These include the IBM eserer System p, System i (NFS only), System x, and System z (NFS only) serers. See the Interoperability Matrix at the following web page for supported deices for your N series filer system. For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel, Fibre Channel oer Ethernet, and iscsi, refer to the IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iscsi Configuration Guide for your ersion of Data ONTAP. N6070 Model A11 The N6070 Model A11 is designed to proide a single-node storage controller with iscsi support and NFS, CIFS, and FCP support ia optional features. The N6070 is a 6U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The N6070 storage controller does not include storage in the base chassis. The base chassis includes: Two dual-core AMD 2.4 GHz 64-bit processors 16 GB of random access ECC memory Two integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports Four integrated 4-Gbps SFP Fibre Channel ports Dual redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fans Three PCIe X8 expansion slots and one PCIe X4 expansion slot One serial console port One integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) port Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 51

88 The maximum number of additional expansion adapters for the N6070 Model A11 is four. Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N6070 storage systems are described in Appendix G, Optional adapter cards supported by N6000 series systems, on page 241. The N6070 Model A11 can be upgraded to a maximum of ten dual-path (loop A and loop B) Fibre Channel loops ia the addition of four optional Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk/Tape Attachment (feature number 1029). The Model A11 supports a maximum of 840 total disk dries. The N6070 Model A11 can be upgraded to a maximum of 18 Gigabit Ethernet ports ia the addition of four optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface cards (NICs) (feature number 1023). The N6070 Model A11 may be upgraded to a Model A21. The upgrade from a Model A11 to a Model A21 is a disruptie upgrade. N6070 Model A21 The N6070 Model A21 is designed to proide a dual-node storage controller with iscsi support and NFS, CIFS, and FCP support ia optional features. The N6070 Model A21 is designed to proide identical function to the Model A11, but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failoer (CFO) licensed function. The Model A21 supports a maximum of 420 dries. The Model A21 consists of two storage controllers housed in a single chassis, 6U in height. They are designed to proide failoer and failback function, helping improe oerall aailability. The base chassis includes: Four dual-core AMD 2.4 GHz 64-bit processors (two per node) 32 GB of random access ECC memory (16 GB per node) Four integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports (two per node) Eight integrated 4-Gbps SFP Fibre Channel ports (four per node) Dual redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fans Six PCIe X8 expansion slots (three per node) and two PCIe X4 expansion slots (one per node) Two serial console ports (one per node) Two integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) ports (one per node) The maximum number of additional expansion adapters for the N6070 Model A21 is eight (four per node). Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N6070 storage systems are described in Appendix G, Optional adapter cards supported by N6000 series systems, on page 241. The N6070 Model A21 can be upgraded to a maximum of 20 dual-path (loop A and loop B) Fibre Channel loops (20 4-Gbps FC ports) ia the addition of eight optional Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk/Tape Attachment (feature number 1029). The Model A21 supports a maximum of 840 total disk dries. 52 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

89 The N6070 Model A21 can be upgraded to a maximum of 36 Gigabit Ethernet ports ia the addition of eight optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface cards (NICs) (feature number 1023). Connecting storage expansion units to the N6070 Both N6070 models require the addition of at least one N series storage expansion unit per node. The EXN1000 storage expansion unit is a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing a minimum of 5, up to a maximum of 14, serial adanced technology attachment (SATA) disk dries, either in 250 GB, 320 GB, 500 GB, 750 GB, 1 TB, or 2 TB physical capacities. EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units must not share a Fibre Channel loop with EXN4000 FC storage expansion units. The EXN4000 storage expansion units are 3U rack-mountable disk enclosures containing a minimum of 5, up to a maximum of 14, Fibre Channel disk dries. The EXN4000 support the following Fibre Channel disk drie speeds and capacities: 15,000 reolutions per minute (15K RPM) of 144 GB, 300 GB, 450 GB, and 600 GB capacities 10,000 reolutions per minute (10K RPM) of 144 GB and 300 GB capacities The EXN3000 storage expansion unit is a 4U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing a maximum of 24 SAS or SATA disk dries. The supported disk dries are: SAS: 300 GB, 450 GB, 600 GB, and 4 TB physical capacities SATA: 500 GB, 1 TB, 2 TB, and 3 TB physical capacities (3 TB dries require Data ONTAP or higher) SSD: 100 GB and 200 GB physical capacities SED SAS: 3 TB and 4 TB physical capacities The EXN3500 storage expansion unit is a 2U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing a maximum of 24 SAS disk dries. The supported disk drie physical capacities are: SAS: 450 GB, 600 GB, 900 GB, and 1.2 TB. Solid state disk (SSD): 200 GB, 400 GB, 800 GB, and 1.6 TB physical capacities Within a single N series storage expansion unit, all disk dries must be of a particular type (rotational speed/capacity). Although the original order for storage expansion units may contain storage expansion units with no more than two different types (rotational speed/capacity) of disk dries, later upgrades to add additional storage expansion units do not hae to meet this requirement. Table 32 describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for the N6070. Table 32. N6070 raw storage capacity Disk enclosure Disk drie capacity Maximum storage enclosures Maximum disk dries Maximum physical capacity 1 EXN GB SATA disk dries TB EXN GB SATA disk dries TB Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 53

90 Table 32. N6070 raw storage capacity (continued) Disk enclosure Disk drie capacity Maximum storage enclosures Maximum disk dries Maximum physical capacity 1 EXN GB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries In systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.x TB EXN3000 EXN GB SSD dries GB SSD dries 2 In systems running Data ONTAP 8.0.x *Requires Data ONTAP or higher *Requires Data ONTAP or higher TB TB TB EXN GB SAS dries TB EXN GB SAS dries TB EXN GB SAS dries TB EXN TB NL SAS dries *Requires Data ONTAP or higher TB EXN GB SATA dries TB EXN TB SATA dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries In systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.x TB EXN3000 EXN3000 EXN3500 EXN3500 EXN3500 EXN TB SATA disk dries 4 TB SED NL SAS disk dries 200 GB SSD dries GB SSD dries GB SSD dries TB SSD dries 2 In systems running Data ONTAP 8.0.x *Requires Data ONTAP or higher *Requires Data ONTAP 8.2.x or higher *Requires Data ONTAP or higher *Requires Data ONTAP 8.2 or higher *Requires Data ONTAP or higher *Requires Data ONTAP 8.2 or higher TB TB TB TB TB TB TB 54 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

91 Table 32. N6070 raw storage capacity (continued) Disk enclosure Disk drie capacity Maximum storage enclosures Maximum disk dries Maximum physical capacity 1 EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN TB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB Fibre Channel disk TB dries EXN GB Fibre Channel disk TB dries EXN GB Fibre Channel disk TB dries EXN GB Fibre Channel disk dries TB 1 The maximum raw storage capacity of the N6070 is determined by the maximum number of disk dries supported (840) and a maximum physical storage limit of 840 TB in systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.x or 2520 TB in systems running Data ONTAP or higher. Both limits must be honored. 2 Storage systems using Solid-state disk (SSD) dries require at least one stack of rotating disk dries in addition to the SSD stack. For the disk shelf supporting SSD dries to function properly, a minimum of four SSD dries must be installed in the disk shelf. EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units and EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units must not share Fibre Channel loops. A maximum of six storage expansion units (EXN1000 or EXN4000) is supported on a single Fibre Channel loop. A SAS stack can contain a maximum of ten EXN3000 or EXN3500 storage expansion units. The maximum number of supported SAS stacks and total EXN3000 or EXN3500 storage expansion units depends upon the storage controller configuration. EXN3000s and EXN3500s are supported within the same system configuration, but they cannot be connected in the same SAS stack. A single SAS stack must contain only EXN3000s or EXN3500s. Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is supported for the N6070 system. Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is designed to improe reliability, aailability and sericeability of the storage expansion units attached to the storage controller by creating two redundant paths from each storage controller to each loop of the storage expansion units. For more information about using dual-path Fibre Channel cabling, see the Installation and Setup Instructions that came with your system. N6070 feature codes The following table lists the feature codes for N6070 cables and connectors. For a list of the HBA feature codes supported for the N6070, see Appendix G, Optional adapter cards supported by N6000 series systems, on page 241. Table 33. N6070 feature codes Feature Code Description Machine Model Feature Code Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC 2858 A11, A Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 55

92 Table 33. N6070 feature codes (continued) Feature Code Description Machine Model Feature Code 30m 50-micron MMF cable 2858 A11, A (LC/SC) 4-Gbps extended longwae SFP 2858 A m 50-micron Fibre Channel 2858 A11, A cable (LC/LC) 1m FCoE SFP+ copper cable A11, A m FCoE SFP+ copper cable A11, A m FCoE SFP+ copper cable A11, A Dual-port 10-Gbps Ethernet PCIe 2858 A11, A NIC adapter 3 FCoE SFP+ actie copper cable, A11, A m 2 FCoE SFP+ actie copper cable, A11, A m 2 FCoE SFP+ actie copper cable, A11, A m 2 10-Gbps Ethernet SFP A11, A Data ONTAP 8.2+ Indicator 2857 A11, A Feature code 2012 is for use only with FC 1065 (Dual-port 10-Gbps Ethernet PCIe NIC adapter). 2 For use with FCoE adapters wheneer copper cables are required. Table 34. N6070 Clustered Data ONTAP feature codes Description Machine Model Feature Clustered Data 2858 A ONTAP base license Cluster machine 2858 A identifier 16-port cluster 2858 A interconnect switch TwinAx cable, 0.5m, for CN1610 (16-port cluster interconnect switch) 2858 A TwinAx cable, 2m, for CN1610 (16-port cluster interconnect switch) TwinAx cable, 5m, for CN1610 (16-port cluster interconnect switch) 10 GbE SFP+ - Embedded NIC 2858 A A A IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

93 Note: 3 Feature code 1065 must be assigned if you hae installed Clustered Data ONTAP. Note: 4 Feature code 2013 is used in the cluster interconnect switch with optical cables if TwinAx cables are not used. Table 35. N6070 installation feature codes Description Machine Model Feature Plant install in 2101 rack 2858 A11, A Field install rack mount kit 2858 A11, A N6210 hardware features The power cord features for the N6070 are listed in Appendix B, Power cord list for N series storage systems, on page 215. The IBM System Storage N6210 storage controllers are designed to interoperate with products capable of data transmission in the industry-standard iscsi, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. Supported systems include the IBM eserer System p, System i (NFS only), System x, and System z (NFS only) serers. The N6210 systems consist of the Model C10, Model C20, and associated software. Both models can be configured, ia optional features, to be either storage controllers or gateways. Dual-node configurations include Clustered Failoer (CFO) support (ia required feature), designed to proide failoer and failback function, helping improe oerall aailability. Both models must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. None of the N6210 models include storage in the base chassis. See the Interoperability Matrix at the following web page for supported deices for your N series system. For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel, Fibre Channel oer Ethernet, and iscsi, refer to the IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iscsi Configuration Guide for your ersion of Data ONTAP. N6210 models IBM System Storage N6210 storage controllers include: Model C20 - An actie/actie dual-node base unit Model C10 - A single-node base unit The Model C10 can be upgraded to a Model C20; model upgrades are disruptie. Each chassis is a 3U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The N6210 storage controllers do not include storage in the base chassis. Note: All these models may be configured as gateways. If they are to be used as gateways, all Licensed Function Indicator features must be those with the suffix, GW (for example, SnapRestore - GW). Both N6210 models feature: Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 57

94 High data aailability and system-leel redundancy designed to address the needs of business-critical and mission-critical applications Single, integrated architecture designed to support concurrent block I/O and file sering oer Ethernet and Fibre Channel SAN infrastructures High throughput and fast response times for database, , and technical applications Support of enterprise customers requiring unified access to Network Attached Storage (NAS) ia Fibre Channel (FC) or Internet Small Computer System Interface (iscsi) Attachment of Fibre Channel (FC), Serial Attached SCSI (SAS), and Serial Adanced Technology Attachment (SATA) disk expansion units designed to allow deployment in multiple enironments, including data retention, NearStore, disk-to-disk backup scenarios, and high-performance, mission-critical I/O intensie operations All these models support the EXN1000 SATA storage expansion unit, the EXN4000 FC storage expansion units, the EXN3000 SAS/SATA expansion unit, and the EXN3500 SAS expansion unit. At least one storage expansion unit must be attached to the N series system. Table 36. N6210 physical attributes Attribute C10 C20 Number of controllers 1 2 Rack space required 3U 3U Dual core 2.3 GHz CPU 1 2 Random access memory (GB) Gb Fibre Channel ports Gb SAS ports 2 4 Disk dries supported Gb Ethernet ports 2 4 PCIe expansion slots 2 4 Serial console ports 1 2 LAN management (RLM) ports 1 2 Redundant power supplies and cooling fans Yes Yes Optional HBA features can be used to increase the maximums as follows. Note that each platform is limited by the maximum number of adapters that can be installed. Attribute C10 C20 FC loops FC loops (dual-path) 5 5 SAS stacks 5 n/a SAS stacks (dual-path) n/a 4 10-Gb Ethernet ports Gb FCoE ports 4 8 EXN1000 storage expansion units EXN3000 storage expansion units IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

95 Attribute C10 C20 EXN3500 storage expansion units EXN4000 storage expansion units Connecting storage expansion units to the N6210 The N6210 storage controllers may be ordered without an accompanying expansion unit, but it requires at least one storage expansion unit to be operational. The EXN1000, EXN3000, EXN3500, or EXN4000 satisfy this requirement. The EXN1000 storage expansion unit proides a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing fie, and up to a maximum of 14, serial adanced technology attachment (SATA) disk dries, either in 500 GB, 750 GB, 1 TB, or 2 TB physical capacities. The EXN4000 storage expansion units proide a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing fie, and up to a maximum of 14, FC disk dries. They support FC disk dries of 300 GB physical capacity (10,000 rpm or 15,000 rpm), 450 GB physical capacity (15,000 rpm), and 600 GB physical capacity (15,000 rpm). The EXN3000 storage expansion unit is a 4U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing a maximum of 24 SAS or SATA disk dries. The supported disk dries are: SAS: 300 GB, 450 GB, 600 GB and 4 TB physical capacities SATA: 500 GB, 1 TB, 2 TB, and 3 TB physical capacities (3 TB dries require Data ONTAP and later) SED SAS: 3 TB and 4 TB physical capacities The EXN3500 storage expansion unit is a 2U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing a maximum of 24 SAS disk dries. The supported disk drie physical capacities are: SAS: 450 GB, 600 GB, 900 GB, and 1.2 TB. Solid state disk (SSD): 200 GB, 400 GB, 800 GB, and 1.6 TB physical capacities Table 37. N6210 raw storage capacity Within a single N series storage expansion unit, all disk dries must be of a particular type (rotational speed/capacity). For the initial order of the IBM System Storage N series, orders for EXNx000 expansion units may not include more than two types (rotational speed and capacity) of disk dries. The maximum raw storage capacity of N6210 systems is determined by the number of disk dries supported. N6210 systems support a maximum of 240 hard drie spindles. The following table describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for the N6210: Disk enclosure Disk drie capacity Maximum storage enclosures Maximum disk dries Maximum physical capacity EXN GB SATA disk dries TB EXN GB SATA disk dries TB Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 59

96 Table 37. N6210 raw storage capacity (continued) Disk enclosure Disk drie capacity Maximum storage enclosures Maximum disk dries Maximum physical capacity EXN TB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries In systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.x TB In systems running Data ONTAP 8.0.x TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN TB SAS disk dries *Requires Data ONTAP or higher TB EXN GB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries In systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.x TB In systems running Data ONTAP 8.0.x EXN TB SATA disk dries *Requires Data ONTAP or higher EXN3000 EXN3500 EXN3500 EXN3500 EXN TB SED NL SAS disk dries 200 GB solid state dries GB solid state dries GB solid state dries TB solid state dries 1 *Requires Data ONTAP 8.2.x or higher *Requires Data ONTAP or higher *Requires Data ONTAP 8.2 or higher *Requires Data ONTAP or higher *Requires Data ONTAP 8.2 or higher TB TB TB TB TB TB TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN TB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB Fibre Channel disk dries TB EXN GB Fibre Channel disk dries TB 60 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

97 Table 37. N6210 raw storage capacity (continued) Disk enclosure Disk drie capacity Maximum storage enclosures Maximum disk dries Maximum physical capacity EXN GB Fibre Channel disk dries TB 1 Storage systems using Solid-state disk (SSD) dries require at least one stack of rotating disk dries in addition to the SSD stack. For the disk shelf supporting SSD dries to function properly, a minimum of four SSD dries must be installed in the disk shelf. EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units must not share a Fibre Channel loop with EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units. A maximum of six storage expansion units (EXN1000, or EXN4000) is supported on a single Fibre Channel loop. An SAS stack can contain a maximum of ten EXN3000 or EXN3500 storage expansion units. The maximum number of supported SAS stacks and total EXN3000 or EXN3500 storage expansion units depends upon the storage controller configuration. EXN3000s and EXN3500s are supported within the same system configuration, but they cannot be connected in the same SAS stack. A single SAS stack must contain only EXN3000s or EXN3500s. Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is supported for N6210 systems. Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is designed to improe reliability, aailability and sericeability of the storage expansion units attached to the storage controller by creating two redundant paths from each storage controller to each loop of the storage expansion units. For more information about using dual-path Fibre Channel cabling, see the Installation and Setup Instructions that came with your system. N6210 feature codes The following table lists the feature codes for N6210 cables and connectors. For a list of the HBA feature codes supported for the N6210, see Appendix H, Optional adapter cards supported by N6200 series systems, on page 253. Table 38. N6210 feature codes Feature Code Description Machine Model Feature Code Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC 2858 C10, C m 50-micron Fibre Channel 2858 C10, C cable (LC/LC) 5m FCoE SFP+ copper cable C10, C Dual-port 10-Gbps Ethernet PCIe 2858 C10, C NIC adapter 3 Dual-port, 10GbE NIC, SFP C10, C NIC SFP C10, C SFP+ Optical module for FC 2858 C10, C Data ONTAP 8.2+ Indicator 2858 C10, C Feature code 2012 is for use only with feature code 1065 (Dual-port 10-Gbps Ethernet PCIe NIC adapter). Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 61

98 2 For use with FCoE adapters wheneer copper cables are required. Table 39. N6210 Clustered Data ONTAP feature codes Description Machine Model Feature Clustered Data 2858 C ONTAP base license Cluster machine 2858 C identifier 16-port cluster 2858 C interconnect switch TwinAx cable, 0.5m, for CN1610 (16-port cluster interconnect switch) 2858 C TwinAx cable, 2m, for CN1610 (16-port cluster interconnect switch) TwinAx cable, 5m, for CN1610 (16-port cluster interconnect switch) 2858 C C Gbps Ethernet 2858 C10, C SFP+ 4 N6220 hardware features Note: 3 Feature code 1065 or 1078 must be assigned if you hae installed Clustered Data ONTAP. Note: 4 Feature code 2013 is used in the cluster interconnect switch with optical cables if TwinAx cables are not used. The power cord features for the N6210 are listed in Appendix B, Power cord list for N series storage systems, on page 215. The IBM System Storage N6220 storage controllers are designed to interoperate with products capable of data transmission in the industry-standard iscsi, CIFS, FCP, FCoE, and NFS protocols. Supported systems include the IBM eserer System p, System i (NFS only), System x, and System z (NFS only) serers. The N6220 systems consist of Model C15, Model C25, Model E15, Model E25, and associated software. All models can be configured, ia optional features, to be either storage controllers or gateways. Dual-node configurations include Clustered Failoer (CFO) support (ia required feature), designed to proide failoer and failback function, helping improe oerall aailability. All N6220 models must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. None of the N6220 models include storage in the base chassis. See the Interoperability Matrix at the following web page for supported deices for your N series system IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

99 For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel, Fibre Channel oer Ethernet, and iscsi, refer to the IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iscsi Configuration Guide for your ersion of Data ONTAP. N6220 models IBM System Storage N6220 storage controllers include: Model C15 - A single node base unit Model C25 - An actie/actie dual-node base unit Model E15 - A single-node base unit with an I/O Expansion Module (IOXM) Model E25 - The coupling of two Model E15 units Exx models contain an I/O expansion module that proides additional PCIe slots. The I/O expansion is not aailable on Cxx models. Model C15 can be upgraded to Model C25 and Model E15 can be upgraded to Model E25. Model upgrades are disruptie upgrades. Each chassis is a 3U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The N6220 storage controllers do not include storage in the base chassis. Note: All these models may be configured as gateways. If they are to be used as gateways, all Licensed Function Indicator features must be those with the suffix, GW (for example, SnapRestore - GW). All N6220 models feature: High data aailability and system-leel redundancy designed to address the needs of business-critical and mission-critical applications Single, integrated architecture designed to support concurrent block I/O and file sering oer Ethernet and Fibre Channel SAN infrastructures High throughput and fast response times for database, , and technical applications Support of enterprise customers requiring unified access to Network Attached Storage (NAS) ia Fibre Channel (FC) or Internet Small Computer System Interface (iscsi) Attachment of Fibre Channel (FC), Serial Attached SCSI (SAS), and Serial Adanced Technology Attachment (SATA) disk expansion units designed to allow deployment in multiple enironments, including data retention, NearStore, disk-to-disk backup scenarios, and high-performance, mission-critical I/O intensie operations All these models support the EXN1000 SATA storage expansion unit, the EXN4000 FC storage expansion units, the EXN3000 SAS/SATA expansion unit, the EXN3200 SAS expansion unit, and the EXN3500 SATA expansion unit. At least one storage expansion unit must be attached to the N series system. Table 40. N6220 physical attributes Attribute C15 C25 E15 E25 Number of controllers Rack space required 3U 3U 3U 6U Quad core 2.3 GHz CPU Random access memory (GB) Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 63

100 Table 40. N6220 physical attributes (continued) Attribute C15 C25 E15 E25 4-Gb Fibre Channel ports Gb SAS ports Disk dries supported Gb Ethernet ports PCIe expansion slots Serial console ports LAN management (RLM) ports Redundant power supplies and cooling fans Yes Yes Yes Yes Optional HBA features can be used to increase the maximums as follows. Note that each platform is limited by the maximum number of adapters that can be installed. Attribute C15 C25 E15 E25 FC loops (dual-path) SAS stacks (dual-path) Gb Ethernet ports Gb FCoE ports EXN1000 storage expansion units EXN3000 storage expansion units EXN3200 storage expansion units EXN3500 storage expansion units EXN4000 storage expansion units Connecting storage expansion units to the N6220 The N6220 storage controller may be ordered without an accompanying expansion unit, but it requires at least one storage expansion unit to be operational. The EXN1000, EXN3000, EXN3200, EXN3500, or EXN4000 satisfy this requirement. The EXN1000 storage expansion unit proides a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing fie, and up to a maximum of 14, serial adanced technology attachment (SATA) disk dries, either in 500 GB, 750 GB, 1 TB, or 2 TB physical capacities. The EXN4000 storage expansion units proide a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing fie, and up to a maximum of 14, FC disk dries. They support FC disk dries of 300 GB physical capacity (10,000 rpm or 15,000 rpm), 450 GB physical capacity (15,000 rpm), and 600 GB physical capacity (15,000 rpm). The EXN3000 storage expansion unit is a 4U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing 6, and up to a maximum of 24 SAS or SATA disk dries. The supported disk dries are: SAS: 300 GB, 450 GB, 600 GB, and 4 TB physical capacities SATA: 500 GB, 1 TB, 2 TB and 3 TB physical capacities SSD: 100 GB and 200 GB physical capacities 64 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

101 Note: A maximum of four EXN3000s may be attached to any N series supported system. EXN3000s with SSDs may not be in the same SAS stack as non-ssd storage. SED SAS: 3 TB and 4 TB physical capacities The EXN3200 storage expansion unit is a 4U, high-density SATA enclosure for attachment to PCIe-based N series systems with SAS ports that can hold up to 48 disk dries per unit. The EXN3200 supports 3 TB and 4 TB SATA disk dries. The EXN3500 storage expansion unit is a 2U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing a maximum of 24 SAS disk dries. The supported disk drie physical capacities are: SAS: 450 GB, 600 GB, 900 GB, and 1.2 TB Solid state disk (SSD): 200 GB, 400 GB, 800 GB, and 1.6 TB physical capacities Table 41. N6220 raw storage capacity Within a single N series storage expansion unit, all disk dries must be of a particular type (rotational speed/capacity). For the initial order of the IBM System Storage N series, orders for N series expansion units may not include more than two types (rotational speed and capacity) of disk dries. The maximum raw storage capacity of the N6200 series systems is determined by the number of disk dries supported. The N6220 models each support 480 hard drie spindles. The following table describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for the N6220: Disk enclosure Disk drie capacity Maximum storage enclosures Maximum disk dries Maximum physical capacity EXN GB SATA disk dries TB EXN GB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries In systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.x TB In systems running Data ONTAP 8.0.x EXN GB SSD dries 1 *Requires Data ONTAP or higher EXN GB SSD dries 1 *Requires Data ONTAP or higher TB TB TB EXN GB SAS dries TB EXN GB SAS dries TB EXN GB SAS dries TB EXN TB SAS disk dries *Requires Data ONTAP or higher TB Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 65

102 Table 41. N6220 raw storage capacity (continued) Disk enclosure Disk drie capacity Maximum storage enclosures Maximum disk dries Maximum physical capacity EXN GB SATA dries TB EXN TB SATA dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries In systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.x TB In systems running Data ONTAP 8.0.x EXN TB SATA disk dries *Requires Data ONTAP or higher EXN TB SED NL SAS disk dries *Requires Data ONTAP 8.2.x or higher TB TB TB EXN TB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries *Requires Data ONTAP or higher TB EXN3500 EXN3500 EXN3500 EXN GB solid state dries GB solid state dries GB solid state dries TB solid state dries 1 *Requires Data ONTAP or higher *Requires Data ONTAP 8.2 or higher *Requires Data ONTAP or higher *Requires Data ONTAP 8.2 or higher TB TB TB TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN TB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB Fibre Channel disk dries TB EXN GB Fibre Channel disk dries TB EXN GB Fibre Channel disk dries TB 1 Storage systems using Solid-state disk (SSD) dries require at least one stack of rotating disk dries in addition to the SSD stack. For the disk shelf supporting SSD dries to function properly, a minimum of four SSD dries must be installed in the disk shelf. 66 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

103 EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units must not share a Fibre Channel loop with EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units. A maximum of six storage expansion units (EXN1000, or EXN4000) is supported on a single Fibre Channel loop. A SAS stack can contain a maximum of ten EXN3000 or EXN3500 storage expansion units or a maximum of fie EXN3200 storage expansion units. The maximum number of supported SAS stacks and total EXN3000 or EXN3500 storage expansion units depends upon the storage controller configuration. EXN3000s and EXN3500s are supported within the same system configuration, but they cannot be connected in the same SAS stack. A single SAS stack must contain only EXN3000s or EXN3500s. Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is supported for the N6220 system. Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is designed to improe reliability, aailability and sericeability of the storage expansion units attached to the storage controller by creating two redundant paths from each storage controller to each loop of the storage expansion units. For more information about using dual-path Fibre Channel cabling, see the Installation and Setup Instructions that came with your system. N6220 feature codes The following table lists the feature codes for N6220 cables and connectors. For a list of the HBA feature codes supported for the N6220, see Appendix H, Optional adapter cards supported by N6200 series systems, on page 253. Table 42. N6220 feature codes Feature Code Description Machine Model Feature Code Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC 2858 C15, C25, E15, E m 50-micron Fibre Channel 2858 C15, C25, E15, E cable (LC/LC) 5m FCoE SFP+ copper cable C15, C25, E15, E Dual-port, 10GbE NIC, SFP C15, C25, E15, E SFP+ Optical module for FC 2858 C15, C25, E15, E Dual-path FC cabling 2858 C25, E Data ONTAP 8.2+ Indicator 2858 C15, C25, E15, E For use with FCoE adapters wheneer copper cables are required. 2 Feature code 2014 is for use only with Feature code Table 43. N6220 Clustered Data ONTAP feature codes Description Machine Model Feature Clustered Data 2858 C25, E ONTAP base license Cluster machine 2858 C25, E identifier 16-port cluster interconnect switch 2858 C25, E Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 67

104 Table 43. N6220 Clustered Data ONTAP feature codes (continued) Description Machine Model Feature TwinAx cable, 0.5m, for CN1610 (16-port cluster interconnect switch) 2858 C25, E TwinAx cable, 2m, for CN1610 (16-port cluster interconnect switch) TwinAx cable, 5m, for CN1610 (16-port cluster interconnect switch) 2858 C25, E C25, E Gbps Ethernet 2858 C15, C25, E15, E SFP+ 4 N6240 hardware features Note: 3 Feature code 1078 must be assigned if you hae installed Clustered Data ONTAP. Note: 4 Feature code 2013 is used in the cluster interconnect switch with optical cables if TwinAx cables are not used. The power cord features for the N6220 are listed in Appendix B, Power cord list for N series storage systems, on page 215. The IBM System Storage N6240 storage controllers are designed to interoperate with products capable of data transmission in the industry-standard iscsi, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. Supported systems include the IBM eserer System p, System i (NFS only), System x, and System z (NFS only) serers. The N6240 systems consist of the Model C21, Model E11, Model E21, and associated software. All models can be configured, ia optional features, to be either storage controllers or gateways. Dual-node configurations include Clustered Failoer (CFO) support (ia required feature), designed to proide failoer and failback function, helping improe oerall aailability. All N6240 models must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. None of the N6240 models include storage in the base chassis. See the Interoperability Matrix at the following web page for supported deices for your N series system. For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel, Fibre Channel oer Ethernet, and iscsi, refer to the IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iscsi Configuration Guide for your ersion of Data ONTAP. N6240 models IBM System Storage N6240 storage controllers include: Model C21 - An actie/actie dual-node base unit 68 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

105 Model E11 - A single-node base unit with an I/O Expansion Module (IOXM) Model E21 - The coupling of two Model E11 units Exx models contain an I/O expansion module that proides additional PCIe slots. The I/O expansion is not aailable on Cxx models. The Model E11 can be upgraded to a Model E21; model upgrades are disruptie. Each chassis is a 3U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The N6240 storage controllers do not include storage in the base chassis. Note: All these models may be configured as gateways. If they are to be used as gateways, all Licensed Function Indicator features must be those with the suffix, GW (for example, SnapRestore - GW). All N6240 models feature: High data aailability and system-leel redundancy designed to address the needs of business-critical and mission-critical applications Single, integrated architecture designed to support concurrent block I/O and file sering oer Ethernet and Fibre Channel SAN infrastructures High throughput and fast response times for database, , and technical applications Support of enterprise customers requiring unified access to Network Attached Storage (NAS) ia Fibre Channel (FC) or Internet Small Computer System Interface (iscsi) Attachment of Fibre Channel (FC), Serial Attached SCSI (SAS), and Serial Adanced Technology Attachment (SATA) disk expansion units designed to allow deployment in multiple enironments, including data retention, NearStore, disk-to-disk backup scenarios, and high-performance, mission-critical I/O intensie operations All these models support the EXN1000 SATA storage expansion unit, the EXN4000 FC storage expansion units, the EXN3000 SAS/SATA expansion unit, the EXN3200 SAS expansion unit, and the EXN3500 SATA expansion unit. At least one storage expansion unit must be attached to the N series system. Table 44. N6240 physical attributes Attribute C21 E11 E21 Number of controllers Rack space required 3U 3U 6U Quad core 2.3 GHz CPU Random access memory (GB) Gb Fibre Channel ports Gb SAS ports Disk dries supported Gb Ethernet ports PCIe expansion slots Serial console ports LAN management (RLM) ports Redundant power supplies and cooling fans Yes Yes Yes Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 69

106 Optional HBA features can be used to increase the maximums as follows. Note that each platform is limited by the maximum number of adapters that can be installed. Attribute C21 E11 E21 FC loops FC loops (dual-path) 4 n/a 13 SAS stacks n/a SAS stacks (dual-path) 4 n/a Gb Ethernet ports Gb FCoE ports EXN1000 storage expansion units EXN3000 storage expansion units EXN3200 storage expansion units EXN3500 storage expansion units EXN4000 storage expansion units Connecting storage expansion units to the N6240 The N6240 storage controller may be ordered without an accompanying expansion unit, but it requires at least one storage expansion unit to be operational. The EXN1000, EXN3000, EXN3200, EXN3500, or EXN4000 satisfy this requirement. The EXN1000 storage expansion unit proides a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing fie, and up to a maximum of 14, serial adanced technology attachment (SATA) disk dries, either in 500 GB, 750 GB, 1 TB, or 2 TB physical capacities. The EXN4000 storage expansion units proide a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing fie, and up to a maximum of 14, FC disk dries. They support FC disk dries of 300 GB physical capacity (10,000 rpm or 15,000 rpm), 450 GB physical capacity (15,000 rpm), and 600 GB physical capacity (15,000 rpm). The EXN3000 storage expansion unit is a 4U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing a maximum of 24 SAS or SATA disk dries. The supported disk dries are: SAS: 300 GB, 450 GB, 600 GB, and 4 TB physical capacities SATA: 500 GB, 1 TB, 2 TB and 3 TB physical capacities SSD: 100 GB and 200 GB physical capacities Note: A maximum of four EXN3000s may be attached to any N series supported system. The EXN3000s with SSDs may not be in the same SAS stack as non-ssd storage. SED SAS: 3 TB and 4 TB physical capacities The EXN3200 storage expansion unit is a 4U, high-density SATA enclosure for attachment to PCIe-based N series systems with SAS ports that can hold up to 48 disk dries per unit. The EXN3200 supports 3 TB and 4 TB SATA disk dries. The EXN3500 storage expansion unit is a 2U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing a maximum of 24 SAS disk dries. The supported disk drie physical capacities are: 70 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

107 450 GB, 600 GB, 900 GB, and 1.2 TB. Solid state disk (SSD): 200 GB, 400 GB, 800 GB, and 1.6 TB physical capacities Within a single N series storage expansion unit, all disk dries must be of a particular type (rotational speed/capacity). For the initial order of the IBM System Storage N series, orders for N series expansion units may not include more than two types (rotational speed and capacity) of disk dries. The maximum raw storage capacity of the N6200 series systems is determined by the number of disk dries supported. The N6240 models each support 600 hard drie spindles. The following table describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for the N6240: Table 45. N6240 raw storage capacity Disk enclosure Disk drie capacity Maximum storage enclosures Maximum disk dries Maximum physical capacity EXN GB SATA disk dries TB EXN GB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries In systems TB running Data ONTAP 7.3.x In systems TB running Data ONTAP 8.0.x EXN GB SSD dries 1 *Requires Data TB ONTAP or higher EXN GB SSD dries 1 *Requires Data TB ONTAP or higher EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN TB NL SAS disk dries *Requires Data ONTAP or higher TB EXN GB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries In systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.x TB In systems running Data ONTAP 8.0.x EXN TB SATA disk dries *Requires Data ONTAP or higher TB TB Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 71

108 Table 45. N6240 raw storage capacity (continued) Disk enclosure EXN3000 Disk drie capacity 4 TB SED NL SAS disk dries *Requires Data ONTAP 8.2.x or higher Maximum storage enclosures Maximum disk dries TB Maximum physical capacity EXN TB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries TB EXN GB SSD dries 1 *Requires Data ONTAP or higher TB EXN GB SSD dries 1 *Requires Data ONTAP 8.2 or higher EXN GB SSD dries 1 *Requires Data ONTAP or higher EXN TB SSD dries 1 *Requires Data ONTAP 8.2 or higher TB TB TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN TB SAS disk dries *Requires Data ONTAP or higher TB EXN GB Fibre Channel disk dries TB EXN GB Fibre Channel disk dries TB EXN GB Fibre Channel disk dries TB 1 Storage systems using solid state disk (SSD) dries require at least one stack of rotating disk dries in addition to the SSD stack. For the disk shelf supporting SSD dries to function properly, a minimum of four SSD dries must be installed in the disk shelf. EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units must not share a Fibre Channel loop with EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units. A maximum of six storage expansion units (EXN1000, or EXN4000) is supported on a single Fibre Channel loop. A SAS stack can contain a maximum of ten EXN3000 or EXN3500 storage expansion units or a maximum of fie EXN3200 storage expansion units. The maximum number of supported SAS stacks and total EXN3000 or EXN3500 storage expansion units depends upon the storage controller configuration. EXN3000s and EXN3500s are supported within the same system configuration, but they cannot be connected in the same SAS stack. A single SAS stack must contain only EXN3000s or EXN3500s. Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is supported for the N6240 system. Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is designed to improe reliability, aailability and 72 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

109 sericeability of the storage expansion units attached to the storage controller by creating two redundant paths from each storage controller to each loop of the storage expansion units. For more information about using dual-path Fibre Channel cabling, see the Installation and Setup Instructions that came with your system. N6240 feature codes The following table lists the feature codes for N6240 cables and connectors. For a list of the HBA feature codes supported for the N6240, see Appendix H, Optional adapter cards supported by N6200 series systems, on page 253. Table 46. N6240 feature codes Feature Code Description Machine Model Feature Code Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC 2858 C21, E11, E m 50-micron Fibre Channel 2858 C21, E11, E cable (LC/LC) 5m FCoE SFP+ copper cable C21, E11, E Dual-port 10-Gbps Ethernet PCIe 2858 C21, E11, E NIC adapter 4 Dual-port, 10GbE NIC, SFP C21, E11, E NIC SFP C21, E11, E SFP+ Optical module for FC 2858 C21, E11, E Data ONTAP 8.2+ Indicator 2858 C21, E11, E For use with FCoE adapters wheneer copper cables are required. 2 Feature code 2014 is for use only with feature code Feature code 2012 is for use only with Feature code 1065 (Dual-port 10-Gbps Ethernet PCIe NIC adapter). Table 47. N6240 Clustered Data ONTAP feature codes Description Machine Model Feature Clustered Data 2858 C21, E ONTAP base license Cluster machine 2858 C21, E identifier 16-port cluster 2858 C21, E interconnect switch TwinAx cable, 0.5m, for CN1610 (16-port cluster interconnect switch) 2858 C21, E TwinAx cable, 2m, for CN1610 (16-port cluster interconnect switch) 2858 C21, E Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 73

110 Table 47. N6240 Clustered Data ONTAP feature codes (continued) Description Machine Model Feature TwinAx cable, 5m, for CN1610 (16-port cluster interconnect switch) 2858 C21, E Gbps Ethernet 2858 C21, E11, E SFP+ 5 N6250 hardware features Note: 4 Feature code 1065 or 1078 must be assigned if you hae installed Clustered Data ONTAP. Note: 5 Feature code 2013 is used in the cluster interconnect switch with optical cables if TwinAx cables are not used. The power cord features for the N6240 are listed in Appendix B, Power cord list for N series storage systems, on page 215. The IBM System Storage N6250 storage controllers are designed to interoperate with products capable of data transmission in the industry-standard iscsi, CIFS, FCP, FCoE, and NFS protocols. Supported systems include the IBM eserer System p, System i (NFS only), System x, and System z (NFS only) serers. The N6250 systems consist of Model E16 and Model E26, and associated software. All models can be configured, ia optional features, to be either storage controllers or gateways. Dual-node configurations include Clustered Failoer (CFO) support (ia required feature), designed to proide failoer and failback function, helping improe oerall aailability. All N6250 models must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. None of the N6250 models include storage in the base chassis. See the Interoperability Matrix at the following web page for supported deices for your N series system. For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel, Fibre Channel oer Ethernet, and iscsi, refer to the IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iscsi Configuration Guide for your ersion of Data ONTAP. N6250 models IBM System Storage N6250 storage controllers include: Model E16 - A single-node base unit with an I/O Expansion Module (IOXM) Model E26 - The coupling of two Model E15 units Exx models contain an I/O expansion module that proides additional PCIe slots. The I/O expansion is not aailable on Cxx models. Model E16 can be upgraded to Model E26. Model upgrades are disruptie upgrades. 74 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

111 Each chassis is a 3U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The N6250 storage controllers do not include storage in the base chassis. Note: All these models may be configured as gateways. If they are to be used as gateways, all Licensed Function Indicator features must be those with the suffix, GW (for example, SnapRestore - GW). All N6250 models feature: High data aailability and system-leel redundancy designed to address the needs of business-critical and mission-critical applications Single, integrated architecture designed to support concurrent block I/O and file sering oer Ethernet and Fibre Channel SAN infrastructures High throughput and fast response times for database, , and technical applications Support of enterprise customers requiring unified access to Network Attached Storage (NAS) ia Fibre Channel (FC) or Internet Small Computer System Interface (iscsi) Attachment of Fibre Channel (FC), Serial Attached SCSI (SAS), and Serial Adanced Technology Attachment (SATA) disk expansion units designed to allow deployment in multiple enironments, including data retention, NearStore, disk-to-disk backup scenarios, and high-performance, mission-critical I/O intensie operations All these models support the EXN1000 SATA storage expansion unit, the EXN4000 FC storage expansion units, the EXN3000 SAS/SATA expansion unit, the EXN3200 SAS expansion unit, and the EXN3500 SATA expansion unit. At least one storage expansion unit must be attached to the N series system. Table 48. N6250 physical attributes Attribute E16 E26 Number of controllers 1 2 Rack space required 3U 6U Quad core 2.3 GHz CPU 2 4 Random access memory (GB) Gb Fibre Channel ports Gb SAS ports 2 4 Disk dries supported Gb Ethernet ports 2 4 PCIe expansion slots 6 12 Serial console ports 1 2 LAN management (RLM) ports 1 2 Redundant power supplies and cooling fans Yes Yes Optional HBA features can be used to increase the maximums as follows. Note that each platform is limited by the maximum number of adapters that can be installed. Attribute E16 E26 FC loops (dual-path) SAS stacks (dual-path) Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 75

112 Attribute E16 E26 10-Gb Ethernet ports Gb FCoE ports EXN1000 storage expansion units EXN3000 storage expansion units EXN3200 storage expansion units EXN3500 storage expansion units EXN4000 storage expansion units Connecting storage expansion units to the N6250 The N6250 storage controller may be ordered without an accompanying expansion unit, but it requires at least one storage expansion unit to be operational. The EXN1000, EXN3000, EXN3200, EXN3500, or EXN4000 satisfy this requirement. The EXN1000 storage expansion unit proides a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing fie, and up to a maximum of 14, serial adanced technology attachment (SATA) disk dries, either in 500 GB, 750 GB, 1 TB, or 2 TB physical capacities. The EXN4000 storage expansion units proide a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing fie, and up to a maximum of 14, FC disk dries. They support FC disk dries of 300 GB physical capacity (10,000 rpm or 15,000 rpm), 450 GB physical capacity (15,000 rpm), and 600 GB physical capacity (15,000 rpm). The EXN3000 storage expansion unit is a 4U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing a maximum of 24 SAS or SATA disk dries. The supported disk dries are: SAS: 300 GB, 450 GB, 600 GB, and 4 TB physical capacities SATA: 500 GB, 1 TB, 2 TB and 3 TB physical capacities SSD: 100 GB and 200 GB physical capacities Note: A maximum of four EXN3000s may be attached to any N series supported system. The EXN3000s with SSDs may not be in the same SAS stack as non-ssd storage. SED SAS: 3 TB and 4 TB physical capacities The EXN3200 storage expansion unit is a 4U, high-density SATA enclosure for attachment to PCIe-based N series systems with SAS ports that can hold up to 48 disk dries per unit. The EXN3200 supports 3 TB and 4 TB SATA disk dries. The EXN3500 storage expansion unit is a 2U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing a maximum of 24 SAS disk dries. The supported disk drie physical capacities are: 450 GB, 600 GB, 900 GB, and 1.2 TB. Solid state disk (SSD): 200 GB, 400 GB, 800 GB, and 1.6 TB physical capacities Within a single N series storage expansion unit, all disk dries must be of a particular type (rotational speed/capacity). For the initial order of the IBM System Storage N series, orders for N series expansion units may not include more than two types (rotational speed and capacity) of disk dries. 76 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

113 The maximum raw storage capacity of the N6200 series systems is determined by the number of disk dries supported. The N6250 models each support 720 hard drie spindles. The following table describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for the N6250: Table 49. N6250 raw storage capacity Disk enclosure Disk drie capacity Maximum storage enclosures Maximum disk dries Maximum physical capacity EXN GB SATA disk dries TB EXN GB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries In systems TB running Data ONTAP 7.3.x In systems TB running Data ONTAP 8.0.x EXN GB SSD dries 1 *Requires Data TB ONTAP or higher EXN GB SSD dries 1 *Requires Data TB ONTAP or higher EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN TB NL SAS disk dries *Requires Data ONTAP or higher TB EXN GB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries In systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.x TB In systems running Data ONTAP 8.0.x EXN TB SATA disk dries *Requires Data ONTAP or higher EXN TB SED NL SAS disk dries *Requires Data ONTAP 8.2.x or higher TB TB TB EXN TB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries *Requires Data ONTAP or higher TB Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 77

114 Table 49. N6250 raw storage capacity (continued) Disk enclosure EXN3500 EXN3500 EXN3500 EXN GB solid-state drie GB solid-state drie GB solid-state drie 1 Disk drie capacity 1.6 TB solid-state drie 1 *Requires Data ONTAP or higher *Requires Data ONTAP 8.2 or higher *Requires Data ONTAP or higher *Requires Data ONTAP 8.2 or higher Maximum storage enclosures Maximum disk dries TB TB TB Maximum physical capacity TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN TB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB Fibre Channel disk dries TB EXN GB Fibre Channel disk dries TB EXN GB Fibre Channel disk dries TB 1 Storage systems using solid state disk (SSD) dries require at least one stack of rotating disk dries in addition to the SSD stack. For the disk shelf supporting SSD dries to function properly, a minimum of four SSD dries must be installed in the disk shelf. EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units must not share a Fibre Channel loop with EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units. A maximum of six storage expansion units (EXN1000, or EXN4000) is supported on a single Fibre Channel loop. A SAS stack can contain a maximum of ten EXN3000 or EXN3500 storage expansion units or a maximum of fie EXN3200 storage expansion units. The maximum number of supported SAS stacks and total EXN3000 or EXN3500 storage expansion units depends upon the storage controller configuration. EXN3000s and EXN3500s are supported within the same system configuration, but they cannot be connected in the same SAS stack. A single SAS stack must contain only EXN3000s or EXN3500s. Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is supported for the N6250 system. Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is designed to improe reliability, aailability and sericeability of the storage expansion units attached to the storage controller by creating two redundant paths from each storage controller to each loop of the storage expansion units. For more information about using dual-path Fibre Channel cabling, see the Installation and Setup Instructions that came with your system. 78 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

115 N6250 feature codes The following table lists the feature codes for N6250 cables and connectors. For a list of the HBA feature codes supported for the N6250, see Appendix H, Optional adapter cards supported by N6200 series systems, on page 253. Table 50. N6250 feature codes Feature Code Description Machine Model Feature Code Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC 2858 E16, E m 50-micron Fibre Channel 2858 E16, E cable (LC/LC) 5m FCoE SFP+ copper cable E16, E Dual-port, 10GbE NIC, SFP E16, E SFP+ Optical module for FC 2858 E16, E Dual-path FC cabling 2858 E Data ONTAP 8.2+ Indicator 2858 E16, E For use with FCoE adapters wheneer copper cables are required. 2 Feature code 2014 is for use only with feature code Table 51. N6250 Clustered Data ONTAP feature codes Description Machine Model Feature Clustered Data 2858 E ONTAP base license Cluster machine 2858 E identifier 16-port cluster 2858 E interconnect switch TwinAx cable, 0.5m, for CN1610 (16-port cluster interconnect switch) 2858 E TwinAx cable, 2m, for CN1610 (16-port cluster interconnect switch) TwinAx cable, 5m, for CN1610 (16-port cluster interconnect switch) 2858 E E Gbps Ethernet 2858 E16, E SFP+ 3 Note: 3 Feature code 1078 must be assigned if you hae installed Clustered Data ONTAP. Note: 4 Feature code 2013 is used in the cluster interconnect switch with optical cables if TwinAx cables are not used. Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 79

116 N6270 hardware features The power cord features for the N6250 are listed in Appendix B, Power cord list for N series storage systems, on page 215. The IBM System Storage N6270 storage controllers are designed to interoperate with products capable of data transmission in the industry-standard iscsi, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. Supported systems include the IBM eserer System p, System i (NFS only), System x, and System z (NFS only) serers. The N6270 systems consist of the Model C22, Model E12, Model E22, and associated software. All models can be configured, ia optional features, to be either storage controllers or gateways. Dual-node configurations include Clustered Failoer (CFO) support (ia required feature), designed to proide failoer and failback function, helping improe oerall aailability. All N6270 models must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. None of the N6270 models include storage in the base chassis. See the Interoperability Matrix at the following web page for supported deices for your N series system. For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel, Fibre Channel oer Ethernet, and iscsi, refer to the IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iscsi Configuration Guide for your ersion of Data ONTAP. N6270 models IBM System Storage N6270 storage controllers include: Model C22 - an actie/actie dual-node base unit consisting of a single chassis with two controllers and no I/O expansion modules Model E12 - a single-node base unit consisting of a single chassis with one controller and one I/O expansion module Model E22 - the coupling of two E12 models Exx models contain an I/O expansion module that proides additional PCIe slots. The I/O expansion is not aailable on Cxx models. The Model E12 can be upgraded to a Model E22; model upgrades are disruptie. Each chassis is a 3U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The N6270 storage controllers do not include storage in the base chassis. Note: All these models may be configured as gateways. If they are to be used as gateways, all Licensed Function Indicator features must be those with the suffix, GW (for example, SnapRestore - GW). All N6270 models feature: High data aailability and system-leel redundancy designed to address the needs of business-critical and mission-critical applications Single, integrated architecture designed to support concurrent block I/O and file sering oer Ethernet and FC SAN infrastructures High throughput and fast response times for database, , and technical applications 80 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

117 Enterprise customer support for unified access requirements for NAS ia FC or iscsi FC, SAS, and SATA attachment options for disk expansion units designed to allow deployment in multiple enironments, including data retention, NearStore, disk-to-disk backup scenarios, and high-performance, mission-critical I/O intensie operations All these models support the EXN1000 SATA storage expansion unit, the EXN4000 FC storage expansion units, the EXN3000 SAS/SATA expansion unit, the EXN3200 SATA expansion unit, and the EXN3500 SAS expansion unit. At least one storage expansion unit must be attached to the N series system. Table 52. N6270 physical attributes Attribute C22 E12 E22 Number of controllers Rack space required 3U 3U 6U Quad core 2.3 GHz CPU Random access memory (GB) Gb Fibre Channel ports Gb SAS ports Disk dries supported Gb Ethernet ports PCIe expansion slots Serial console ports LAN management (RLM) ports Redundant power supplies and cooling fans Yes Yes Yes Optional HBA features can be used to increase the maximums as follows. Note that each platform is limited by the maximum number of adapters that can be installed. Attribute C22 E12 E22 FC loops FC loops (dual-path) 4 n/a 13 SAS stacks n/a SAS stacks (dual-path) 4 n/a Gb Ethernet ports Gb FCoE ports EXN1000 storage expansion units EXN3000 storage expansion units EXN3200 storage expansion units EXN3500 storage expansion units EXN4000 storage expansion units Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 81

118 Connecting storage expansion units to the N6270 The N6270 storage controller may be ordered without an accompanying expansion unit, but it requires at least one storage expansion unit to be operational. The EXN1000, EXN3000, EXN3200, EXN3500, or EXN4000 satisfy this requirement. The EXN1000 storage expansion unit proides a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing fie, and up to a maximum of 14, serial adanced technology attachment (SATA) disk dries, either in 500 GB, 750 GB, 1 TB, or 2 TB physical capacities. The EXN4000 storage expansion units proide a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing fie, and up to a maximum of 14, FC disk dries. They support FC disk dries of 300 GB physical capacity (10,000 rpm or 15,000 rpm), 450 GB physical capacity (15,000 rpm), and 600 GB physical capacity (15,000 rpm). The EXN3000 storage expansion unit is a 4U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing a maximum of 24 SAS or SATA disk dries. The supported disk dries are: SAS: 300 GB, 450 GB, 600 GB, and 4 TB physical capacities SATA: 500 GB, 1 TB, 2 TB and 3 TB physical capacities SSD: 100 GB and 200 GB physical capacities Note: A maximum of four EXN3000s may be attached to any N series supported system. The EXN3000s with SSDs may not be in the same SAS stack as non-ssd storage. SED SAS: 3 TB and 4 TB physical capacities The EXN3200 storage expansion unit is a 4U, high-density SATA enclosure for attachment to PCIe-based N series systems with SAS ports that can hold up to 48 disk dries per unit. The EXN3200 supports 3 TB and 4 TB SATA disk dries. The EXN3500 storage expansion unit is a 2U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing a maximum of 24 SAS disk dries. The supported disk drie physical capacities are: 450 GB, 600 GB, 900 GB, and 1.2 TB. Solid state disk (SSD): 200 GB, 400 GB, 800 GB, and 1.6 TB physical capacities Within a single N series storage expansion unit, all disk dries must be of a particular type (rotational speed/capacity). For the initial order of the IBM System Storage N series, orders for N series storage expansion units may not include more than two types (rotational speed and capacity) of disk dries. The maximum raw storage capacity of the N6200 series systems is determined by the number of disk dries supported. The N6270 models each support 960 hard drie spindles. The following table describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for the N6270: 82 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

119 Table 53. N6270 raw storage capacity Disk enclosure Disk drie capacity Maximum storage enclosures Maximum disk dries Maximum physical capacity EXN GB SATA disk dries TB EXN GB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries In systems TB running Data ONTAP 7.3.x In systems TB running Data ONTAP 8.0.x EXN GB SSD dries 1 *Requires Data TB ONTAP or higher EXN GB SSD dries 1 *Requires Data TB ONTAP or higher EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN TB NL SAS disk dries *Requires Data ONTAP or higher TB EXN GB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries In systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.x TB In systems running Data ONTAP 8.0.x EXN TB SATA disk dries *Requires Data ONTAP or higher EXN TB SED NL SAS disk dries *Requires Data ONTAP 8.2.x or higher TB TB TB EXN TB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries TB EXN GB solid state dries 1 *Requires Data ONTAP or higher TB EXN3500 EXN GB solid state dries GB solid state dries 1 *Requires Data ONTAP 8.2 or higher *Requires Data ONTAP or higher TB TB Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 83

120 Table 53. N6270 raw storage capacity (continued) Disk enclosure EXN TB solid state dries 1 Disk drie capacity *Requires Data ONTAP 8.2 or higher Maximum storage enclosures Maximum disk dries Maximum physical capacity TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN TB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB Fibre Channel disk dries TB EXN GB Fibre Channel disk dries TB EXN GB Fibre Channel disk dries TB 1 Storage systems using Solid-state disk (SSD) dries require at least one stack of rotating disk dries in addition to the SSD stack. For the disk shelf supporting SSD dries to function properly, a minimum of four SSD dries must be installed in the disk shelf. EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units must not share a Fibre Channel loop with EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units. A maximum of six storage expansion units (EXN1000, or EXN4000) is supported on a single Fibre Channel loop. An SAS stack can contain a maximum of ten EXN3000 or EXN3500 storage expansion units or a maximum of fie EXN3200 storage expansion units. The maximum number of supported SAS stacks and total EXN3000 or EXN3500 storage expansion units depends upon the storage controller configuration. EXN3000s and EXN3500s are supported within the same system configuration, but they cannot be connected in the same SAS stack. A single SAS stack must contain only EXN3000s or EXN3500s. Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is supported for the N6270 system. Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is designed to improe reliability, aailability and sericeability of the storage expansion units attached to the storage controller by creating two redundant paths from each storage controller to each loop of the storage expansion units. For more information about using dual-path Fibre Channel cabling, see the Installation and Setup Instructions that came with your system. N6270 feature codes The following table lists the feature codes for N6270 cables and connectors. For a list of the HBA feature codes supported for the N6270, see Appendix H, Optional adapter cards supported by N6200 series systems, on page 253. Table 54. N6270 feature codes Feature Code Description Machine Model Feature Code Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC 2858 C22, E12, E m 50-micron Fibre Channel cable (LC/LC) 2858 C22, E12, E IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

121 Table 54. N6270 feature codes (continued) Feature Code Description Machine Model Feature Code 5m FCoE SFP+ copper cable C22, E12, E Dual-port 10-Gbps Ethernet PCIe 2858 C22, E12, E NIC adapter 4 Dual-port, 10GbE NIC, SFP C22, E12, E NIC SFP C22, E12, E SFP+ Optical module for FC 2858 C22, E12, E Data ONTAP 8.2+ Indicator 2858 C22, E For use with FCoE adapters wheneer copper cables are required. 2 Feature Code 2014 is for use only with Feature code Feature code 2012 is for use only with feature code 1065 (Dual-port 10-Gbps Ethernet PCIe NIC adapter). Table 55. N6270 Clustered Data ONTAP feature codes Description Machine Model Feature Clustered Data 2858 C22, E ONTAP base license Cluster machine 2858 C22, E identifier 16-port cluster 2858 C22, E interconnect switch TwinAx cable, 0.5m, for CN1610 (16-port cluster interconnect switch) 2858 C22, E TwinAx cable, 2m, for CN1610 (16-port cluster interconnect switch) TwinAx cable, 5m, for CN1610 (16-port cluster interconnect switch) 2858 C22, E C22, E Gbps Ethernet 2858 C22, E SFP+ 5 Note: 4 Feature code 1065 or 1078 must be assigned if you hae installed Clustered Data ONTAP. Note: 5 Feature code 2013 is used in the cluster interconnect switch with optical cables if TwinAx cables are not used. The power cord features for the N6270 are listed in Appendix B, Power cord list for N series storage systems, on page 215. Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 85

122 N7700 filer hardware features The N7700 filer storage controllers consist of the Model A11 and Model A21 and associated software with gateway options. The IBM System Storage N7700 storage controllers are designed to interoperate with products capable of data transmission in the industry-standard iscsi, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These include the IBM eserer System p, System i (NFS only), System x, and System z (NFS only) serers. See the Interoperability Matrix at the following web page for supported deices for your N7000 series filer system. Mixed disk/lun support is aailable on N series gateway systems. This support requires Data ONTAP 7.3 or higher and enables the use of both third-party disks and N series storage expansion units on N series gateways. This support also enables SnapLock Compliance, LockVault Compliance, and Disk Sanitization on gateways when used with IBM N series storage only. These features are not supported on third-party storage deices. For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel, Fibre Channel oer Ethernet, and iscsi, refer to the IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iscsi Configuration Guide for your ersion of Data ONTAP. N7700 A11 The N7700 Model A11 is designed to proide a single-node storage controller with iscsi support, and NFS, CIFS, and FCP support ia optional features. The N7700 is a 6U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The N7700 storage controller does not include storage in the base chassis. The base chassis includes: Two AMD 2.6 GHz 64-bit Opteron 252 processors, each with 1 MB of leel 2 cache 16 GB of DDR-333 memory 512 MB of non-olatile random access memory (NVRAM) Six integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports Eight integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports Dual redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies and cooling fans Three PCI-X expansion slots Six PCIe expansion slots (Fie PCIe slots are aailable for customer use. One PCIe slot is resered for the NVRAM6 adapter.) One serial console port For the N7700 Model A11, the maximum number of additional expansion adapters is eight (three PCI-X and fie PCIe). One PCIe expansion slot is used for the standard (included with the N7700) 512 MB NVRAM adapter card. Note: The PCIe and PCI-X adapters supported by the N7700 and N7900 storage systems are described in Appendix I, Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems, on page IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

123 The N7700 Model A11 can be upgraded to a maximum of 14 dual-path (loop A and loop B) Fibre Channel loops (28 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports) ia the addition of four optional Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment (feature numbers 1014, 1029, or 1035). The 14 loops will support a maximum of 840 total disk dries. The Model A11 can be upgraded to a maximum of 14 Gigabit Ethernet ports ia the addition of two optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface cards (NICs) (feature number 1009). The Model A11 may be upgraded to a Model A21. The upgrade from a Model A11 to a Model A21 is a disruptie upgrade. N7700 A21 The N7700 Model A21 is designed to proide identical function as the N7700 Model A11, but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failoer (CFO) licensed function. The N7700 Model A21 supports a maximum of 840 dries (or LUNs, with the gateway option), 32 GB of DDR-333 memory, and ten backend Fibre Channel loops. The Model A21 consists of two nodes that are designed to proide failoer and failback function, helping improe oerall aailability. For the Model A21, each node is a 6U rack-mountable storage controller. Therefore, the Model A21 occupies a total of 12U of rack space. The Model A21 includes: Four AMD 2.6 GHz 64-bit Opteron 252 processors, each with 1 MB of leel 2 cache 32 GB of DDR-333 memory 1 GB of NVRAM 12 integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports 16 integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports Dual redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies and cooling fans Six PCI-X expansion slots 12 PCIe expansion slots (Ten PCIe slots are aailable for customer use. Two PCIe slots are resered for NVRAM6 adapters.) Two serial console ports For the N7700 Model A21, the maximum number of additional expansion adapters is 16 (six PCI-X and 10 PCIe). Two PCIe expansion slots are used for the standard (included with the N7700) 512 MB NVRAM adapter cards. Note: The PCIe and PCI-X adapters supported by the N7700 and N7900 storage systems are described in Appendix I, Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems, on page 265. The N7700 Model A21 can be upgraded to a maximum of 14 dual-path (loop A and loop B) Fibre Channel loops (28 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports) ia the addition of two optional Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment (feature number 1014, 1029, or 1035). The Model A21 can be upgraded to a maximum of 20 Gigabit Ethernet ports ia the addition of four optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number 1009). The physical proximity of the two processing nodes within a Model A21 (with respect to each other) is determined by which Infiniband cluster interconnect cables Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 87

124 are ordered (feature numbers 1037, 1040 and 1041). Optical cables (feature numbers 1040 and 1041) also require feature number Connecting storage expansion units to the N7700 filer Both N7700 filer models require the addition of at least one N series storage expansion unit. Table 56. N7700 raw storage capacity Disk enclosure Within a single N series storage expansion unit, all disk dries must be of a particular type (rotational speed/capacity). Although the original order for storage expansion units may contain storage expansion units with no more than two different types (rotational speed/capacity) of disk dries, later upgrades to add additional storage expansion units do not hae to meet this requirement. The maximum raw storage capacity of the N7700 system is determined only by the number of disk dries supported. Table 56 describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for the N7700. Disk drie capacity Maximum storage enclosures Maximum disk dries EXN GB SATA disk dries TB EXN GB SATA disk dries TB EXN GB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk In systems running TB dries Data ONTAP 7.3.x In systems running Data ONTAP 8.0.x TB EXN3000 EXN GB SSD dries GB SSD dries 2 *Requires Data ONTAP or higher *Requires Data ONTAP or higher TB TB Maximum physical capacity 1 EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN TB NL SAS disk dries *Requires Data ONTAP or higher TB EXN GB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk In systems running TB dries Data ONTAP 7.3.x In systems running Data ONTAP 8.0.x TB 88 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

125 Table 56. N7700 raw storage capacity (continued) Disk enclosure EXN3000 EXN3000 EXN3500 EXN3500 EXN TB SATA disk dries 4 TB SED NL SAS disk dries 200 GB SSD dries GB SSD dries GB SSD dries 2 Disk drie capacity *Requires Data ONTAP or higher *Requires Data ONTAP 8.2.x or higher *Requires Data ONTAP or higher *Requires Data ONTAP 8.2 or higher *Requires Data ONTAP or higher EXN TB SSD dries 2 *Requires Data ONTAP 8.2 or higher Maximum storage enclosures Maximum disk dries TB TB TB TB TB TB Maximum physical capacity 1 EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN TB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB Fibre Channel disk dries TB EXN GB Fibre Channel disk dries TB EXN GB Fibre Channel disk dries TB EXN GB Fibre Channel disk dries TB 1 The maximum raw storage capacity of the N7700 is determined by the maximum number of disk dries supported (840) and a maximum physical storage limit of 840 TB in systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.x or 2520 TB in systems running Data ONTAP or higher. Both limits must be honored. 2 Storage systems using solid state disk (SSD) dries require at least one stack of rotating disk dries in addition to the SSD stack. For the disk shelf supporting SSD dries to function properly, a minimum of four SSD dries must be installed in the disk shelf. EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units and EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units must not share Fibre Channel loops. A maximum of six storage expansion units (EXN1000, or EXN4000) is supported on a single Fibre Channel loop. An SAS stack can contain a maximum of ten EXN3000 or EXN3500 storage expansion units. The maximum number of supported SAS stacks and total EXN3000 or EXN3500 storage expansion units depends upon the storage controller configuration. EXN3000s and EXN3500s are supported within the same system configuration, but they cannot be connected in the same SAS stack. A single SAS stack must contain only EXN3000s or EXN3500s. Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is supported for the N7700 filer. Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is designed to improe reliability, aailability and sericeability of the storage expansion units attached to the storage controller by creating two Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 89

126 redundant paths from each storage controller to each loop of the storage expansion units. For more information about using dual-path Fibre Channel cabling, see the Installation and Setup Instructions that came with your system. Connecting an N7700 gateway to external storage You must use fiber optic cables to connect a gateway to external storage on a Fibre Channel SAN. See the Interoperability Matrix at the following web page for supported deices for your N7000 series gateway system. Refer to the documentation for your external storage for additional information. N7700 filer feature codes The following table lists the feature codes for N7700 cables and connectors. For a list of the HBA feature codes supported for the N7700, see Appendix I, Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems, on page 265. Table 57. N7700 filer feature codes Description Machine Model Feature 2m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2866 A20, A m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2866 A20, A m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2866 A20, A Copper-fiber conerter 2866 A20, A Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC 2866 A10, A11, A20, 1044 A21 30m 50-micron MMF cable 2866 A20, A (LC/SC) 1 4-Gbps extended longwae SFP 2866 A20, A m 50-micron Fibre Channel cable (LC/LC) 2866 A10, A11, A20, A m FCoE SFP+ copper cable A10, A11, A20, 1053 A21 3m FCoE SFP+ copper cable A10, A11, A20, 1054 A21 5m FCoE SFP+ copper cable A10, A11, A20, 1055 A21 Dual-port 10-Gbps Ethernet PCIe 2866 A10, A11, A20, 1065 NIC adapter 4 A21 FCoE SFP+ actie copper cable, A10, A11, A20, 1071 m 3 A21 FCoE SFP+ actie copper cable, A10, A11, A20, 1072 m 3 A21 FCoE SFP+ actie copper cable, A10, A11, A20, 1073 m 3 A21 10-Gbps Ethernet SFP A10, A11, A20, 2012 A21 Data ONTAP 8.2+ Indicator 2866 A11, A IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

127 1 For use with Feature code 1008 or Feature code 2012 is for use only with feature code 1065 (Dual-port 10-Gbps Ethernet PCIe NIC adapter). 3 For use with FCoE adapters wheneer copper cables are required. Table 58. N7700 Clustered Data ONTAP feature codes Description Machine Model Feature Clustered Data 2866 A ONTAP base license Cluster machine 2866 A identifier 16-port cluster 2866 A interconnect switch TwinAx cable, 0.5m, for CN1610 (16-port cluster interconnect switch) 2866 A TwinAx cable, 2m, for CN1610 (16-port cluster interconnect switch) TwinAx cable, 5m, for CN1610 (16-port cluster interconnect switch) 2866 A A GbE SFP A Embedded NIC 5 Note: 4 Feature code 1065 must be assigned if you hae installed Clustered Data ONTAP. Note: 5 Feature code 2013 is used in the cluster interconnect switch with optical cables if TwinAx cables are not used. Table 59. N7700 filer installation feature codes Description Machine Model Feature Plant install in 2101 rack 2866 A10, A11, A20, 9201 A21 Field install rack mount kit 2866 A10, A11, A20, A N7900 filer hardware features The power cord features for the N7700 filer are listed in Appendix B, Power cord list for N series storage systems, on page 215. The N7900 filer storage controllers consist of the Model A11 and Model A21 and associated software with gateway options. Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 91

128 The IBM System Storage N7900 storage controllers are designed to interoperate with products capable of data transmission in the industry-standard iscsi, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These include the IBM eserer System p, System i (NFS only), System x, and System z (NFS only) serers. See the Interoperability Matrix at the following web page for supported deices for your N7000 series filer system. Mixed disk/lun support is aailable on N series gateway systems. This support requires Data ONTAP 7.3 or higher and enables the use of both third-party disks and N series storage expansion units on N series gateways. This support also enables SnapLock Compliance, LockVault Compliance, and Disk Sanitization on gateways when used with IBM N series storage only. These features are not supported on third-party storage deices. For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel, Fibre Channel oer Ethernet, and iscsi, refer to the IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iscsi Configuration Guide for your ersion of Data ONTAP. N7900 A11 The N7900 Model A11 is designed to proide a single-node storage controller with iscsi support, and NFS, CIFS, and FCP support ia optional features. The N7900 Model A11 is a 6U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The N7900 storage controller does not include storage in the base chassis. The base chassis includes: Four AMD 2.6 GHz Opteron bit dual-core processors, each with 1 MB of leel 2 cache 32 GB of DDR-333 memory 2 GB of non-olatile random access memory (NVRAM) Six integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports Eight integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports Dual redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies and cooling fans Three PCI-X expansion slots Six PCIe expansion slots (Fie PCIe slots are aailable for customer use. One PCIe slot is resered for the NVRAM6 adapter.) One serial console port For the N7900 Model A11, the maximum number of additional expansion adapters is eight (three PCI-X and fie PCIe). One PCIe expansion slot is used for the standard (included with the N7900) 2 GB NVRAM adapter card. Note: The PCIe and PCI-X adapters supported by the N7700 and N7900 storage systems are described in Appendix I, Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems, on page 265. The N7900 Model A11 can be upgraded to a maximum of 14 multi-path (loop A and loop B) Fibre Channel loops (28 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports) ia the addition of four optional Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment (feature numbers 1014, 1029, or 1035). The 14 loops will support a maximum of 1176 total disk dries (or LUNs, with the gateway option). The Model A11 can be upgraded to a maximum 92 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

129 of 14 Gigabit Ethernet ports ia the addition of two optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface cards (NICs) (feature number 1009). The Model A11 may be upgraded to a Model A21. The upgrade from a Model A11 to a Model A21 is a disruptie upgrade. N7900 A21 The N7900 Model A21 is designed to proide identical function as the N7900 Model A11, but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failoer (CFO) licensed function. The N7900 Model A21 also supports a maximum of 1176 dries (or LUNs, with the gateway option) and 14 backend Fibre Channel loops. The Model A21 consists of two nodes that are designed to proide failoer and failback function, helping improe oerall aailability. For the Model A21, each node is a 6U rack-mountable storage controller. Therefore, the Model A21 occupies a total of 12U of rack space. The N7900 Model A21 includes: Eight AMD 2.6 GHz Opteron bit dual-core processors, each with 1 MB of leel 2 cache 64 GB of DDR-333 memory 4 GB of non-olatile random access memory (NVRAM) 12 integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports 16 integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports Dual redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies and cooling fans Six PCI-X expansion slots 12 PCIe expansion slots (Ten PCIe slots are aailable for customer use. Two PCIe slots are resered for NVRAM6 adapters.) Two serial console ports For the N7900 Model A21, the maximum number of additional expansion adapters is 16 (six PCI-X and 10 PCIe). Two PCIe expansion slots are used for the standard (included with the N7900) 2 GB NVRAM adapter cards. Note: The PCIe and PCI-X adapters supported by the N7700 and N7900 storage systems are described in Appendix I, Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems, on page 265. The N7900 Model A21 can be upgraded to a maximum of 14 dual-path (loop A and loop B) Fibre Channel loops (28 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports) ia the addition of four optional Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment (feature numbers 1014, 1029, or 1035). The Model A21 can be upgraded to a maximum of 20 Gigabit Ethernet ports ia the addition of four optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number 1009). The physical proximity of the two processing nodes within a Model A21 (with respect to each other) is determined by which Infiniband cluster interconnect cables are ordered (feature numbers 1037, 1040 and 1041). Optical cables (feature numbers 1040 and 1041) also require feature number Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 93

130 Connecting storage expansion units to the N7900 filer Both N7900 filer models require the addition of at least one N series storage expansion unit. Table 60. N7900 raw storage capacity Within a single N series storage expansion unit, all disk dries must be of a particular type (rotational speed/capacity). Although the original order for storage expansion units may contain storage expansion units with no more than two different types (rotational speed/capacity) of disk dries, later upgrades to add additional storage expansion units do not hae to meet this requirement. The maximum raw storage capacity of the N7900 system is determined only by the number of disk dries supported. Table 60 describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for the N7900. Maximum Disk enclosure Disk drie capacity storage enclosures Maximum disk dries EXN GB SATA disk dries TB EXN GB SATA disk dries TB EXN GB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB EXN3000 EXN TB SATA disk dries 100 GB SSD dries GB SSD dries 2 In systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.x In systems running Data ONTAP 8.0.x *Requires Data ONTAP or higher *Requires Data ONTAP or higher TB TB TB Maximum physical capacity EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN TB NL SAS disk dries *Requires Data ONTAP or higher TB EXN GB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk In systems running TB dries Data ONTAP 7.3.x In systems running Data ONTAP 8.0.x TB EXN TB SATA disk dries *Requires Data ONTAP or higher TB 94 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

131 Table 60. N7900 raw storage capacity (continued) Disk enclosure EXN3000 EXN3500 EXN3500 EXN3500 EXN TB SED NL SAS disk dries 200 GB solid state dries GB solid state dries GB solid state dries TB solid state dries 2 Disk drie capacity *Requires Data ONTAP 8.2.x or higher *Requires Data ONTAP or higher *Requires Data ONTAP 8.2 or higher *Requires Data ONTAP or higher *Requires Data ONTAP 8.2 or higher Maximum storage enclosures Maximum disk dries TB TB TB TB TB Maximum physical capacity EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN TB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB Fibre Channel disk dries TB EXN GB Fibre Channel disk dries TB EXN GB Fibre Channel disk dries TB EXN GB Fibre Channel disk dries TB 1 The maximum raw storage capacity of the N7900 is determined by the maximum number of disk dries supported (1176) and a maximum physical storage limit of 1176 TB in systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.x or 3528 TB in systems running Data ONTAP or higher. Both limits must be honored. 2 Storage systems using Solid-state disk (SSD) dries require at least one stack of rotating disk dries in addition to the SSD stack. For the disk shelf supporting SSD dries to function properly, a minimum of four SSD dries must be installed in the disk shelf. EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units and EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units must not share Fibre Channel loops. A maximum of six storage expansion units (EXN1000, or EXN4000) are supported on a single Fibre Channel loop. A SAS stack can contain a maximum of ten EXN3000 or EXN3500 storage expansion units. The maximum number of supported SAS stacks and total EXN3000 or EXN3500 storage expansion units depends upon the storage controller configuration. EXN3000s and EXN3500s are supported within the same system configuration, but they cannot be connected in the same SAS stack. A single SAS stack must contain only EXN3000s or EXN3500s. Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is supported for the N7900 filer. Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is designed to improe reliability, aailability and sericeability of the storage expansion units attached to the storage controller by creating two redundant paths from each storage controller to each loop of the storage expansion Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 95

132 units. For more information about using dual-path Fibre Channel cabling, see the Installation and Setup Instructions that came with your system. Connecting an N7900 gateway to external storage You must use fiber optic cables to connect a gateway to external storage on a Fibre Channel SAN. See the Interoperability Matrix at the following web page for supported deices for your N7000 series gateway system. Refer to the documentation for your external storage for additional information. N7900 filer feature codes The following table lists the feature codes for N7900 cables and connectors. For a list of the HBA feature codes supported for the N7900, see Appendix I, Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems, on page 265. Table 61. N7900 filer feature codes Description Machine Model Feature 2m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2867 A20, A m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2867 A20, A m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2867 A20, A Copper-Fiber Conerter 2867 A20, A Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC 2867 A10, A11, A20, 1044 A21 30m 50-micron MMF cable 2867 A20, A (LC/SC) 1 4-Gbps extended longwae SFP 2867 A20, A m 50-micron Fibre Channel cable (LC/LC) 2867 A10, A11, A20, A21 1m FCoE SFP+ copper cable 2867 A10, A11, A20, A21 3m FCoE SFP+ copper cable 2867 A10, A11, A20, A21 5m FCoE SFP+ copper cable 2867 A10, A11, A20, A21 Dual-port 10-Gbps Ethernet PCIe 2867 A10, A11, A20, NIC adapter 4 A21 FCoE SFP+ actie copper cable, 1 m FCoE SFP+ actie copper cable, 3 m FCoE SFP+ actie copper cable, 5 m 2867 A10, A11, A20, A A10, A11, A20, A A10, A11, A20, A Gbps Ethernet SFP A10, A11, A20, 2012 A21 Data ONTAP 8.2+ Indicator 2867 A11, A IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

133 1 For use with feature codes 1008 or Feature code 2012 is for use only with feature code 1065 (Dual-port 10-Gbps Ethernet PCIe NIC adapter). 3 For use with FCoE adapters wheneer copper cables are required. Table 62. N7900 Clustered Data ONTAP feature codes Description Machine Model Feature Clustered Data 2867 A ONTAP base license Cluster machine 2867 A identifier 16-port cluster 2867 A interconnect switch TwinAx cable, 0.5m, for CN1610 (16-port cluster interconnect switch) 2867 A TwinAx cable, 2m, for CN1610 (16-port cluster interconnect switch) TwinAx cable, 5m, for CN1610 (16-port cluster interconnect switch) 2867 A A GbE SFP A Embedded NIC 5 Note: 4 Feature code 1065 must be assigned if you hae installed Clustered Data ONTAP. Note: 5 Feature code 2013 is used in the cluster interconnect switch with optical cables if TwinAx cables are not used. Table 63. N7900 filer installation feature codes Description Machine Model Feature Plant install in 2101 rack 2867 A10, A11, A20, 9201 A21 Field install rack mount kit 2867 A10, A11, A20, A N7550T hardware features The power cord features for the N7900 are listed in Appendix B, Power cord list for N series storage systems, on page 215. The IBM System Storage N7550T (2867 Model C20) system is an actie/actie dual-node base unit. It is designed to proide fast data access, simultaneous multiprotocol support, expandability, upgradability, and low maintenance requirements. Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 97

134 N7550T can be configured as a gateway. It proides: High data aailability and system-leel redundancy designed to address the needs of business-critical and mission-critical applications Single, integrated architecture designed to support concurrent block I/O and file sering oer Ethernet and FC SAN infrastructures High throughput and fast response times for database, , and technical applications Enterprise customer support for unified access requirements for Network Attached Storage (NAS) ia FC or Internet Small Computer System Interface (iscsi) FC, Serial Attached SCSI (SAS), and Serial Adanced Technology Attachment (SATA) attachment options for disk expansion units designed to allow deployment in multiple enironments, including data retention, NearStore, disk-to-disk backup scenarios, and high-performance, mission-critical I/O intensie operations N7550T supports the EXN1000 SATA storage expansion unit, the EXN4000 FC storage expansion units, the EXN3000 SAS/SATA expansion unit, the EXN3200 SATA expansion unit, and the EXN3500 SAS expansion unit. At least one storage expansion unit must be attached to the N series system. The IBM System Storage N7550T storage controllers are designed to interoperate with products capable of data transmission in the industry-standard iscsi, CIFS, FCP, FCoE, andnfs protocols. Supported systems include the IBM eserer System p, System i (NFS only), System x, and System z (NFS only) serers. The N7550T system consists of the Model C20 and associated software. The N7550T can be configured, ia optional features, to be either a storage controller or gateway. It includes Clustered Failoer (CFO) support (ia required feature), designed to proide failoer and failback function, helping improe oerall aailability. The N7550T must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The N7550T does not include storage in the base chassis. See the Interoperability Matrix at the following web page for supported deices for your N series system. For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel, Fibre Channel oer Ethernet, and iscsi, refer to the IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iscsi Configuration Guide for your ersion of Data ONTAP. N7550T model C20 IBM N series currently offers the N7550T Model C20. The C20 model contains an I/O expansion module that proides additional PCIe slots. N7550T chassis is 6U in height and must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The N7550T storage controllers do not include storage in the base chassis. Note: The C20 can be configured as a gateway. If it is to be used as a gateway, all Licensed Function Indicator features must be those with the suffix, GW (for example, SnapRestore - GW). 98 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

135 Table 64. N7550T physical attributes Attribute C20 Number of controllers 2 Rack space required 6U Quad core 2.3 GHz CPU 4 Random access memory (GB) 96 1-Gb Ethernet ports 4 8-Gb Fibre Channel ports 8 10-Gb Ethernet ports 8 6-Gb SAS ports (FC 1079) Gb Fiber ports (FC 1080) 8 1 FC disk dries supported 1008 SAS disk dries supported 1200 Aailable PCIe expansion slots 8 2 Serial console ports 2 LAN management (RLM) ports 2 Redundant power supplies and cooling fans Yes 1 At least one of FC 1079 or FC 1080 must be ordered with N7550T. FC 1079 or FC 1080 are mutually exclusie. 2 There are six PCIe slots per controller; default one slot is used by FC 1079 or FC 1080, and one slot is used by NVRAM. Four slots are left per controller for the other optional adapters. Optional adapter features can be used to increase the maximums as follows. Note that each platform is limited by the maximum number of adapters that can be installed. Attribute C20 FC loops (dual-path) 12 SAS stacks (dual-path) 5 10-Gb Ethernet ports Gb FCoE ports 16 EXN1000 storage expansion units 72 EXN3000 storage expansion units 20 EXN3200 storage expansion units 10 EXN3500 storage expansion units 20 EXN4000 storage expansion units 72 Connecting storage expansion units to the N7550T N7550T may be ordered without an accompanying expansion unit, but it requires at least one storage expansion unit to be operational. EXN1000, EXN3000, EXN3200, EXN3500, or EXN4000 satisfy this requirement. Partially populated expansions are supported with a minimum of six disks for the system (four disks for solid state disks). Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 99

136 The EXN1000 storage expansion unit proides a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing fie, and up to a maximum of 14, serial adanced technology attachment (SATA) disk dries, either in 500 GB, 750 GB, 1 TB, or 2 TB physical capacities. The EXN4000 storage expansion units proide a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing fie, and up to a maximum of 14, FC disk dries. The EXN4000 supports FC disk dries of capacity 300 GB (10,000 rpm or 15,000 rpm), 450 GB (15,000 rpm), and 600 GB (15,000 rpm). The EXN3000 storage expansion unit is a 4U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing 4, up to a maximum of 24 SAS or SATA disk dries. The EXN3000 supports the following dries: SAS: 300 GB, 450 GB, 600 GB, and 4 TB physical capacities SATA: 500 GB, 1 TB, 2 TB, and 3 TB physical capacities Solid state disk (SSD): 100 GB and 200 GB (up to 96 SSDs per system) Note: A maximum of four EXN3000s with SSDs may be attached to any N supported series system. The EXN3000s with SSDs may not be in the same SAS stack as non-ssd storage. SED SAS: 3 TB and 4 TB physical capacities The EXN3200 storage expansion unit is a 4U, high-density SATA enclosure for attachment to PCIe-based N series systems with SAS ports that can hold up to 48 disk dries per unit. The EXN3200 supports 3 TB and 4 TB SATA disk dries. The EXN3500 storage expansion unit is a 2U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing a maximum of 24, 2.5 inch, small form factor (SFF) SAS disk dries. The supported disk dries are: SAS: 450 GB, 600 GB, 900 GB, and 1.2 TB physical capacities Solid state disk (SSD): 200 GB, 400 GB, 800 GB, and 1.6 TB physical capacities For the initial order of an IBM System Storage N series, you may not include EXN storage expansion units containing more than two types (rotational speed and capacity) of disk dries. The maximum raw storage capacity of the N7550T systems is determined by the number of disk dries supported. The N7550T model supports up to 1200 hard drie spindles. The following table describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for the N7550T Model C20: Table 65. N7550T raw storage capacity Disk enclosure Disk drie capacity Maximum storage enclosures Maximum disk dries Maximum physical capacity EXN GB SATA disk dries TB EXN GB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries TB EXN GB solid state dries TB 100 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

137 Table 65. N7550T raw storage capacity (continued) Disk enclosure Disk drie capacity Maximum storage enclosures Maximum disk dries EXN GB solid state dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN TB 4 TB NL SAS dries *Requires Data ONTAP or higher Maximum physical capacity EXN GB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SED NL SAS dries *Requires Data ONTAP 8.2.x or higher TB EXN TB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries TB EXN GB solid state dries 1 *Requires Data ONTAP or higher TB EXN3500 EXN3500 EXN TB solid state dries GB solid state dries TBsolid state dries 1 *Requires Data ONTAP 8.2 or higher *Requires Data ONTAP or higher *Requires Data ONTAP 8.2 or higher TB TB TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN TB SAS dries TB EXN GB FC disk dries TB EXN GB FC disk dries TB EXN GB FC disk dries TB 1 Storage systems using solid state disk (SSD) dries require at least one stack of rotating disk dries in addition to the SSD stack. For the disk shelf supporting SSD dries to function properly, a minimum of four SSD dries must be installed in the disk shelf. Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 101

138 EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units must not share an FC loop with EXN4000 FC storage expansion units. A maximum of six storage expansion units are supported on a single FC loop. A maximum of ten storage expansion units are supported on a single SAS stack. Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is supported for the N7550T. Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is designed to improe reliability, aailability and sericeability of the storage expansion units attached to the storage controller by creating two redundant paths from each storage controller to each loop of the storage expansion units. For more information about using dual-path Fibre Channel cabling, see the Installation and Setup Instructions that came with your system. N7550T feature codes The following table lists the feature codes for N7550T cables and connectors. For a list of the HBA feature codes supported for the N7550T, see Appendix J, Optional adapter cards supported by N7x50T series systems, on page 279. Table 66. N7550T feature codes Feature Code Description Machine Model Feature Code Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC 2867 C m 50-micron Fibre Channel 2867 C cable (LC/LC) 5m FCoE SFP+ copper cable C Dual-port, 10GbE NIC, SFP C SFP+ Optical module for FC 2867 C Data ONTAP 8.2+ Indicator 2867 C For use with FCoE adapters wheneer copper cables are required. Table 67. N7550T Clustered Data ONTAP feature codes Description Machine Model Feature Clustered Data 2867 C ONTAP base license Cluster machine 2867 C identifier 16-port cluster 2867 C interconnect switch TwinAx cable, 0.5m, for CN1610 (16-port cluster interconnect switch) 2867 C TwinAx cable, 2m, for CN1610 (16-port cluster interconnect switch) TwinAx cable, 5m, for CN1610 (16-port cluster interconnect switch) 2867 C C IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

139 Table 67. N7550T Clustered Data ONTAP feature codes (continued) Description Machine Model Feature 10-Gbps Ethernet SFP C Note: 2 Feature code 2013 is used in the cluster interconnect switch with optical cables if TwinAx cables are not used. Table 68. N7550T filer installation feature codes Description Machine Model Feature Plant install in 2101-N42 rack 2867 C Field install rack mount kit 2867 C N7950T hardware features The power cord features for the N7550T are listed in Appendix B, Power cord list for N series storage systems, on page 215. The IBM System Storage N7950T (2867 Model E22) system is an actie/actie dual-node base unit consisting of two cable-coupled chassis with one controller and one I/O expansion module per node. It is designed to proide fast data access, simultaneous multiprotocol support, expandability, upgradability, and low maintenance requirements. The N7950T can be configured as a gateway. It proides: High data aailability and system-leel redundancy designed to address the needs of business-critical and mission-critical applications Single, integrated architecture designed to support concurrent block I/O and file sering oer Ethernet and FC SAN infrastructures High throughput and fast response times for database, , and technical applications Enterprise customer support for unified access requirements for Network Attached Storage (NAS) ia FC or Internet Small Computer System Interface (iscsi) FC, Serial Attached SCSI (SAS), and Serial Adanced Technology Attachment (SATA) attachment options for disk expansion units designed to allow deployment in multiple enironments, including data retention, NearStore, disk-to-disk backup scenarios, and high-performance, mission-critical I/O intensie operations The N7950T supports the EXN1000 SATA storage expansion unit, the EXN4000 FC storage expansion units, the EXN3000 SAS/SATA expansion unit, the EXN3200 SATA expansion unit, and the EXN3500 SAS expansion unit. At least one storage expansion unit must be attached to the N series system The IBM System Storage N7950T storage controllers are designed to interoperate with products capable of data transmission in the industry-standard iscsi, CIFS, FCP, FCoE, andnfs protocols. Supported systems include the IBM eserer System p, System i (NFS only), System x, and System z (NFS only) serers. The N7950T system consists of the Model E22 and associated software. The N7950T can be configured, ia optional features, to be either a storage controller or Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 103

140 gateway. It includes Clustered Failoer (CFO) support (ia required feature), designed to proide failoer and failback function, helping improe oerall aailability. The N7950T must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The N7950T does not include storage in the base chassis. See the Interoperability Matrix at the following web page for supported deices for your N series system. For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel, Fibre Channel oer Ethernet, and iscsi, refer to the IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iscsi Configuration Guide for your ersion of Data ONTAP. N7950T model E22 IBM N series currently offers the N7950T Model E22. The E22 model contains an I/O expansion module that proides additional PCIe slots. Each chassis is 6U (a total of 12U for N7950T Model E22), and must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The N7950T storage controllers do not include storage in the base chassis. Note: The E22 can be configured as a gateway. If it is to be used as a gateway, all Licensed Function Indicator features must be those with the suffix, GW (for example, SnapRestore - GW). The N7950T features: High data aailability and system-leel redundancy designed to address the needs of business-critical and mission-critical applications Single, integrated architecture designed to support concurrent block I/O and file sering oer Ethernet and FC SAN infrastructures High throughput and fast response times for database, , and technical applications Enterprise customer support for unified access requirements for Network Attached Storage (NAS) ia FC or Internet Small Computer System Interface (iscsi) FC, Serial Attached SCSI (SAS), and Serial Adanced Technology Attachment (SATA) attachment options for disk expansion units designed to allow deployment in multiple enironments, including data retention, NearStore, disk-to-disk backup scenarios, and high-performance, mission-critical I/O intensie operations The N7950T supports the EXN1000 SATA storage expansion unit, the EXN4000 FC storage expansion units, the EXN3000 SAS/SATA expansion unit, the EXN3200 SATA expansion unit, and the EXN3500 SAS expansion unit. At least one storage expansion unit must be attached to the N series system. Table 69. N7950T physical attributes Attribute E22 Number of controllers 2 Rack space required 12U Six core 2.93 GHz CPU 2 per node Random access memory (GB) 96 per node 104 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

141 Table 69. N7950T physical attributes (continued) Attribute E22 8-Gb Fibre Channel ports 4 per node FC disk dries supported 1176 SAS disk dries supported Gb Ethernet ports 4 per node Aailable PCIe expansion slots 12 per node Serial console ports 2 LAN management (RLM) ports 2 Redundant power supplies and cooling fans Yes Optional adapter features can be used to increase the maximums as follows. Note that each platform is limited by the maximum number of adapters that can be installed. Attribute E22 FC loops 14 FC loops (dual-path) 14 SAS stacks (dual-path) 6 Ethernet ports Gb FCoE ports 24 EXN1000 storage expansion units 84 EXN3000 storage expansion units 60 EXN3200 storage expansion units 30 EXN3500 storage expansion units 60 EXN4000 storage expansion units 84 Connecting storage expansion units to the N7950T The N7950T may be ordered without an accompanying expansion unit, but it requires at least one storage expansion unit to be operational. The EXN1000, EXN3000, EXN3200, EXN3500, or EXN4000 satisfy this requirement. The EXN1000 storage expansion unit proides a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing fie, and up to a maximum of 14, serial adanced technology attachment (SATA) disk dries, either in 500 GB, 750 GB, 1 TB, or 2 TB physical capacities. The EXN4000 storage expansion units proide a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing fie, and up to a maximum of 14, FC disk dries. The EXN4000 supports FC disk dries of 300 GB physical capacity (10,000 rpm or 15,000 rpm), 450 GB physical capacity (15,000 rpm), and 600 GB physical capacity (15,000 rpm). The EXN3000 storage expansion unit is a 4U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing 4, up to a maximum of 24 SAS or SATA disk dries. The EXN3000 supports the following dries: SAS: 300 GB, 450 GB, 600 GB, and 4 TB physical capacities SATA: 500 GB, 1 TB, 2 TB, and 3 TB physical capacities Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 105

142 Solid State Disk (SSD): 100 GB and 200 GB (up to 96 SSDs per system) Note: A maximum of four EXN3000s with SSDs may be attached to any N supported series system. The EXN3000s with SSDs may not be in the same SAS stack as non-ssd storage. SED SAS: 3 TB and 4 TB physical capacities The EXN3200 storage expansion unit is a 4U, high-density SATA enclosure for attachment to PCIe-based N series systems with SAS ports that can hold up to 48 disk dries per unit. The EXN3200 supports 3 TB and 4 TB SATA disk dries. The EXN3500 storage expansion unit is a 2U rack-mountable disk enclosure containing a maximum of 24, 2.5 inch, small form factor (SFF) SAS disk dries. The supported disk dries are: SAS: 450 GB, 600 GB, 900 GB, and 1.2 TB physical capacities Solid state disk (SSD): 200 GB, 400 GB, 800 GB, and 1.6 TB physical capacities For the initial order of an IBM System Storage N series, you may not include EXN storage expansion units containing more than two types (rotational speed and capacity) of disk dries. The maximum raw storage capacity of the N7950T systems is determined by the number of disk dries supported. The N7950T model supports up to 1176 FC-attachment (EXN1000/4000) hard drie spindles and 1440 SAS-attachment (EXN3x00) hard drie spindles. The following table describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for the N7950T Model E22 Table 70. N7950T raw storage capacity Maximum physical capacity Disk enclosure Disk drie capacity Maximum storage enclosures Maximum disk dries EXN GB SATA disk dries TB EXN GB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries TB EXN GB solid state dries TB EXN GB solid state dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN TB 4 TB NL SAS dries *Requires Data ONTAP or higher EXN GB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries TB 106 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

143 Table 70. N7950T raw storage capacity (continued) Disk enclosure EXN3000 Disk drie capacity 4 TB SED NL SAS dries *Requires Data ONTAP 8.2.x or higher Maximum storage enclosures Maximum disk dries Maximum physical capacity TB EXN TB SATA disk dries TB EXN TB SATA disk dries TB EXN GB solid state dries 1 *Requires Data ONTAP or higher TB EXN3500 EXN3500 EXN GB solid state dries GB solid state dries TB solid state dries 1 *Requires Data ONTAP 8.2 or higher *Requires Data ONTAP or higher *Requires Data ONTAP 8.2 or higher TB TB TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB SAS disk dries TB EXN TB SAS disk dries TB EXN GB FC disk dries TB EXN GB FC disk dries TB EXN GB FC disk dries TB 1 Storage systems using Solid-state disk (SSD) dries require at least one stack of rotating disk dries in addition to the SSD stack. For the disk shelf supporting SSD dries to function properly, a minimum of four SSD dries must be installed in the disk shelf. EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units must not share an FC loop with EXN4000 FC storage expansion units. A maximum of six storage expansion units are supported on a single FC loop. A maximum of ten storage expansion units are supported on a single SAS stack. Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is supported for the N7950T. Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is designed to improe reliability, aailability and sericeability of the storage expansion units attached to the storage controller by creating two redundant paths from each storage controller to each loop of the storage expansion units. For more information about using dual-path Fibre Channel cabling, see the Installation and Setup Instructions that came with your system. Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 107

144 N7950T feature codes The following table lists the feature codes for N7950T cables and connectors. For a list of the HBA feature codes supported for the N7950T, see Appendix J, Optional adapter cards supported by N7x50T series systems, on page 279. Table 71. N7950T feature codes Feature Code Description Machine Model Feature Code Cluster 4X IB Fi Cable 5M 2867 E Cluster 4X IB Fi Cable 30M 2867 E Cu-Fi Conerter - 4X IB Cable 2867 E Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC 2867 E m 50-micron Fibre Channel 2867 E cable (LC/LC) 5m FCoE SFP+ copper cable E SFP+ Optical module for FC 2867 E m QSFP-QSFP Cable 2867 E m QSFP-QSFP Cable 2867 E m QSFP-QSFP Cable 2867 E Data ONTAP 8.2+ Indicator 2867 E For use with FCoE adapters wheneer copper cables are required. Table 72. N7950T Clustered Data ONTAP feature codes Description Machine Model Feature Clustered Data 2867 E ONTAP base license Cluster machine 2867 E identifier 16-port cluster 2867 E interconnect switch TwinAx cable, 0.5m, for CN1610 (16-port cluster interconnect switch) 2867 E TwinAx cable, 2m, for CN1610 (16-port cluster interconnect switch) TwinAx cable, 5m, for CN1610 (16-port cluster interconnect switch) 2867 E E Gbps Ethernet 2867 E SFP+ 2 Note: 2 Feature code 2013 is used in the cluster interconnect switch with optical cables if TwinAx cables are not used. 108 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

145 The power cord features for the N7950T are listed in Appendix B, Power cord list for N series storage systems, on page 215. Clustered Data ONTAP hardware features Clustered ONTAP is a scale-out solution that allows customers to gradually increase the performance and capacity of a single name space enironment (horizontal scaling) to meet the needs of their organization. This proides a more flexible enironment and enables customers to presere their inestment beyond simple capacity scaling (ertical scaling). Note: For Clustered Data ONTAP configurations, Data ONTAP 8.2 is required and your controller must hae 10 GbE connectiity for cluster communication. The following features proide the option of building Clustered ONTAP configurations with all supported machines: Clustered Data ONTAP Base License: This feature sets the base cluster license for a Clustered Data ONTAP configuration. This is the primary feature of Clustered Data ONTAP architecture. Only one machine in the cluster requires this feature because it generates the main cluster serial number and configuration to which all other nodes are added. Eery system in the cluster should hae the cluster machine identifier. Cluster Machine Identifier: This feature identifies the machine being ordered as a member of a Clustered Data ONTAP cluster. It allows the system to be built using the Clustered Data ONTAP licenses and clustered ersion of Data ONTAP. Set this identifier to 1 if the machine is part of a Clustered Data ONTAP cluster. Set it to 0 if the machine is to operate in 7-Mode. CN1610 Cluster Interconnect Switch: This switch is used for cluster communications in Clustered Data ONTAP implementations. These switches are always used in pairs on the cluster configuration. Only two are required per cluster. This switch supports clusters with up to twele nodes. For detailed information about Clustered Data ONTAP, see Clustered Data ONTAP 8.2 library on page 300. For detailed information about Clustered Data ONTAP switches, see Clustered Data ONTAP Switch library on page 302. EXN1000 storage expansion unit hardware features The IBM System Storage EXN1000 SATA storage expansion unit is a SATA disk storage deice for IBM System Storage N series systems. The EXN1000 3U disk storage expansion unit may be mounted in any industry-standard 19-inch rack. The EXN1000 contains: Dual redundant hot-pluggable integrated power supplies and cooling fans Dual redundant disk storage expansion unit switched controllers Fourteen hard disk drie bays. The EXN1000 SATA storage expansion unit is shipped with a minimum of fie SATA disk dries, up to a maximum of 14 disk dries (all of the same capacity), in 250 GB, 320 GB, 500 GB, 750 GB, 1 TB or 2 TB physical capacities. With 250 GB SATA hard disk dries, each EXN1000 proides a maximum of 3.5 TB of physical storage capacity. Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 109

146 With 320 GB SATA hard disk dries, each EXN1000 proides a maximum of 4.48 TB of physical storage capacity. With 500 GB SATA hard disk dries, each EXN1000 proides a maximum of 7 TB of physical storage capacity. With 750 GB SATA hard disk dries, each EXN1000 proides a maximum of 10.5 TB of physical storage capacity. With 1 TB SATA hard disk dries, each EXN1000 proides a maximum of 14 TB of physical storage capacity. With 2 TB SATA hard disk dries, each EXN1000 proides a maximum of 28 TB of physical storage capacity. Note: While the initial order must contain 14 dries, at least fie of the dries must be installed in the EXN1000 enclosure with drie blank coers (feature 4099) coering the remaining drie bays. Attention: 320 GB SATA hard disk dries are not supported for use in EXN1000s when used in N7700 and N7900 filer configurations. EXN1000 feature codes Table 73 lists the feature codes for the EXN1000. Table 73. EXN1000 feature codes Description Machine Model Feature SFP GBIC Fibre Channel NAS to EXP Cable m 1 Fibre Channel Copper Cable 0.5 m Fibre Channel NAS to EXP Cable m m Fibre Channel Optical Cable m Fibre Channel Optical Cable m Fibre Channel Optical Cable GB SATA Drie GB SATA Drie GB SATA Drie GB SATA Drie TB SATA Drie TB SATA Drie HDD Blank Panel GB SATA hard disk dries are not supported for use in EXN1000s when used in N7700 and N7900 filer configurations. The power cord features for the EXN1000 are listed in Appendix B, Power cord list for N series storage systems, on page IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

147 EXN3000 storage expansion unit hardware features The IBM System Storage EXN3000 SAS/SATA expansion unit proides low-cost high-capacity Serially Attached SCSI (SAS) or Serial Adanced Technology Attachment (SATA) disk storage for supported IBM N series system storage systems. For connectiity to the EXN3000 expansion disks, an aailable PCI-e I/O slot in the N series controller is needed for the SAS HBA. EXN3000 storage expansion units are aailable with either a 3 Gbps I/O module or a 6 Gbps I/O module. The 3 Gbps I/O module is mandatory for all expansions using SAS disks, and is optional for expansions using SATA disks. The use of 6 Gbps I/O module with SATA disk dries enables mixing SSDs (quantity of 6) with selected SATA disk capacities (quantity of 18) within a single expansion, improing the flexibility of the expansion. This mixed-shelf architecture is used in conjunction with Flash Pool technology included in Data ONTAP 8.1.1, or later. This feature requires Data ONTAP 8.1.1, or later. Note: The EXN3000 SAS/SATA storage expansion unit is aailable for attachment to all N series systems except the N3300 systems. The EXN3000 SAS/SATA storage expansion unit is a 4U disk storage expansion unit. The EXN3000 contains: Redundant hot-pluggable integrated power supplies and cooling fans Note: Depending on the disk drie type, your EXN3000 might hae two or four power supplies. EXN3000s with SAS disk dries hae four power supplies and require the use of four power outlets. EXN3000s with SATA disk dries hae two power supplies and require the use of two power outlets. Dual redundant disk storage expansion unit switched controllers 24 hard disk drie slots Diagnostic and status LEDs The 4U disk expansion design of the EXN3000 houses up to 24 SAS, SATA, or solid state disk (SSD) dries. Disk drie options for the EXN3000 include: 300 GB, 450 GB, 600 GB, and 4 TB SAS dries 500 GB, 1 TB, 2 TB, and 3 TB SATA dries (7200 RPM) 100 GB and 200 GB solid state dries SED SAS: 3 TB and 4 TB physical capacities SAS and SATA dries cannot be intermixed; the EXN3000 is either a SAS storage controller or a SATA storage controller. The dries must be ordered as features of the EXN3000. Solid state dries (SSDs) require Data ONTAP 8.0.2, or higher, be installed on the storage controller. The EXN3000s with SSDs may not be in the same SAS stack as non-ssd storage. For detailed information about the important differences between EXN3000 and EXN1000/2000/4000 storage expansion units, see the IBM System Storage EXN3000 Storage Expansion Unit Hardware and Serice Guide. Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 111

148 FC/SAS bridge (FC 2100) for stretch or fabric-attached MetroCluster systems Note: The guides referenced here and in "Supporting FC/SAS bridge configurations" below, as well as other N series documentation, are aailable on the IBM N series support website, which is accessed and naigated as described in Websites on page xxx. See this guide and ATTO FibreBridge 6500N Installation and Operations Manual for information about FC/SAS bridge hardware. Supporting FC/SAS bridge configurations See Configuring a MetroCluster with SAS disk sheles and FibreBridge 6500N Guide for information on installing, hot-adding, conerting HA pairs to fabric-attached MetroClusters, and replacing FC/SAS bridge. EXN3000 feature codes Table 74 lists the feature codes for the EXN3000. Table 74. EXN3000 feature codes Description Machine Model Feature SAS disk power supply m Mini SAS-QSFP cable m Mini SAS-QSFP cable m SAS QSFP-QSFP cable m SAS QSFP-QSFP cable m SAS QSFP-QSFP cable m SAS RJ-45 ACP cable m SAS RJ-45 ACP cable m SAS RJ-45 ACP cable QSFP MPO transceier MM fan-out, LC, 5m MM fan-out, LC, 30m MM fan-out, MTRJ, 5m MM fan-out, MTRJ, 30m SM fan-out, LC, 5m SM fan-out, LC, 30m SM fan-out, MTRJ, 5m SM fan-out, MTRJ, 30m Optical SAS cable, 1m Optical SAS cable, 2m Optical SAS cable, 3m Optical SAS cable, 5m FC/SAS Bridge GB SAS Drie GB SAS Drie IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

149 Table 74. EXN3000 feature codes (continued) Description Machine Model Feature 500 GB SATA Drie TB SATA Drie TB SATA Drie TB SATA Drie TB NL SAS Drie GB Solid State Disk TB SAS Drie (SED) TB SED NL SAS Drie GB SAS Drie (SED) Gbps Interface Gbps Interface For more information about optical SAS cables, see Optical SAS cables for SAS or SATA storage expansion units on page 209. The power cord features for the EXN3000 are listed in Appendix B, Power cord list for N series storage systems, on page 215. EXN3200 storage expansion unit hardware features IBM System Storage EXN3200 Model 306 SATA expansion unit is a 4U, high-density SATA enclosure for attachment to PCIe-based N series systems with SAS ports that can hold up to 48 disk dries per unit. The EXN3200 must be mounted in an industry standard 19-inch rack. It may be attached to N series N6240, N6270, or N7950T systems. The EXN3200 contains: Four redundant, hot-pluggable, integrated power supplies and cooling fans Dual redundant disk expansion unit switched controllers 48 hard disk dries Diagnostic and status LEDs The EXN3200 supports 3 TB and 4 TB SATA disk dries. Note: The EXN3200 must be ordered with a full complement of disks. Disk dries ordered with the EXN3200 are shipped separately from the EXN3200 expansion unit, and must be installed once at the customer's location. EXN3200 feature codes Table 75. EXN3200 feature codes Description Machine Model Feature 0.5 m SAS QSFP-QSFP cable 2.0 m SAS QSFP-QSFP cable Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 113

150 Table 75. EXN3200 feature codes (continued) Description Machine Model Feature 5.0 m SAS QSFP-QSFP cable 0.5 m SAS RJ45 ACP cable 2.0 m SAS RJ45 ACP cable 5.0 m SAS RJ45 ACP cable QSFP MPO transceier MM fan-out, LC, 5m MM fan-out, LC, 30m MM fan-out, MTRJ, m MM fan-out, MTRJ, m SM fan-out, LC, 5m SM fan-out, LC, 30m SM fan-out, MTRJ, m SM fan-out, MTRJ, m Optical SAS cable, m Optical SAS cable, m Optical SAS cable, m Optical SAS cable, m 4 TB Disk Drie - Quantity Table 76. EXN3200 installation feature code Description Machine Model Feature Field install rack mount kit For more information about optical SAS cables, see Optical SAS cables for SAS or SATA storage expansion units on page 209. The power cord features for the EXN3200 are listed in Appendix B, Power cord list for N series storage systems, on page IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

151 EXN3500 storage expansion unit hardware features The IBM System Storage EXN3500 expansion unit is a ersatile, cost-effectie, high-capacity SAS disk storage deice for the IBM System Storage N series products. The EXN3500 offers a highly capable and resilient SAS technology for N series, aailable for attachment to nearly any N series model (except the N3300) utilizing SAS connectiity. The EXN3500 is a 2U disk expansion deice designed to support up to 24 SAS hard disk dries, allowing great flexibility for a wide range of customer enironments. It may be mounted in any industry-standard 19 inch rack. The EXN3500 contains: Dual redundant hot-pluggable integrated power supplies and cooling fans Dual redundant disk storage expansion unit switched controllers 24 hard disk drie slots Diagnostic and status LEDs Disk drie options for the EXN3500 include: 200 GB, 400 GB, 800 GB, and 1.6 TB SSD 450 GB, 600 GB, 900 GB, and 1.2 TB SAS dries. 600 GB and 900 GB SED SAS dries For detailed information about the important differences between the EXN3500 and EXN1000/2000/4000 storage expansion units, see the IBM System Storage N series Uniersal SAS and ACP Cabling Guide. FC/SAS bridge (FC 2100) for stretch or fabric-attached MetroCluster systems Note: The guides referenced here and in "Supporting FC/SAS bridge configurations" below, as well as other N series documentation, are aailable on the IBM N series support website, which is accessed and naigated as described in Websites on page xxx. See this guide and ATTO FibreBridge 6500N Installation and Operations Manual for information about FC/SAS bridge hardware. Supporting FC/SAS bridge configurations See Configuring a MetroCluster with SAS disk sheles and FibreBridge 6500N Guide for information on installing, hot-adding, conerting HA pairs to fabric-attached MetroClusters, and replacing FC/SAS bridge. EXN3500 feature codes Table 77 lists the feature codes for the EXN3500. Table 77. EXN3500 feature codes Description Machine Model Feature 2.0 m Mini SAS-QSFP cable m Mini SAS-QSFP cable m SAS QSFP-QSFP cable m SAS QSFP-QSFP cable Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 115

152 Table 77. EXN3500 feature codes (continued) Description Machine Model Feature 5.0 m SAS QSFP-QSFP cable m SAS RJ-45 ACP cable m SAS RJ-45 ACP cable m SAS RJ-45 ACP cable QSFP MPO transceier MM fan-out, LC, 5m MM fan-out, LC, 30m MM fan-out, MTRJ, 5m MM fan-out, MTRJ, 30m SM fan-out, LC, 5m SM fan-out, LC, 30m SM fan-out, MTRJ, 5m SM fan-out, MTRJ, 30m Optical SAS cable, 1m Optical SAS cable, 2m Optical SAS cable, 3m Optical SAS cable, 5m FC/SAS Bridge GB SAS Drie GB SAS Drie GB SAS Drie TB SAS Drie GB SAS Drie (SED) GB SAS Drie (SED) GB Solid State Disk GB Solid State Disk GB Solid State Disk TB Solid State Disk For more information about optical SAS cables, see Optical SAS cables for SAS or SATA storage expansion units on page 209. The power cord features for the EXN3500 are listed in Appendix B, Power cord list for N series storage systems, on page 215. EXN4000 storage expansion unit hardware features The IBM System Storage EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion unit is a Fibre Channel disk storage deice for the IBM System Storage N series systems. Physical capacity can be scaled up to 8.4 TB for each EXN4000 added to an N series system (assuming the EXN4000 is populated with fourteen 600 GB HDDs). 116 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

153 The EXN4000 is designed to proide 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, and 4-Gbps Fibre Channel disk expansion for the IBM System Storage N series storage controllers. EXN4000s attached to a 2-Gbps loop must be manually configured for 2-Gbps speed. Note: The EXN Gbps support requires that the N series system be running Data ONTAP or higher. The EXN4000 contains: Dual redundant hot-pluggable integrated power supplies and cooling fans Dual redundant disk storage expansion unit switched controllers Fourteen hard disk drie bays The EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion unit is shipped with a minimum of four Fibre Channel disk dries, up to a maximum of 14 disk dries (all of the same capacity). Disk drie options for the EXN4000 include 144 GB (15,000 RPM), 300 GB (10,000 RPM or 15,000 RPM), 450 GB (15,000 RPM), and 600 GB (15,000 RPM). Note: While the initial order must contain 14 dries, at least four of the dries must be installed in the EXN4000 enclosure with drie blank coers (feature 4099) coering the remaining drie bays. EXN4000 feature codes Table 78 lists the feature codes for the EXN4000. Table 78. EXN4000 feature codes Description Machine Model Feature 4-Gbps SFP GBIC Fibre Channel Copper Cable 0.5 m m Fibre Channel Optical Cable m Fibre Channel Optical Cable m Fibre Channel Optical Cable GB, 15K RPM Fibre Channel HDD 300 GB, 10K RPM Fibre Channel HDD 300 GB, 15K RPM Fibre Channel HDD 600 GB, 15K RPM Fibre Channel HDD HDD Blank Panel Rack mount requirements The power cord features for the EXN4000 are listed in Appendix B, Power cord list for N series storage systems, on page 215. N series storage systems and storage expansion units should be rack-mounted. N series storage systems and storage expansion units include a mounting rail kit. The recommended racks are: IBM 7014 Model T00, which is a 36U high rack Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 117

154 IBM 7014 Model T42, which is a 42U high rack IBM 2101 Model N00 rack, which is a 36U high rack IBM 2101 Model N42 rack, which is a 42U high rack Other racks may be used, proided they allow the clearances specified in Appendix C, Specifications for IBM and non-ibm racks, on page 219. N series storage systems and storage expansion units do not mount in all IBM racks. It is important to check clearances when using any rack other than the IBM 7014 or IBM IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

155 Chapter 3. IBM N series storage system software features The operating system for the IBM N series products is the Data ONTAP software. It is a highly optimized, scalable and flexible operating system that can handle heterogeneous enironments. It integrates into UNIX, Windows, and web enironments. Data ONTAP characteristics include: Flexible olumes that do not require pre-partitioning Usage of multiple processors for performance Block-leel data access oer a Fibre Channel SAN fabric using FCP and oer an IP-based Ethernet network using iscsi File-leel data access oer an IP-based Ethernet network using file access protocols such as NFS, CIFS, HTTP, or FTP Data protection and recoery Disk-based data permanence features for regulated and reference data Double parity RAID Setup wizard System Manager, a web-based administration tool that allows IT administrators to fully manage N series systems from remote locations. System Manager is a simple and intuitie web-based single-appliance administration. SnapShot, which enables instant self-serice file backup and recoery for end users. Only block leel changes are stored, so only a minimal amount of space is required for each subsequent snapshot. FlexVol, which allows an administrator to create multiple flexible olumes across a large pool of disks. This feature enables dynamic, non-disruptie storage (thin) proisioning and increases space- and time-efficiency. FlexVol enables more productie use of aailable storage and helps improe performance. Data ONTAP also offers the Clustered Data ONTAP option that is a scale-out solution that allows customers to gradually increase the performance and capacity of a single name space enironment (horizontal scaling) to meet the needs of their organization. This proides a more flexible enironment and enables customers to presere their inestment beyond simple capacity scaling (ertical scaling). The following protocols are supported for IBM N series storage systems. CIFS NFS CIFS allows Microsoft Windows serers and clients access oer the IP network using CIFS file system protocols. Microsoft Windows client access licenses (CALs) are not required. CIFS supports an actie directory enironment. To enable CIFS support, you must purchase the appropriate feature code. See IBM N series host software features on page 137. NFS allows UNIX and Linux serers and clients access oer an IP network using NFS file system protocols. To enable NFS support, you must purchase the appropriate feature code. See IBM N series host software features on page 137. Copyright IBM Corp. 2005,

156 iscsi FCP iscsi allows transfer of data between storage and serers in block I/O formats (iscsi protocol) across an IP network. iscsi enables the creation of IP SANs for optimizing the transfer of database traffic in IP enironments. To enable iscsi, you must purchase the appropriate feature code. See IBM N series host software features on page 137. FCP allows transfer of data between storage and serers in block I/O formats utilizing FCP protocols across a Fibre Channel SAN. FCP enables participation of an N series storage solution within Fibre Channel SAN enironments. To enable FCP, you must purchase the appropriate feature code. See IBM N series host software features on page 137. Following are descriptions of some of the Data ONTAP software packages aailable for N series storage systems as feature codes. Adanced Single Instance Storage This feature proides block-leel deduplication within the entire flexible olume on an IBM N series storage controller that has the near-line Function feature enabled. Adanced Single Instance Storage only stores unique data blocks in the flexible olume and creates a small amount of additional metadata in the process. Each block of data has a digital "signature," that is compared to all other signatures in the flexible olume. If an exact byte-for-byte block match exists on the flexible olume, the duplicate block is discarded and its disk space is reclaimed. CFO Installed on a pair of N series storage controllers, this feature is designed to enable the transfer of data serice from an unaailable controller to the other controller in the cluster. It is designed to delier a robust and highly aailable data serice for business-critical enironments. Disk Sanitization Disk sanitization is the process of physically obliterating data by oerwriting disks with specified byte patterns or random data in a manner that helps preent recoery of current data by any known recoery methods. This feature enables you to carry out disk sanitization by using three successie byte-oerwrite patterns per cycle and a default six cycles per operation. Note: After the disk sanitization feature has been installed on an N series storage system, it cannot be uninstalled. FlexCache for NFS FlexCache for NFS is designed to create a caching layer in your storage infrastructure that helps to eliminate performance bottlenecks in NFS enironments. It is designed to replicate hot data sets to local caching olumes anywhere in the infrastructure. This is useful with NFS implementations in compute-intensie applications, distributed computing enironments, and reerse-tiered storage. FlexClone FlexClone enables near-instant replication of data olumes/sets without requiring additional storage space at the time of creation. FlexClone allows an IT administrator to make a backup copy of a database and then modify and run testing against the test (backup) database without affecting the online database and without taking the online database offline. 120 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

157 MetroCluster This feature is an integrated, high-aailability, and business-continuance solution designed to leerage proen technologies from IBM. It expands the capabilities of the IBM N series portfolio of high-aailability and disaster recoery solutions a portfolio that includes failoer, data replication, and backup solutions. MetroCluster is designed to be a simple-to-administer solution that extends failoer capability from within a data center to a remote site. It also proides replication of data at the primary site to a remote site, helping to keep data at the remote site current. The combination of failoer and data replication aids in the recoery from disaster, helping preent loss of data in less time than otherwise possible. MultiStore MultiStore permits consolidating a large number of Windows and UNIX file serers onto a single storage system. MultiStore is designed to let you quickly and easily create separate, priate logical partitions in filer network and storage resources. Each irtual storage partition is designed to maintain separation from eery other storage partition to preent different enterprise departments that share the same storage resources from accessing or finding other partitions. MultiStore helps preent information on any irtual partition from being iewed, used, or downloaded by an unauthorized users. NearStore This feature is designed to help optimize an N series system for data protection and retention applications. It enables additional concurrent streams and SnapVault for NetBackup. SnapDrie for UNIX and Windows SnapDrie proides a software application designed to enhance the storage management capabilities in an operating system enironment, including easier management of dynamic olume, cluster, snapshot, and replication management. SnapLock Compliance SnapLock Compliance proides data permanence storage that enables compliance with goernment records retention regulations by using SEC-compliant disk-based WORM technology. SnapLock Enterprise Like SnapLock Compliance, SnapLock Enterprise proides data permanence storage that enables compliance with goernment records retention regulations by using SEC-compliant disk-based WORM technology. SnapLock Enterprise allows administrators to delete SnapLock Enterprise olumes. SnapManager for Exchange SnapManager for Exchange is designed to help streamline storage management while simplifying configuration, backup, and restore operations for Microsoft Exchange databases. SnapManager for Hyper-V SnapManager for Hyper-V is designed to designed to integrate with the Microsoft Hyper-V irtual serer infrastructure and automate crucial tasks such as back up, restore, recoery, and cloning. It allows connectiity of any number of Microsoft Hyper-V serers to one storage controller. Chapter 3. IBM N series storage system software features 121

158 SnapManager for Oracle SnapManager for Oracle is designed to integrate with an Oracle Database and automate crucial tasks such as back up, restore, database recoery, and cloning. SnapManager for SAP SnapManager for SAP is designed to allow SAP administrators to backup and restore a SAP system hosted on an Oracle database. It is integrated with the interface for SAP br* tools for backup and recoery of SAP systems as well as with the N series data management tools. It is designed to simplify proisioning and data protection on enterprise SAP systems. SnapManager for SharePoint IBM SnapManager for Microsoft Office SharePoint proides a single console to manage disk-based backup and recoery of SharePoint content databases, portals, sites, sub-sites, folders, documents, and ersions of documents. Deployed in combination with an N series storage system, SnapManager software is designed to proide near-instantaneous hot backups and rapid restores to help you achiee a combination of aailability, scalability, performance, and reliability for SharePoint enironments. This feature allows connectiity of any number of Microsoft Office SharePoint serers to one N series storage system. SnapManager for SQL SnapManager for SQL is designed to help reduce backup and restore times of SQL databases by using backups based upon snapshot copies. SnapManager for SQL enables simultaneous backup of multiple databases using minimal disk space for each additional full backup. SnapManager for VI SnapManager for Virtual Infrastructures (SnapManager VI) is designed to integrate with a irtual serer infrastructure and automate crucial tasks such as back up, restore, recoery, and cloning. It allows connectiity of any number of VMWare serers to one storage controller. SnapMirror SnapMirror proides remote mirroring software that enables automated file system replication between sites. SnapMirror enables asynchronous, synchronous, and semi-synchronous remote replication oer inexpensie Internet protocols. Full backup is followed by incremental block updates. SnapMoer SnapMoer proides a local data migration solution for optimizing workloads across N series systems sharing a common disk array. SnapMoer allows you to migrate the ownership of a olume from one filer to another filer with a single command. This feature also allows for better resource utilization and performance amongst multiple N series systems. Note: MultiStore and Clustering are prerequisites for SnapMoer. SnapRestore SnapRestore enables quick restoration of snapshot data files and olumes. It proides instant self-serice olume recoery for large indiidual files. SnapRestore allows olumes to be restored with a single command (as opposed to the file leel restorations that SnapShot offers). SnapValidator SnapValidator proides data alidation and protection for Oracle data. 122 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

159 Software packs SnapVault Primary SnapVault Primary proides disk-based backup by periodically backing up a SnapShot copy to another system. SnapVault proides heterogeneous, super-efficient, hourly disk-based online backup and restoration by periodically backing up a snapshot copy to another system. SnapVault Primary is the license for the primary backup system in use. SnapVault Secondary Like SnapVault Primary, SnapVault Secondary proides disk-based backup by periodically backing up a SnapShot copy to another system. SnapVault Secondary is required to attain the license for the secondary backup deice. SyncMirror SyncMirror proides data protection by maintaining two copies of data online; SyncMirror maintains strict physical separation between the two copies. This feature enables synchronous local mirroring from one olume to another olume attached to the same filer. SyncMirror includes olume mirroring between two clustered nodes. Software packs are designed to proide simplified ordering of common combinations of software features. Note: For more information about N series software licenses, refer to the N series support website, which is accessed as described in Websites on page xxx. Table 79 lists the software packs aailable for the N3300, N3400, N3600, N6040, N6060 and N6070 systems. Table 79. N series software packs Bundle Base pack This software pack proides the basic software functions for N series systems. Foundation pack This software pack proides the foundation for expanded use of the N series system. Protection pack This software pack proides the expanded protection software capabilities of the N series system. Supported systems N3300, N3400, N3600, N6040, N6060, N6070 Storage system-based features iscsi FCP HTTP SyncMirror NearStore A-SIS Deduplication N3300, N3400, N3600 SnapRestore SnapVault Primary N3300, N3400, or N3600 SnapMirror SnapVault Secondary Host serer-based features Operations Manager (one node) Proisioning Manager (one node) Protection Manager (one node) Chapter 3. IBM N series storage system software features 123

160 Table 79. N series software packs (continued) Bundle Adanced pack This software pack proides the basis for the adanced functions of the N series system. Application pack Supported systems N3300, N3400, or N3600 Storage system-based features FlexClone MultiStore SnapLock Compliance SnapLock Enterprise Host serer-based features None N3400 None SnapManager for Exchange 1 This software pack proides the basis for the application functions of the N series system. Serer pack This software pack proides the basis for the serer functions of the N series system. SnapManager for SQL 1 SnapManager for SAP 1 SnapManager for Oracle 1 SnapManager for Hyper-V 1 SnapManager for VI 1 SnapManager for SharePoint 1 SnapDrie for UNIX 1 SnapDrie for Windows 1 N3400 None SnapManager for VI 1 Single Mailbox Recoery Windows (1500 mailboxes for single-node systems, 3000 mailboxes for dual-node systems) 5 SnapDrie for UNIX 1 SnapDrie for Windows 1 1 This software pack includes a single license key for this offering. The license key is installed on the N series storage system; it allows any number of host serers that install this software to use these functions with the storage system that has this license key installed. To license additional storage systems, see the appropriate table for your storage system in IBM N series controller software feature codes on page This software pack includes a license file for this offering. The license file is installed on the host serer to specify the maximum number of mailboxes and the types of extract wizards that can be used. To license additional mailboxes and extract wizards, see the definition and table entries for this offering in IBM N series host software features on page 137. Software bundles Software bundles are designed to proide simplified ordering of common combinations of software features. Note: For more information about N series software licenses, refer to the N series support website, which is accessed as described in Websites on page xxx. The following tables describe the aailable N series software bundles: Table 80 on page 125 Table 81 on page IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

161 Table 80. N3300, N3400, N3600, and N6040 software bundles Bundle Windows bundle This software bundle proides the expanded capabilities of the N series storage system in a Windows enironment. Virtualization bundle This software bundle proides the expanded irtualization software capabilities of the N series system. Complete bundle This software bundle proides the basis for the adanced functions of the N series system. Supported systems N3300, N3400, N3600, and N6040 N3300, N3400, N3600, and N6040 N3300, N3400, N3600, and N6040 Storage system-based features CIFS SnapRestore SnapVault Primary SnapVault Secondary SnapMirror NFS SnapRestore SnapVault Primary SnapVault Secondary SnapMirror NFS CIFS SnapRestore SnapVault Primary SnapVault Secondary SnapMirror FlexClone MultiStore SnapLock Compliance SnapLock Enterprise Host serer-based features SnapManager for Exchange 1 SnapManager for SQL 1 SnapManager for SAP 1 SnapManager for Oracle 1 SnapManager for Hyper-V 1 SnapManager for VI 1 SnapManager for SharePoint 1 SnapDrie for UNIX 1 SnapDrie for Windows 1 Protection Manager 2 Proisioning Manager 3 Single Mailbox Recoery 5 SnapManager for Hyper-V 1 SnapManager for VI 1 SnapDrie for UNIX 1 SnapDrie for Windows 1 Protection Manager 3 Proisioning Manager 3 SnapManager for Exchange 1 SnapManager for SQL 1 SnapManager for SAP 1 SnapManager for Oracle 1 SnapManager for Hyper-V 1 SnapManager for VI 1 SnapManager for SharePoint 1 SnapDrie for UNIX 1 SnapDrie for Windows 1 Protection Manager 3 Proisioning Manager 3 Single Mailbox Recoery 5 Chapter 3. IBM N series storage system software features 125

162 Table 80. N3300, N3400, N3600, and N6040 software bundles (continued) Bundle Supported systems Storage system-based features Host serer-based features 1 This Software Bundle includes a single license key for this offering. The license key is installed on the N series storage system; it allows any number of host serers that install this software to use these functions with the storage system that has this license key installed. To license additional storage systems, see the appropriate table for your storage system in IBM N series controller software feature codes on page This Software Bundle includes one license key for this offering. The license key is installed on the host serer where the software offering is installed; it allows these functions to be used with a single storage system. To license additional storage systems, see the definition and table entries for this offering in IBM N series host software features on page This Software Bundle includes one tier x license key for this offering. The license key is installed on the host serer where the software offering is installed; it allows these functions to be used with the tier's maximum number of storage systems. To license additional tiers of storage systems, see the definition and table entries for this offering in IBM N series host software features on page This Software Bundle includes a license file for this offering. The license file is installed on the host serer to specify the maximum number of mailboxes and the types of extract wizards that can be used. To license additional mailboxes and extract wizards, see the definition and table entries for this offering in IBM N series host software features on page 137. Table 81. N3150, N3220, N3240, N6200 series and N7x50T series software bundles Bundle Data ONTAP Essentials This software bundle proides the essential Data ONTAP functions that must be ordered with the N series storage system. SnapManager Suite bundle This software bundle proides the automated backup and restore functions for a set of specific host applications used with the N series storage system. Supported systems N3150, N3220, N3240, N6210, N6220, N6240, N6250, N6270, N7550T, N7950T N3150, N3220, N3240, N6210, N6220, N6240, N6250, N6270, N7550T, N7950T Storage system-based features Clustered Failoer (CFO) SyncMirror ASIS (Deduplication) FlexCache for NFS MultiStore NearStore HTTP One protocol of choice MetroCluster Host serer-based features Data ONTAP DSM for Windows MPIO (25 licenses per controller) None SnapManager for Exchange 1 SnapManager for SQL 1 SnapManager for SAP 1 SnapManager for Oracle 1 SnapManager for Hyper-V 1 SnapManager for VI 1 SnapManager for SharePoint 1 SnapDrie for UNIX 1 SnapDrie for Windows IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

163 Table 81. N3150, N3220, N3240, N6200 series and N7x50T series software bundles (continued) Bundle Complete bundle This software bundle proides the full range of adanced storage functions of the N series system. Supported systems N3150 6, N3220 6, N3240 6, N6210, N6220, N6240, N6250, N6270, N7550T, N7950T 6 Storage system-based features NFS CIFS FCP iscsi SnapVault SnapRestore SnapMirror FlexClone SnapLock Compliance SnapLock Enterprise Host serer-based features SnapManager for Exchange 1 SnapManager for SQL 1 SnapManager for SAP 1 SnapManager for Oracle 1 SnapManager for Hyper-V 1 SnapManager for VI 1 SnapManager for SharePoint 1 SnapDrie for UNIX 1 SnapDrie for Windows 1 Single Mailbox Recoery 5 1 This Software Bundle includes a single license key for this offering. The license key is installed on the N series storage system; it allows any number of host serers that install this software to use these functions with the storage system that has this license key installed. To license additional storage systems, see the appropriate table for your storage system in IBM N series controller software feature codes. 5 This Software Bundle includes a license file for this offering. The license file is installed on the host serer to specify the maximum number of mailboxes and the types of extract wizards that can be used. To license additional mailboxes and extract wizards, see the definition and table entries for this offering in IBM N series host software features on page This Software Bundle includes a license key for Snaplock Compliance and Snaplock Enterprise on N6210, N6220, N6240, N6250, and N6270. Contact your account team to obtain a licence key for N3150, N3220, N3240, N7550T, and N7950T which requires minimum leel of Data ONTAP 8.1RC3. IBM N series controller software feature codes Table 82, Table 83 on page 128, Table 84 on page 128, Table 85 on page 129, Table 86 on page 130, Table 87 on page 131, Table 88 on page 134, and Table 89 on page 135, list the supported software features for all N series models. Table 82. N series software licensed function indicators for N3150 (Model 2857) Description N A15 N A25 Data ONTAP Essentials A8R0 A8RH iscsi A8R2 A8RK CIFS A8R3 A8RL NFS A8R4 A8RM SnapLock Compliance A8R5 A8RN SnapLock Enterprise A8R6 A8RP Data ONTAP A8R7 A8RQ SnapRestore A8R8 A8RR SnapMirror A8R9 A8RS SnapVault A8RA A8RT FlexClone A8RB A8RU SnapManager Suite A8RC A8RV Complete Bundle A8RD A8RW Chapter 3. IBM N series storage system software features 127

164 Table 83. N series software licensed function indicators for N3220 and N3240 (Model 2857) Description N A12 N A22 N A14 N A24 Data ONTAP Essentials A8P0 A8PH A8Q0 A8QH FCP A8P1 A8PJ A8Q1 A8QJ iscsi A8P2 A8PK A8Q2 A8QK CIFS A8P3 A8PL A8Q3 A8QL NFS A8P4 A8PM A8Q4 A8QM Data ONTAP A8P7 A8PQ A8Q7 A8QQ SnapRestore A8P8 A8PR A8Q8 A8QR SnapMirror A8P9 A8PS A8Q9 A8QS SnapVault A8PA A8PT A8QA A8QT SnapLock Compliance A8P5 A8PN A8Q5 A8QN SnapLock Enterprise A8P6 A8PP A8Q6 A8QP FlexClone A8PB A8PU A8QB A8QU SnapManager Suite A8PC A8PV A8QC A8QV Complete Bundle A8PD A8PW A8QD A8QW Table 84. N series software licensed function indicators for N6210, N6240, N6270 (Model 2858) Description N C10 N C20 N C21 N E11 N E21 N C22 N E12 N E22 Data ONTAP Essentials Data ONTAP Essentials GW CIFS initial CIFS initial - GW CIFS secondary CIFS secondary - GW FCP initial FCP initial - GW FCP secondary FCP secondary - GW iscsi initial iscsi initial - GW iscsi secondary iscsi secondary - GW NFS initial NFS initial - GW NFS secondary NFS secondary - GW SnapLock Compliance SnapLock Compliance GW SnapLock Enterprise IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

165 Table 84. N series software licensed function indicators for N6210, N6240, N6270 (Model 2858) (continued) Description N C10 N C20 N C21 N E11 N E21 N C22 N E12 SnapLock Enterprise GW Data ONTAP Data ONTAP - GW SnapRestore SnapRestore - GW SnapMirror SnapMirror - GW SnapVault SnapVault - GW FlexClone FlexClone - GW SnapManager Suite SnapManager Suite - GW Complete Bundle Complete Bundle - GW MetroCluster 5817 Not aailable MetroCluster - GW Not aailable Performance Acceleration Module II (Flash Cache) Performance Acceleration Module II (Flash Cache) -GW 5717 Not aailable 5742 Not aailable Not aailable Not aailable 5617 Not aailable 5642 Not aailable Not aailable Not aailable N E Flash Cache II Flash Cache II - GW Table 85. N series software licensed function indicators for N6220 and N6250 (Model 2858) Description N C15 N C25 N E15 N E25 N E16 N E26 Data ONTAP Essentials A8U1 A8S1 A8U1 A8S1 A8Y1 A8W1 Data ONTAP Essentials - GW A8V1 A8T1 A8V1 A8T1 A8Z1 A8X1 CIFS initial A8U2 A8S2 A8U2 A8S2 A8Y2 A8W2 CIFS initial - GW A8V2 A8T2 A8V2 A8T2 A8Z2 A8X2 CIFS secondary A8U3 A8S3 A8U3 A8S3 A8Y3 A8W3 CIFS secondary - GW A8V3 A8T3 A8V3 A8T3 A8Z3 A8X3 FCP initial A8U4 A8S4 A8U4 A8S4 A8Y4 A8W4 FCP initial - GW A8V4 A8T4 A8V4 A8T4 A8Z4 A8X4 FCP secondary A8U5 A8S5 A8U5 A8S5 A8Y5 A8W5 FCP secondary - GW A8V5 A8T5 A8V5 A8T5 A8Z5 A8X5 Chapter 3. IBM N series storage system software features 129

166 Table 85. N series software licensed function indicators for N6220 and N6250 (Model 2858) (continued) Description N C15 N C25 N E15 N E25 N E16 iscsi initial A8U6 A8S6 A8U6 A8S6 A8Y6 A8W6 iscsi initial - GW A8V6 A8T6 A8V6 A8T6 A8Z6 A8X6 iscsi secondary A8U7 A8S7 A8U7 A8S7 A8Y7 A8W7 iscsi secondary - GW A8V7 A8T7 A8V7 A8T7 A8Z7 A8X7 NFS initial A8U8 A8S8 A8U8 A8S8 A8Y8 A8W8 NFS initial - GW A8V8 A8T8 A8V8 A8T8 A8Z8 A8X8 NFS secondary A8U9 A8S9 A8U9 A8S9 A8Y9 A8W9 NFS secondary - GW A8V9 A8T9 A8V9 A8T9 A8Z9 A8X9 SnapLock Compliance A8UA A8SA A8UA A8SA A8YA A8WA SnapLock Compliance - GW A8VA A8TA A8VA A8TA A8ZA A8ZA SnapLock Enterprise A8UB A8SB A8UB A8SB A8YB A8WB SnapLock Enterprise - GW A8VB A8TB A8VB A8TB A8ZB A8XB Data ONTAP A8U0 A8S0 A8U0 A8S0 A8Y0 A8W0 Data ONTAP - GW A8V0 A8T0 A8V0 A8T0 A8Z0 A8X0 SnapRestore A8UC A8SC A8UC A8SC A8YC A8WC SnapRestore - GW A8VC A8TC A8VC A8TC A8ZC A8XC SnapMirror A8UD A8SD A8UD A8SD A8YD A8WD SnapMirror - GW A8VD A8TD A8VD A8TD A8ZD A8XD SnapVault A8UE A8SE A8UE A8SE A8YE A8WE SnapVault - GW A8VE A8TE A8VE A8TE A8ZE A8XE FlexClone A8UF A8SF A8UF A8SF A8YF A8WF FlexClone - GW A8VF A8TF A8VF A8TF A8ZF A8XF SnapManager Suite A8UG A8SG A8UG A8SG A8YG A8WG SnapManager Suite - GW A8VG A8TG A8VG A8TG A8ZG A8XG Complete Bundle A8UH A8SH A8UH A8SH A8YH A8WH Complete Bundle - GW A8VH A8TH A8VH A8TH A8ZH A8XH MetroCluster A8SJ A8SJ A8WJ MetroCluster - GW Not aailable Not aailable A8TJ Not aailable Not aailable A8TJ Not aailable Not aailable N E26 Flash Cache II A8UL A8SL A8UL A8SL A8YL A8WL Flash Cache II - GW A8VL A8TL A8VL A8TL A8ZL A8XL A8XJ Table 86. N series software licensed function indicators for N7550T and N7950T (Model 2867) Description N7550T 2867 C20 N7950T 2867 E22 Data ONTAP Essentials A Data ONTAP Essentials - GW A CIFS initial A CIFS initial - GW A CIFS secondary A IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

167 Table 86. N series software licensed function indicators for N7550T and N7950T (Model 2867) (continued) Description N7550T 2867 C20 N7950T 2867 E22 CIFS secondary - GW A FCP initial A FCP initial - GW A FCP secondary A FCP secondary - GW A iscsi initial A iscsi initial - GW A iscsi secondary A iscsi secondary - GW A NFS initial A NFS initial - GW A NFS secondary A NFS secondary - GW A SnapLock Compliance A90A 5909 SnapLock Compliance - GW A91A 5934 SnapLock Enterprise A90B 5919 SnapLock Enterprise - GW A91B 5944 Data ONTAP A Data ONTAP - GW A SnapRestore A90C 5911 SnapRestore - GW A91C 5936 SnapMirror A90D 5912 SnapMirror - GW A91D 5937 SnapVault A90E 5913 SnapVault - GW A91E 5938 FlexClone A90F 5914 FlexClone - GW A91F 5939 SnapManager Suite A90G 5915 SnapManager Suite - GW A91G 5940 Complete Bundle A90H 5916 Complete Bundle - GW A91H 5941 MetroCluster A90J 5917 MetroCluster - GW A91J 5942 Flash Cache II A90L 5920 Flash Cache II - GW A91L 5945 Table 87. N series software licensed function indicators for N6040, N6060, and N6070 (Model 2858) Description 2858 A A A A A A22 Base Pack Not aailable Not aailable Not aailable Not aailable Chapter 3. IBM N series storage system software features 131

168 Table 87. N series software licensed function indicators for N6040, N6060, and N6070 (Model 2858) (continued) Description 2858 A A A A A A22 Windows Bundle Not aailable Virtualization Bundle Not aailable Complete Bundle Not aailable Not aailable Not aailable Not aailable Not aailable Not aailable Not aailable Not aailable Not aailable Not aailable Data ONTAP Data ONTAP - GW Data ONTAP Data ONTAP - GW CIFS CIFS - GW HTTP HTTP - GW NFS NFS - GW CFO Not aailable 7454 Not aailable 6054 Not aailable 6554 CFO - GW Not aailable CFO for MetroCluster 6804 Not aailable CFO for MetroCluster - GW 6904 Not aailable 7554 Not aailable 7421 Not aailable 7521 Not aailable 6154 Not aailable Not aailable 6604 Not aailable FlexClone FlexClone - GW MultiStore MultiStore - GW SnapMirror SnapMirror - GW SnapLock Compliance SnapLock Compliance - GW SnapLock Enterprise SnapLock Enterprise - GW SnapMoer Not 7460 Not 6060 Not 6560 aailable aailable aailable SnapMoer - GW Not 6660 aailable SnapRestore SnapRestore - GW SnapVault Primary SnapVault Primary - GW SnapVault Secondary IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

169 Table 87. N series software licensed function indicators for N6040, N6060, and N6070 (Model 2858) (continued) Description 2858 A A A A A A22 SnapVault Secondary - GW SyncMirror SyncMirror - GW FlexScale FlexScale - GW SnapValidator SnapValidator - GW Fibre Channel Protocol Fibre Channel Protocol - GW Disk Sanitization Disk Sanitization - GW SnapManager for Exchange SnapManager for Exchange GW SnapManager for SQL SnapManager for SQL - GW MetroCluster MetroCluster - GW SAN Bundle Not 7474 Not 6074 Not 6574 aailable aailable aailable iscsi Protocol iscsi Protocol - GW MS Exchange Bundle (5000 users) Not aailable Not aailable Not aailable 6078 Not aailable SnapMirror/SnapVault Bundle SnapMirror/SnapVault Bundle GW NearStore NearStore - GW Deduplication Deduplication - GW Performance Accelerator Module II Performance Accelerator Module II - GW SnapManager for SAP SnapManager for SAP - GW SnapManager for Oracle SnapManager for Oracle - GW Flash Cache II Flash Cache II - GW Not aailable Chapter 3. IBM N series storage system software features 133

170 Table 87. N series software licensed function indicators for N6040, N6060, and N6070 (Model 2858) (continued) Description 2858 A A A A A A22 SnapManager for Hyper-V Filer SnapManager for Hyper-V GW FlexCache for NFS FlexCache for NFS - GW SnapManager for VI SnapManager for VI - GW SnapManager for SharePoint SnapManager for SharePoint - GW Table 88. N series software licensed function indicators for N3300, N3400 and N3600 (Models 2859 to 2862) Description 2859 A A A A A A20 Base Pack Foundation Pack Protection Pack Adanced Pack Windows Bundle Not 5170 aailable Virtualization Bundle Not 5171 aailable Complete Bundle Not 5172 aailable Application Pack Not aailable Not aailable Not aailable Not aailable Serer Pack Not aailable Not aailable Not aailable Not aailable Data ONTAP CIFS HTTP NFS CFO Not 6355 Not 6105 Not 7105 aailable aailable aailable SyncMirror SnapManager for Hyper-V FlexClone MultiStore NearStore iscsi Protocol SnapMirror/SnapVault Bundle FlexCache for NFS SnapMirror IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

171 Table 88. N series software licensed function indicators for N3300, N3400 and N3600 (Models 2859 to 2862) (continued) Description 2859 A A A A A A20 SnapLock Compliance SnapLock Enterprise SnapMoer Not aailable 6384 Not aailable 7134 Not aailable SnapRestore SnapVault Primary SnapVault Secondary SnapManager for SAP SnapManager for Oracle SnapValidator Fibre Channel Protocol Disk Sanitization SnapManager for Exchange SnapManager for SQL Adanced Single Instance Storage SnapManager for VI SnapManager for SharePoint SnapDrie for UNIX Not aailable Not aailable SnapDrie for Windows Microsoft Exchange Bundle (2500 users) Not aailable Not aailable Not aailable Not aailable Not aailable Not aailable Not aailable 1 SnapLock Compliance and SnapLock Enterprise require Data ONTAP or higher. Table 89. N series software licensed function indicators for N7600, N7700, N7800, and N7900 (Models 2866 to 2867) Description 2866 A10/A A20/A GW A10/A GW A20/A A10/A A20/A GW A10/A11 Data ONTAP CIFS HTTP NFS CFO 7954 Not aailable 7654 Not aailable 7754 Not aailable 7854 Not aailable FlexClone MultiStore SnapMirror SnapLock Compliance SnapLock Enterprise GW A20/A21 Chapter 3. IBM N series storage system software features 135

172 Table 89. N series software licensed function indicators for N7600, N7700, N7800, and N7900 (Models 2866 to 2867) (continued) Description SnapMoer 2866 A10/A11 Not aailable 2866 A20/A GW A10/A GW A20/A A10/A Not aailable 2867 A20/A GW A10/A GW A20/A21 SnapRestore SnapVault Primary SnapVault Secondary SyncMirror SnapValidator Fibre Channel Protocol Disk Sanitization SnapManager for Exchange SnapManager for SQL NearStore MetroCluster Not aailable 7673 Not aailable 7773 Not aailable 7873 Not aailable 7973 SAN Bundle Not aailable 7674 Not aailable Not aailable Not aailable 7874 Not aailable iscsi Protocol FlexScale Performance Accelerator Module II Performance Accelerator Module II bundle Microsoft Exchange Bundle (10000 users) SnapMirror/SnapVault Bundle 7627 (A11 only) Not aailable Not aailable 7677 (A21 only) Not aailable 7727 (A11 only) Not aailable 7678 Not aailable 7777 (A21 only) Not aailable Not aailable Not aailable Not aailable Not aailable 7878 Not aailable Not aailable Not aailable 7978 Not aailable FlexCache for NFS Adanced Single Instance Storage SnapManager for SAP SnapManager for Oracle SnapManager for Hyper-V SnapManager for VI SnapManager for SharePoint Disk Sanitization on N series gateways is only usable with N series storage expansion units. 136 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

173 IBM N series host software features This section describes the host software features aailable for your N series storage system. Host software features are installed directly on the host that supports your N series storage system. Data ONTAP DSM for Windows MPIO Data ONTAP Deice Specific Module (DSM) for Windows Multipath I/O (MPIO) supports Windows Serer host machines running SnapDrie for Windows attached to N series storage systems that are licensed to use the DSM with Fibre Channel (FC) and iscsi paths. Open Systems SnapVault Agents Open Systems SnapVault is designed to be a heterogeneous, disk-to-disk data protection solution. An OSSV primary system corresponds to a backup client in the traditional backup architecture. The SnapVault secondary system is always an N series system running Data ONTAP. OSSV software is designed to protect data residing on the primary system, which can be a storage system attached to a serer running an operating system such as AIX, Windows, VMWare or Linux. Three main components are installed within the OSSV enironment: The primary system The OSSV agent residing on the primary system The secondary system (N series) with the SnapVault Secondary feature A predetermined directory or file system is chosen to be backed up to the secondary storage. The data set is mapped to a secondary system qtree on a secondary storage system. Operation Manager Core (OMC) The OMC features are designed to proide a central point of control and to proide alerts, reports, and configuration tools. These tools are designed to help manage storage and content deliery infrastructure, consistent with business requirements, and help maximize aailability and reduce total cost of ownership. Protection Manager The Protection Manager feature proides backup and replication management software for an N series disk-based data protection enironment. It is designed to help protect data and support high productiity by proiding policy-based management, including when used in automated data protection configurations. Protection Manager Disaster Recoery (DR) features The Protection Manager Disaster Recoery (DR) features proide backup and replication management software for an N series disk-based data protection enironment and disaster recoery. Protection Manager DR is designed to help protect data and support high productiity by proiding policy-based management, including when used in automated data-protection enironments. Proisioning Manager Proisioning Manager is an automated, policy-based proisioning software for N series enironments. The software is designed to automate manual and repetitie proisioning processes, increasing the productiity of administrators and improing the aailability of data by ensuring that proisioned storage complies with data protection policies. Chapter 3. IBM N series storage system software features 137

174 Single Mailbox Recoery Single Mailbox Recoery (SMBR) adds adanced function to the SnapManager for Exchange feature. Single Mailbox Recoery restores indiidual mail items from any recent (hourly, daily, or weekly) snapshot. This helps allow rapid search of archied snapshot copies of preiously deleted messages that are no longer in the current mailbox. Single Mailbox Recoery also includes Extract Wizards for Microsoft NT Backup, VERITAS Backup Exec, and, optionally, Extract Wizards for CA BrightStor ARCsere, Legato NetWorker, and VERITAS Net Backup. The Extract Wizards are designed to restore both priate and public exchange information and stored data from tape or disk backups to any alternate location (machine, olume, or folder), thereby helping to eliminate the need for a recoery serer. SMBR Administratie Serer SMBR Administratie Serer proides a framework that can host centralized serices for multiple clients and proide both client and serer support for Single Mailbox Recoery 5.0, or higher and Single Mailbox Recoery ExtractWizard users. It facilitates serer configuration, mailbox permissions, and application auditing serices for SMBR enironments. SMBR Content Analysis Wizard The SMBR Content Analysis Wizard (CAW) is designed to enable you to automate and sae search results with Microsoft Exchange by selecting sources, including entire Exchange Database (EDB) files, indiidual mailboxes from an EDB, or folders from an EDB. Any number of sources is allowed. SnapDrie SnapDrie proides a software application designed to enhance the storage management capabilities in an operating system enironment, including easier management of dynamic olume, cluster, snapshot, and replication management. SnapManager for Exchange SnapManager for Exchange is designed to help streamline storage management while simplifying configuration, backup, and restore operations for Microsoft Exchange databases. SnapManager for Hyper V SnapManager for Hyper-V is designed to designed to integrate with the Microsoft Hyper-V irtual serer infrastructure and automate crucial tasks such as back up, restore, recoery, and cloning. It allows connectiity of any number of Microsoft Hyper-V serers to one storage controller. SnapManager for Microsoft Office SharePoint Archier This feature is used with Microsoft SharePoint and SnapManager Sharepoint (SMSP) enironments to migrate binary large object data (BLOB) into a CIFS share, accessible outside of the SharePoint data structure. This method of externalizing data helps improe scalability of the SharePoint enironment while proiding access to the data. These CIFS shares can reside on primary (FC/SAS) storage or on secondary storage (SATA), allowing the core SharePoint data and the externalized data to be stored on a single system. SnapManager for Microsoft Office SharePoint Migrator This feature adds the ability to use SMSP functions to migrate data from existing CIFS shares and Exchange public folders to the SharePoint data structure to take adantage of collaboration security proided by 138 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

175 SharePoint. Data contained in existing CIFS shares that require increased security for collaboration can be migrated directly to the SharePoint enironment. Similarly, the data in Exchange public folders can be migrated to the SharePoint enironment while keeping in place all the existing access security components. SnapManager for Microsoft Office SharePoint FileShare Connector This feature helps sae space on primary SQL Serer storage by aoiding the need to bring binary large object (BLOB) data into the SQL content database before externalizing the data. It also allows the bulk migration of unstructured data within SharePoint enironments. SnapManager for Microsoft Office SharePoint Storage Manager This feature helps optimize SQL Serer resources within SharePoint enironments. This assists with compliance requirements for content lifecycle management, and allows customers to centrally manage data externalization policies. SnapManager for Microsoft Office SharePoint Archie Manager This feature allows the moement of older SharePoint data to cheaper, lower tier storage for long-term data retention. The data can be recalled when needed, saing storage space on the higher tier, main SharePoint storage deices, helping reduce the total cost of ownership of SharePoint enironments with an integrated archial solution. SnapManager for SQL SnapManager for SQL is designed to help reduce backup and restore times of SQL databases by using backups based upon snapshot copies. SnapManager for SQL enables simultaneous backup of multiple databases using minimal disk space for each additional full backup. SnapManager for Oracle SnapManager for Oracle allows connection of one Oracle host serer to a storage controller. SnapManager for Oracle for Windows SnapManager for Oracle for Windows is designed to integrate with an Oracle database and automate crucial tasks such as backup, restore, database recoery, and cloning. This feature allows connection of one Oracle host serer to a storage controller. One of this feature is required for each Oracle host. SnapManager for Oracle for Windows is aailable for Oracle databases running on Windows. SnapManager for VI IBM SnapManager for Virtual Infrastructures (SnapManager VI) is designed to integrate with a irtual serer infrastructure and automate crucial tasks such as back up, restore, recoery, and cloning in a VMWare enironment. Table 90. IBM N series host software Description SnapDrie for UNIX - AIX 8024 SnapDrie for UNIX - Solaris 8025 SnapDrie for UNIX - HP-UX 8026 SnapDrie for UNIX - Linux 8027 SnapDrie for Windows 8050 SnapManager for Oracle - Windows 8129 Feature Chapter 3. IBM N series storage system software features 139

176 Table 90. IBM N series host software (continued) Description SnapManager for Exchange - Host 8131 SnapManager for VI - Host 8133 SnapManager for Hyper V - Host 8135 SnapManager for SAP - Windows 8140 SnapManager for SQL - Host 8141 SnapManager for Oracle 8143 SnapManager for SAP 8145 SnapManager for SharePoint 8147 SnapManager for SharePoint Management Bundle 8149 Single Mailbox Recoery 100 mailboxes 8150 Single Mailbox Recoery 500 mailboxes 8151 Single Mailbox Recoery 1000 mailboxes 8152 Single Mailbox Recoery 2500 mailboxes 8153 Single Mailbox Recoery 5000 mailboxes 8154 Single Mailbox Recoery mailboxes 8155 Single Mailbox Recoery mailboxes 8156 Single Mailbox Recoery CA-ARCSERVE Extract Wizard 8158 Single Mailbox Recoery Tioli Tape Extract Wizard 8159 Single Mailbox Recoery Legato Tape Extract Wizard 8160 Single Mailbox Recoery NetBackup Extract Wizard 8161 Single Mailbox Recoery PST Tape Extract Wizard 8162 Single Mailbox Recoery HP Extract Wizard 8163 Single Mailbox Recoery Commault Galaxy Ex Wizard 8164 Single Mailbox Recoery UltraBac Extract Wizard 8165 Single Mailbox Recoery Agent for Adanced Search 8166 Single Mailbox Recoery Content Analysis Wizard 8167 Single Mailbox Recoery Administratie Serer 8168 SnapManager for SharePoint FileShare Connector 8187 SnapManager for SharePoint Archie Manager 8188 SnapManager for SharePoint Storage Manager 8189 SnapManager for Microsoft Office SharePoint Archier (host) 8186 OnCommand Core Package 8255 Feature 140 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

177 FCP TARGET Chapter 4. Site planning This chapter contains the following information for site planning for the N series storage systems and storage expansion units. System connectiity requirements Circuit breaker and power outlet balancing requirements on page 144 Connecting your system to an ASCII terminal console on page 146 Hardware specifications on page 148 System connectiity requirements Your system requires the following types of connections: Fibre Channel Connects your appliance to disk sheles, Fibre Channel switches, tape backup deices, and to other storage deices. They can connect through the following media: Copper Fiber Ethernet Connects your appliance to an Ethernet network through the following media: Copper Fiber Fibre Channel connectiity Your appliance connects to disk sheles, Fibre Channel switches, tape backup deices, and other storage through onboard ports or adapter ports. The following illustration shows a typical LC connector used to connect Fibre Channel deices. LC connector PORT 1 PORT 2 FIBRE CHANNEL Figure 2. LC connector Copyright IBM Corp. 2005,

178 Ethernet connectiity Your appliance connects to a GbE network through either onboard ports or GbE network interface cards (NICs) which support either copper or fiber cabling. The following table lists maximum distances supported by 50 micron multimode fiber optic cables, with LC or SC connectors, connected to dual-port or quad-port Fibre Channel NICs. Waelength (Nanometers) Core size (microns) Modal Bandwidth (MHz/km) Distance (Meters) Card (speed) Gb Gb Gb 50 8 Gb Gb Gb Gb Gb Copper GbE cabling and NICs: The cabling and network requirements are for GbE and 10GbE networks using copper cabling. 10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-TX NICs ACT/LNK PORT A ACT/LNK A PORT B RJ-45 connector ACT/LNK PORT C 10=OFF 100=GRN 1000=ORG ACT/LNK B 10=OFF Copper cable 100=GRN 1000=ORG Quad-port Dual-port Single-port Figure 3. 10Base-T/100Base-T/1000Base-T NICs Types: Single-port, dual-port, quad-port Connector type: RJ-45 for all Cable type: Category 5, Category 5E or Category 6 unshielded four-pair cable for 10/100-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-TX 142 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

179 Note: Category 5 cables that do not hae four-pair wires do not work properly with 10/100-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-TX speed networks. Use Category 6 cables for these networks. Maximum distance: 100m Fiber GbE cabling and NICs: The following cabling and network requirements are for GbE networks using optical cabling. 1000Base-SX NICs LC connector ACT/LNK A ACT/LNK ACT/LNK B Dual-port Single-port Figure Base-SX NICs The following table lists maximum distances supported by 50 or 62.5 micron multimode fiber optic cables, with LC or LC duplex connectors for the 1000BASE-SX NICs, connected to single-port or dual-port Fibre Channel GbE NICs. Waelength (Nanometers) MM laser Core size (microns) Modal Bandwidth (MHz/km) Distance (Meters) Card type BASE-SX , Using older cables with PCI-X and PCIe 10GBASE-SR cards Do not use less than the recommended 2,000 Mhz/km bandwidth for 10GBASESR cards. The following table lists maximum distances supported by some more common cable bandwidths. Waelength Modal Bandwidth (Nanometers) Core size (microns) (MHz/km) Distance (Meters) , Chapter 4. Site planning 143

180 Circuit breaker and power outlet balancing requirements NEMA IEC If your equipment is mounted in a rack, the total number of circuit breakers required for your equipment is based on the current draw. You should not load a circuit beyond 80% of the rated limit for the circuit. For example, if you hae a 20A circuit, you should load it to no more than 16A of draw. If your equipment is mounted in a rack, the total number of circuit breakers required for your equipment is based on the current draw. For example, if you hae a 16A circuit, you should load it to no more than 16A of draw. Attention: Oerloading circuit breakers can lead to tripped breakers or power brownouts that can cause system errors. Balancing the load across PDUs A best practice is to plan how to distribute the total load across the PDU banks prior to plugging your system components into them. You should make each bank load as equal as possible. Keep the following considerations in mind when planning to balance the load: Balancing the load depends on the number of components being connected and the location of the component power supply units (PSUs), as shown in the following illustrations. You should connect the components to different PDUs on opposite sides of the system cabinet, using the illustrations for reference. You should plug each component into the PDU outlet directly across from the component, using the illustrations for reference. Examples of balancing the load with a single component The following illustrations show three examples of connecting the PSUs of a single component, such as a controller in a single chassis, to the system cabinet PDUs Figure 5. PSUs on opposite sides of the component 144 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

181 Figure 6. PSUs on the same side of the component Figure 7. PSUs stacked on the same side of the component 1 PSU 1 2 Left PDU outlet 3 PSU 2 4 Right PDU outlet Examples of balancing the load with two components The following illustrations show three examples of connecting the PSUs of two components, such as a component with two controller modules in a single chassis or two components close together, to the system cabinet PDUs Figure 8. PSUs on opposite sides of the component Chapter 4. Site planning 145

182 Figure 9. PSUs on the same side of the component Figure 10. PSUs stacked on the same side of the component 1 Left PDU, bank A 2 Left PDU, bank B 3 Right PDU, bank A 4 Right PDU, bank B 5 PSU 1, component 1 6 Left PDU, bank A outlet 7 PSU 2, component 1 8 Right PDU, bank A outlet 9 PSU 1, component 2 10 Left PDU, bank B outlet 11 PSU 2, component 2 12 Right PDU, bank B outlet 13 Component 1 14 Component 2 Connecting your system to an ASCII terminal console The ASCII terminal console enables you to monitor the boot process, helps you configure your system after it boots, and enables you to perform system administration. 146 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

183 ASCII terminal console wiring The following table lists the RJ-45 connection pinout for the ASCII terminal console wiring. Table 91. RJ-45 connection pinout for the ASCII terminal wiring Pin number Signal 1 Connected to pin 8 2 Not connected 3 TXD (from system) 4 GND 5 GND 6 RXD (to system) 7 Not connected 8 Connected to pin 1 DB-9 to RJ-45 console adapter pin connections You use the DB-9 to RJ-45 console adapter to connect the ASCII terminal console to your N6000 series system. Its purpose is to conert the RJ-45 pinout on the system to the DB-9 pinout, like those on other IBM products, and all PCs. The following table lists the console adapter pin number connections between the PC-style DB-9 male connector and the RJ-45 connection on your system. Table 92. Console adapter pin number connections RJ-45 Signal DB-9 male 1 [not connected] 2 [not connected] 3 (connected to pin 3 on DB-9) 4 (connected to pin 5 on DB-9) 5 [not connected] 6 (connected to pin 2 on DB-9) TXD GND RXD 3 (connected to pin 3 on RJ-45) 5 (connected to pin 4 on RJ-45) 2 (connected to pin 6 on RJ-45) 7 [not connected] [not connected] 1 8 [not connected] [not connected] 4 [not connected] 6 through 9 Connecting to an ASCII terminal console About this task To connect an ASCII terminal console to the system, complete the following steps. Procedure 1. Set the following communications parameters to the same alues for both the N series system and ASCII terminal. Chapter 4. Site planning 147

184 Table 93. Communication parameters Parameter Setting Baud 9600 Data bit 8 Parity None Stop bits 1 Flow control None Hardware specifications Note: See your terminal documentation for information about changing your ASCII console terminal settings. 2. Connect the DB-9 null modem cable to the DB-9 to RJ-45 adapter cable, and then connect the RJ-45 end to the console port on the system and the other end to the ASCII terminal. The following sections list the hardware specifications for the following N series storage systems and storage expansion units: N3150 hardware specifications on page 149 N3220 and N3240 hardware specifications on page 152 N3300, N3400 and N3600 hardware specifications on page 159 N6000 series system hardware specifications on page 172 N6200 series hardware specifications on page 178 N7000 series hardware specifications on page 182 N7x50T series hardware specifications on page 185 EXN1000 hardware specifications on page 187 EXN4000 hardware specifications on page 190 EXN3000 hardware specifications on page 193 EXN3200 hardware specifications on page 197 EXN3500 hardware specifications on page 198 How the measurements are made These published system measurements are conseratie. The following assumptions, conditions, and obserations apply to these measurements: Line oltage is either 100V AC or 200V AC. Current and power are steady state rms alues. Heat dissipation in BTU/hour is based on Watts multiplied by Measurements are taken at room ambient. Data is collected for each indiidual controller, controller module, or storage expansion unit, not for clustered systems or other combinations (except for platforms that hae two controllers in one chassis). Each controller or storage expansion unit is fully populated with a particular drie type and speed and exercised with multiple threads of a disk stress test program. Controllers or controller modules with PCI slots are fully populated and are exercised with test program. 148 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

185 To account for customer work loads that exceed these conditions, the total system workload is calculated using random disk_qual to obtain electrical current, power, and heat dissipation alues. If the system configuration causes fan speed to increase or decrease, the data is collected in that mode. Because fan speed can ary for a gien set of conditions, the worst case set of numbers is presented. Electrical requirements for systems containing performance accelerator modules are measured with the maximum number of these modules installed in the system. Conerting watts to olt-amps (VA) Use the following formula to calculate VA from watts: VA = Watts/PF PF = 0.95 Watts = Watts listed in the indiidual tables Important information about ambient temperature IBM N series systems hae ariable speed cooling fans. At higher ambient temperatures, the fans will spin faster and consume more power. This may counteract some energy saings anticipated by rasing the ambient temperature. You should operate your system within the ambient temperature range of C. As the temperature increases, the reliability and life expectancy of electronics and hard disk dries decreases. N3150 hardware specifications The following tables list the physical characteristics and specifications of your N3150 storage system. CAUTION: Two people are required to lift the N3150 system during installation. Note: Operating at the extremes of the enironmental requirements might increase the risk of deice failure. Table 94. N3150 physical characteristics Weight 1 controller module, 12 SATA HDDs: kg (58.2 lbs) 1 controller module, 12 SAS HDDs: kg (49.8 lbs) Rack unit 2U Height 8.73 cm (3.44 in.) Width cm (17.6 in.) Depth With cable management arms: 61.2 cm (24.1 in) Table 95. N3150 system clearance dimensions Front-cooling Rear-cooling 25.4 cm (10 in.) 30.5 cm (12 in.) Chapter 4. Site planning 149

186 Table 95. N3150 system clearance dimensions (continued) Front- and rear-maintenance 76.2 cm (30 in.) Table 96. N3150 enironmental requirements Operating temperature maximum range Operating temperature recommended range Nonoperating temperature range Relatie humidity maximum operating range Relatie humidity recommended operating range Nonoperating relatie humidity range Maximum wet bulb temperature Maximum altitude Acoustic leel 50 F to 104 F (10 C to 40 C) 68 F to 77 F (20 C to 25 C) -40 F to 158 F (-40 C to 70 C) 20% to 80% (non-condensing) 40% to 55% 10% to 95% (non-condensing) 29 C (84.2 F) 3000 m (10,000 ft.) 66dBa@1m@23 C 7.2bels@1m@23 C Table 97 lists the maximum and nominal power for the N3150. Table 97. N3150 electrical power requirements Maximum electrical power V ac, 8-3 A per node, Hz Nominal electrical power V ac, 16 A; V ac, 6 A, Hz Wet bulb (caloric alue) 2270 Btu/hr In the following tables, Worst-case indicates a system running with one PSU and high fan speed. Typical Per PSU/System, two PSUs indicates a system running one PSU on one circuit and a system running two PSUs on two circuits. 150 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

187 Table 98. N3150 electrical requirements with one controller module, with and without the 10-GbE mezzanine card Input oltage 100V 200V Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Dries Worst-case, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Worst-case, single PSU Per PSU Typical 100 GB (SSD) GB (SAS) GB (SAS) GB (SAS) x 1-TB (SATA) TB (SATA) TB (SATA) TB (SATA) GB (SSD) GB (SAS) GB (SAS) GB (SAS) x 1-TB (SATA) TB (SATA) TB (SATA) TB (SATA) GB (SSD) 1, , GB (SAS) 1, , GB (SAS) 1, , GB (SAS) 1, , x 1-TB (SATA) 1, , TB (SATA) 1, , TB (SATA) 1, , TB (SATA) 1, , System, two PSUs Table 99. N3150 electrical requirements with two controller modules, with and without the 10-GbE mezzanine card Input oltage 100V 200V Input current measured, A Dries Worst-case, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Worst-case, single PSU Per PSU Typical 100 GB (SSD) GB (SAS) GB (SAS) (SAS) TB (SAS) (12 dries) TB (SATA) TB (SATA) TB (SATA) TB (SAS) GB (SSD) GB (SSD) System, two PSUs Chapter 4. Site planning 151

188 Table 99. N3150 electrical requirements with two controller modules, with and without the 10-GbE mezzanine card (continued) Input oltage 100V 200V Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Dries Worst-case, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Worst-case, single PSU Per PSU Typical 100 GB (SSD) GB (SAS) GB (SAS) GB (SAS) TB (SAS) (12 dries) TB (SATA) TB (SATA) TB (SATA) TB (SAS) GB (SSD) GB (SSD) GB (SSD) 1, , GB (SAS) 1, , GB (SAS) 1, , GB (SAS) 1, , TB (SAS) (12 dries) 1, , TB (SATA) 1, ,076 1, ,058 2 TB (SATA) 1, ,103 1, ,079 3 TB (SATA) 1, ,130 1, ,287 4 TB (SAS) 1, ,058 1, , GB (SSD) 1, GB (SSD) System, two PSUs N3220 and N3240 hardware specifications The following tables list the characteristics and requirements for your hardware. CAUTION: Two people are required to lift the N3220 system during installation. Three people are required to lift the N3240 system during installation. Note: Operating at the extremes of the enironmental requirements might increase the risk of deice failure. Table 100. N3220 and N3240 system physical characteristics Weight 2857-A12, 2857-A22 Single controller : 22.6 kg (49.8 lb) 2857-A14, 2857-A24 Two controller: 25.3 kg (55.8 lb) Single controller : 43.8 kg (96.5 lb) Two controller: 44.7 kg (98.4 lb) 152 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

189 Table 100. N3220 and N3240 system physical characteristics (continued) Rack units 2857-A12, 2857-A22 2U 2857-A14, 2857-A24 4U Height 2857-A12, 2857-A cm (3.4 in) 2857-A14, 2857-A cm (6.88 in.) Width 2857-A12, 2857-A cm (17.6 in.) 2857-A14, 2857-A cm (17.7 in) Depth 2857-A12, 2857-A cm (24.4 in) 2857-A14, 2857-A cm (25.7 in) Table 101. N3220 and N3240 system clearance dimensions Front-cooling 15.3 cm (6 in.) 2857-A12, 2857-A22 Rear-cooling Front-maintenance 2857-A14, 2857-A A12, 2857-A A14, 2857-A A12, 2857-A A14, 2857-A cm (12 in.) 55.9 cm (25 in.) Table 102. N3220 and N3240 system enironmental requirements Operating temperature maximum range Operating temperature recommended range Nonoperating temperature range 50 F to 104 F (10 C to 40 C) 68 F to 77 F (20 C to 25 C) -40 F to 158 F (-40 C to 70 C) Relatie humidity 20 to 80% noncondensing Recommended operating temperature relatie humidity range 40 to 55% Maximum wet bulb temperature 28 C (82 F) Maximum altitude 3050 m (10,000 ft.) Acoustic leel 2857-A12, 2857-A C 2857-A14, 2857-A C C C Table 103 on page 154 lists the maximum electrical power for the N3220 and N3240 Chapter 4. Site planning 153

190 Table 103. N3220 and N3240 maximum electrical power System N3220 N3240 Maximum electrical power V ac, 10-4 A, Hz V ac, 12-5 A, Hz Note: 1. In the following tables, Worst-case indicates a system running with one PSU and high fan speed, with power distributed oer one power cord. Per PSU indicates typical power needs, per PSU, for a system operating under normal condition. System indicates typical power needs for two PSUs in a system operating under normal condition and power distributed oer two power cords GB, 600 GB, and 900 GB SAS dries are supported for the N TB, 2 TB and 3 TB SATA dries, and 100 GB SSDs are supported for the N3240. Table 104. N3220 electrical requirements with one controller module with a FC or 10 GbE mezzanine card and either 450 GB or 600 GB disks Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr 100V 200V 215V Worst-case, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical , , , System, two PSUs Table 105. N3220 electrical requirements with one controller module, no mezzanine card and either 450 GB or 600 GB disks Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr 100V 200V 215V Worst-case, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical , , , System, two PSUs 154 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

191 Table 106. N3220 electrical requirements with two controller modules with a FC or 10GbE mezzanine card and either 450 GB or 600 GB disks Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr 100V 200V 215V Worst-case, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical , ,219 1, ,161 1, ,154 System, two PSUs Table 107. N3220 electrical requirements with two controller modules with a FC or 10GbE mezzanine card and 900 GB disks Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr 100V Worst-case, single PSU Per PSU 200V Typical Typical System, two Worst-case, PSUs single PSU Per PSU System, two PSUs , ,263 1, ,229 Table 108. N3220 electrical requirements with two controller modules, no mezzanine card and either 450 GB or 600 GB disks Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr 100V 200V 215V Worst-case, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical , ,215 1, ,157 1, ,147 System, two PSUs Table 109. N3220 electrical requirements with two controller modules, no mezzanine card and 900 GB disks 100V 200V Typical Typical Input oltage Worst-case, single PSU Per PSU System, two PSUs Worst-case, single PSU Per PSU System, two PSUs Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr , ,263 1, ,229 Chapter 4. Site planning 155

192 Table 110. N3220 electrical requirements with two controller modules, no mezzanine card, and 800 GB disk dries 100V 200V Typical Typical Input oltage Worst-case, single PSU Per PSU System, two PSUs Worst-case, single PSU Per PSU System, two PSUs Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr , , Table 111. N3220 electrical requirements with two controller modules, no mezzanine card and 200 GB SSD dries Input oltage 100V 200V Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Dries Worst-case, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Worst-case, single PSU Per PSU Typical 200 GB (SSD) x 200 GB (SSD) and x 900 GB HDD 200 GB (SSD) x 200 GB (SSD) and x 900 GB HDD 200 GB (SSD) 1, , x 200 GB (SSD) and 1, ,168 1, ,215 20x 900 GB HDD System, two PSUs Table 112. N3220 electrical requirements with two controller modules, no mezzanine card, and 1.2 TB disk dries 100V 200V Typical Typical Input oltage Worst-case, single PSU Per PSU System, two PSUs Worst-case, single PSU Per PSU System, two PSUs Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr , ,302 1, ,274 Table 113. N3240 electrical requirements with one controller module with an FC or a 10 GbE mezzanine card and either 1 TB, 2 TB, or 3 TB disks Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W 100V 200V 215V Worst -case, 2+2 PSU Per PSU Typical System, four PSUs Worstcase, 2+2 PSU Per PSU Typical System, four PSUs Worstcase, 2+2 PSU Per PSU Typical System, four PSUs 156 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

193 Table 113. N3240 electrical requirements with one controller module with an FC or a 10 GbE mezzanine card and either 1 TB, 2 TB, or 3 TB disks (continued) Input oltage Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr 100V 200V 215V Worst -case, 2+2 PSU Per PSU Typical System, four PSUs Worstcase, 2+2 PSU Per PSU Typical System, four PSUs Worstcase, 2+2 PSU Per PSU Typical 1, ,669 1, ,628 1, ,622 System, four PSUs Table 114. N3240 electrical requirements with one controller module, no mezzanine card and either 1 TB or 2 TB disks Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr 100V 200V 215V Worst -case, 2+2 PSU Per PSU Typical System, four PSUs Worst -case, 2+2 PSU Per PSU Typical System, four PSUs Worst -case, 2+2 PSU Per PSU Typical , ,646 1, ,598 1, ,591 System, four PSUs Table 115. N3240 electrical requirements with one controller module, no mezzanine card and 3 TB disks Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr 100V 200V 215V Worst -case, 2+2 PSU Per PSU Typical System, four PSUs Worst -case, 2+2 PSU Per PSU Typical System, four PSUs Worst -case, 2+2 PSU Per PSU Typical , ,669 1, ,625 1, ,622 System, four PSUs Table 116. N3240 electrical requirements with two controller modules with an FC or a 10 GbE mezzanine card and either 1 TB or 2 TB disk dries, or a 10 GbE mezzanine card and 3 TB disks Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr 100V 200V 215V Worstcase, 2+2 PSU Per PSU Typical System, four PSUs Worstcase, 2+2 PSU Per PSU Typical System, four PSUs Worstcase, 2+2 PSU Per PSU Typical , ,919 1, , ,915 System, four PSUs Chapter 4. Site planning 157

194 Table 117. N3240 electrical requirements with two controller modules with an FC mezzanine card and 3 TB disks Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr 100V 200V 215V Worstcase, 2+2 PSU Per PSU Typical System, four PSUs Worstcase, 2+2 PSU Per PSU Typical System, four PSUs Worstcase, 2+2 PSU Per PSU Typical , , ,891 1, ,881 System, four PSUs Table 118. N3240 electrical requirements with two controller modules, no mezzanine card and either 1 TB or 2 TB disks Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr 100V 200V 215V Worst -case, 2+2 PSU Per PSU Typical System, four PSUs Worst -case, 2+2 PSU Per PSU Typical System, four PSUs Worst -case, 2+2 PSU Per PSU Typical , ,861 1, ,813 1, ,806 System, four PSUs Table 119. N3240 electrical requirements with two controller modules, no mezzanine card and 3 TB disks Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr 100V 200V 215V Worst -case, 2+2 PSU Per PSU Typical System, four PSUs Worst -case, 2+2 PSU Per PSU Typical System, four PSUs Worst -case, 2+2 PSU Per PSU Typical , ,867 1, ,830 1, ,813 System, four PSUs Table 120. N3240 electrical requirements with two controller modules and 12 disks Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr 100V 200V 215V Worst -case, 2+2 PSU Per PSU Typical System, four PSUs Worst -case, 2+2 PSU Per PSU Typical System, four PSUs Worst -case, 2+2 PSU Per PSU Typical , ,420 1, ,390 1, ,386 System, four PSUs 158 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

195 Table 121. N3240 electrical requirements with two controller modules and 24 SAS 4 TB disks 100V 200V Typical Typical Input oltage Worst -case, single PSU Per PSU System, two PSUs Worst -case, single PSU Per PSU System, two PSUs Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr , ,857 1, ,742 Table 122. N3240 electrical requirements with two controller modules, no mezzanine card and 200 GB SSD disk dries Input oltage 100V 200V Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Dries (in GB) Worst-case, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Worst-case, single PSU Per PSU Typical 200 SSD SSD SSD 1, ,202 1, ,168 System, two PSUs N3300, N3400 and N3600 hardware specifications The following tables list the characteristics and requirements for your hardware. CAUTION: Two people are required to lift the N3300 or N3400 system during installation. Three people are required to lift the N3600 system during installation. Note: Operating at the extremes of the enironmental requirements might increase the risk of deice failure. Table 123. N3300, N3400 and N3600 system physical characteristics Weight 2859-A10, 2859-A20, 2859-A11, 2859-A21 Actie/actie (or high aailability) controller with 12 SAS disk dries: 31.1 kg (68.6 lb) 2862-A10, 2862-A20 Single controller with no disk dries: 19.5 kg (43.0 lb) Actie/actie (or high aailability) controller with 20 SAS disk dries: 51 kg (112 lb) Single controller with no disk dries: 32.6 kg (72 lb) Chapter 4. Site planning 159

196 Table 123. N3300, N3400 and N3600 system physical characteristics (continued) Rack units Height Width Depth 2859-A10, 2859-A20, 2859-A11, 2859-A21 2U 2862-A10, 2862-A20 4U 2859-A10, 2859-A20, 2859-A11, 2859-A cm (3.5 in.) 2862-A10, 2862-A cm (6.95 in.) All models 44.6 cm (17.6 in.) 2859-A10, 2859-A20, 2859-A11, 2859-A cm (22.4 in) 2862-A10, 2862-A cm (23 in) Table 124. N3300, N3400 and N3600 system clearance dimensions Front-cooling 10 in. (25.4 cm) Rear-cooling 12 in. (30.5 cm) Front-maintenance 30 in. (76.2 cm) Rear-maintenance 30 in. (76.2 cm) Table 125. N3300, N3400 and N3600 system enironmental requirements Operating temperature maximum range 50 F to 104 F Operating temperature recommended range Nonoperating temperature range (10 C to 40 C) 68 F to 77 F (20 C to 25 C) -40 F to 158 F (-40 C to 70 C) Relatie humidity 20 to 80% noncondensing Recommended operating temperature relatie humidity range 40 to 55% Maximum wet bulb temperature 28 C (82 F) Maximum altitude 3050 m (10,000 ft.) Acoustic leel N3300, N C N C C C Table 126 on page 161 lists the maximum electrical power for the N3300, N3400 and N IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

197 Table 126. N3300, N3400 and N3600 maximum electrical power System N3300 and N3400 N3600 Maximum electrical power V ac, 10-4 A, Hz V ac, 12-5 A, Hz Note: 1. In the following tables, Worst-case indicates a system running with one PSU and high fan speed, with power distributed oer one power cord. Per PSU indicates typical power needs, per PSU, for a system operating under normal condition. System indicates typical power needs for two PSUs in a system operating under normal condition and power distributed oer two power cords GB SAS dries are supported for the N3300, N3400 and N TB and 3 TB SATA dries are supported for the N3300 and N3400. Table 127. N3300 electrical requirements - one controller module 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Input oltage 300 GB SAS dries 450 GB SAS dries 600 GB SAS dries 500 GB SATA dries 750 GB SATA dries 1TB SATA dries 2TB SATA dries Worstcase Per PSU System Worstcase Per PSU System Chapter 4. Site planning 161

198 Table 127. N3300 electrical requirements - one controller module (continued) Input oltage 300 GB SAS dries 450 GB SAS dries 600 SAS dries 500 GB SATA dries 750 GB SATA dries 1TB SATA dries 2TB SATA dries 300 GB SAS dries 450 GB SAS dries 600 SAS dries 500 GB SATA dries 750 GB SATA dries 1TB SATA dries 2TB SATA dries Input power frequency, Hz 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worstcase Per PSU System Worstcase Per PSU System to IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

199 Table 128. N3300 electrical requirements - two controller modules Input oltage 300 GB SAS dries 450 GB SAS dries 600 GB SAS drie 500 GB SATA dries 750 GB SATA dries 1TB SATA dries 2TB SATA dries 300 GB SAS dries 450 GB SAS dries 600 GB SAS drie 500 GB SATA dries 750 GB SATA dries 1TB SATA dries 2TB SATA dries 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worstcase Per PSU System Worstcase Per PSU System Chapter 4. Site planning 163

200 Table 128. N3300 electrical requirements - two controller modules (continued) Input oltage 300 GB SAS dries 450 GB SAS dries 600 GB SAS drie 500 GB SATA dries 750 GB SATA dries 1TB SATA dries 2TB SATA dries Input power frequency, Hz 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worstcase Per PSU System Worstcase Per PSU System to 60 Table 129. N3300 electrical requirements - one controller module, no disks Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Input power frequency, Hz 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worst-case Per PSU System Worst-case Per PSU System to 60 Table 130. N3300 electrical requirements - two controller modules, no disks Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worst-case Per PSU System Worst-case Per PSU System IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

201 Table 130. N3300 electrical requirements - two controller modules, no disks (continued) Input oltage Input power frequency, Hz 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worst-case Per PSU System Worst-case Per PSU System 50 to 60 Table 131. N3400 electrical requirements - one controller module Input oltage Input current measured, A 300 GB SAS dries 450 GB SAS dries 600 GB SAS dries 500 GB SATA dries 750 GB SATA dries 1TB SATA dries 2TB SATA dries 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worstcase Per PSU System Worstcase Per PSU System Chapter 4. Site planning 165

202 Table 131. N3400 electrical requirements - one controller module (continued) Input oltage Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr 300 GB SAS dries 450 GB SATA dries 600 GB SAS dries 500 GB SATA dries 750 GB SATA dries 1TB SATA dries 2TB SATA dries 300 GB SAS dries 450 GB SAS dries 600 GB SAS dries 500 GB SATA dries 750 GB SATA dries 1TB SATA dries 2TB SATA dries Input power frequency, Hz 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worstcase Per PSU System Worstcase Per PSU System to IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

203 Table 132. N3400 electrical requirements - two controller modules Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W 300 GB SAS dries 450 GB SAS dries 600 GB SAS dries 500 GB SATA dries 750 GB SATA dries 1TB SATA dries 2TB SATA dries 300 GB SAS dries 450 GB SAS dries 600 GB SAS dries 500 GB SATA dries 750 GB SATA dries 1TB SATA dries 2TB SATA dries 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worstcase Per PSU System Worstcase Per PSU System Chapter 4. Site planning 167

204 Table 132. N3400 electrical requirements - two controller modules (continued) Input oltage Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr 300 GB SAS dries 450 GB SAS dries 600 GB SAS dries 500 GB SATA dries 750 GB SATA dries 1TB SATA dries 2TB SATA dries Input power frequency, Hz 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worstcase Per PSU System Worstcase Per PSU System to 60 Table 133. N3400 electrical requirements - one controller module, no disks Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Input power frequency, Hz 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worst-case Per PSU System Worst-case Per PSU System to 60 Table 134. N3400 electrical requirements - two controller modules, no disks Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worst-case Per PSU System Worst-case Per PSU System IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

205 Table 134. N3400 electrical requirements - two controller modules, no disks (continued) Input oltage Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Input power frequency, Hz 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worst-case Per PSU System Worst-case Per PSU System to 60 Table 135. N3600 electrical requirements - one controller module Input oltage 300 GB SAS dries 450 GB SAS dries 500 GB SATA dries 750 GB SATA dries 1TB SATA dries 300 GB SAS dries 450 GB SAS dries 500 GB SATA dries 750 GB SATA dries 1TB SATA dries 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worstcase Per PSU System Worstcase Per PSU System Chapter 4. Site planning 169

206 Table 135. N3600 electrical requirements - one controller module (continued) Input oltage 300 GB SAS dries 450 GB SAS dries 500 GB SATA dries 750 GB SATA dries 1TB SATA dries Input power frequency, Hz 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worstcase Per PSU System Worstcase Per PSU System to 60 Table 136. N3600 electrical requirements - two controller modules Input oltage 300 GB SAS dries 450 GB SAS dries 500 GB SATA dries 750 GB SATA dries 1TB SATA dries 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worstcase Per PSU System Worstcase Per PSU System IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

207 Table 136. N3600 electrical requirements - two controller modules (continued) Input oltage 300 GB SAS dries 450 GB SAS dries 500 GB SATA dries 750 GB SATA dries 1TB SATA dries 300 GB SAS dries 450 GB SAS dries 500 GB SATA dries 750 GB SATA dries 1TB SATA dries Input power frequency, Hz 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worstcase Per PSU System Worstcase Per PSU System to 60 Table 137. N3600 electrical requirements - one controller module, no disks Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Input power frequency, Hz 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worst-case Per PSU System Worst-case Per PSU System to 60 Chapter 4. Site planning 171

208 Table 138. N3600 electrical requirements - two controller modules, no disks Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Input power frequency, Hz 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worst-case Per PSU System Worst-case Per PSU System to 60 N6000 series system hardware specifications kg ( lbs) sc00168 DANGER The weight of this part or unit is between 44 and 54 kg (97 and 118 lb). It takes three persons to safely lift this part or unit. (C010) The following tables list the characteristics and requirements for the N6000 series system. Note: Operating at the extremes of the enironmental requirements might increase the risk of deice failure. Table 139. N6000 series physical characteristics Weight Rack units Height Width Depth 6U A10: 44.4 kg (97.8 lb) A20: 52.2 kg (115 lb) A11: 44.9 kg (99 lb) A21: 53.2 kg (117.3 lb) A12: 44.8 kg (98.8 lb) A22: 53.1 kg (117 lb) 25.9 cm (10.2 in.) 44.7 cm (17.6 in.) 61.7 cm (24.3 in.) without cable tray 71.3 cm (28.1 in.) with cable tray 172 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

209 Table 140. N6000 series clearance dimensions Front-cooling All ersions Rear-cooling All ersions Front-maintenance All ersions Rear-maintenance All ersions 15.2 cm (6 in.) 30.5 cm (12 in.) 76.2 cm (30 in.) 91.4 cm (36 in.) Table 141. N6000 series enironmental requirements Operating temperature maximum range 50 F to 104 F (10 C to 40 C) Operating temperature recommended range 68 F to 77 F (20 C to 25 C) Nonoperating temperature range -40 F to 149 F (-40 C to 65 C) Relatie humidity Recommended operating temperature relatie humidity range Maximum wet bulb temperature Maximum altitude Acoustic leel - Normal operating conditions at 22 C at sea leel 20 to 80% noncondensing 40 to 55% 28 C (82 F) 3050 m (10,000 ft.) 61 dba sound pressure (LpA) The following tables list the maximum electrical power for the N6000 series systems and the electrical requirements for different configurations of the N6000 series systems. Table 142. N6000 series systems maximum electrical power System Maximum electrical power N6000 series systems V ac, 12-8 A, Hz In the following tables, worst-case indicates a system running with one PSU and high fan speed. Typical per PSU/System, two PSUs indicates a system running one PSU on one circuit and a system running two PSUs on two circuits. Chapter 4. Site planning 173

210 Table 143. N6040 electrical requirements one controller module Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Input power frequency, Hz 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical to 60 System, two PSUs Table 144. N6040 electrical requirements two controller modules Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Input power frequency, Hz 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical to 60 System, two PSUs Table 145. N6040 electrical requirements with two PAM I or II cards one controller module Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Input power frequency, Hz 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical to 60 System, two PSUs 174 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

211 Table 146. N6040 electrical requirements with four PAM I or II cards two controller modules Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Input power frequency, Hz 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical to 60 System, two PSUs Table 147. N6060 electrical requirements one controller module Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Input power frequency, Hz 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical to 60 System, two PSUs Table 148. N6060 electrical requirements two controller modules Input oltage 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Input power frequency, Hz Worstcase, single PSU Typical Per PSU System, two PSUs Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical to 60 System, two PSUs Chapter 4. Site planning 175

212 Table 149. N6060 electrical requirements with two PAM I or II cards one controller module Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Input power frequency, Hz 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical to 60 System, two PSUs Table 150. N6060 electrical requirements with four PAM I or II cards two controller modules Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Input power frequency, Hz 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical to 60 System, two PSUs Table 151. N6070 electrical requirements one controller module Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Input power frequency, Hz 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical to 60 System, two PSUs 176 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

213 Table 152. N6070 electrical requirements two controller modules Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Input power frequency, Hz 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical to 60 System, two PSUs Table 153. N6070 electrical requirements with four PAM I or II cards one controller module Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Input power frequency, Hz 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical to 60 System, two PSUs Table 154. N6070 electrical requirements with eight PAM I or II cards two controller modules Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Input power frequency, Hz 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical to 60 System, two PSUs Chapter 4. Site planning 177

214 N6200 series hardware specifications The following tables list the characteristics and requirements for your hardware kg (68-80 lbs) n DANGER The weight of this part or unit is between 30.9 and 36.4 kg (68 and 80 lb). It takes three persons to safely lift this part or unit. (C010) Note: Operating at the extremes of the enironmental requirements might increase the risk of deice failure. Table 155. N6200 series physical characteristics Weight Rack units 2858-C10 and 2858-C15 (single enclosure with one controller): 30.9 kg (68 lb) 2858-C20, 2858-C21, and and 2858-C25 (single enclosure with two controllers): 36.4 kg (80 lb) 2858-C22 (single enclosure with two controllers): 33.7 kg (74.3 lb) 2858-E12 (single enclosure with one controller and one IOXM): 33.7 kg (74.3 lb) 2858-E11, 2858-E15, and 2858-E16 (single enclosure with one controller and one IOXM): 33.6 kg (74 lb) 2858-E21, 2858-E25, and 2858-E26 (two enclosures, each with one controller and one IOXM): 67.2 kg (148 lb) 2858-E22 (two enclosures, each with one controller and one IOXM): 67.4 kg (148.6 lb) 3U for single enclosure models 6U for dual enclosure models Height Width Depth 13 cm (5.12 in.) for single enclosure models 26 cm (10.24 in.) for dual enclosure models 44.7 cm (17.6 in.) 61 cm (24 in.) without bezel65.5 cm (25.8 in.) with beze1 178 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

215 Table 156. N6200 series clearance dimensions Airflow Front 25.4 cm (10 in.) Serice Rear Front Rear 30.5 cm (12 in.) 76.2 cm (30 in.) 76.2 cm (30 in.) Table 157. N6200 series enironmental requirements Operating temperature maximum range Operating temperature recommended range Nonoperating temperature range Operating relatie humidity Nonoperating relatie humidity Recommended operating temperature relatie humidity range Maximum wet bulb temperature Maximum altitude Acoustic leel - Normal operating conditions at 23 C at sea leel 50 F to 104 F (10 C to 40 C) 68 F to 77 F (20 C to 25 C) -40 F to 158 F (-40 C to 70 C) 20 to 80% noncondensing 10 to 95% noncondensing (in original container) 40 to 55% 28 C (82 F) 3050 m (10,000 ft.) 55.5 dba sound pressure (LpA) 7.5 B sound power (LWAd) The following tables list the maximum electrical power for the N6200 series systems and the electrical requirements for different configurations of the N6200 series systems. Table 158. N6200 series systems maximum electrical power System Maximum electrical power N6200 series systems V ac, 12-8 A, Hz. In the following tables, Worst-case indicates a system running with one PSU and high fan speed. Typical Per PSU/System, two PSUs indicates a system running one PSU on one circuit and a system running two PSUs on two circuits. Chapter 4. Site planning 179

216 Table 159. N6210 electrical requirements one controller node, with one 256-Gb Flash Cache module Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Input power frequency, Hz 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Worstcase, single PSU 2.11 Per PSU Typical to 60 System, two PSUs Table 160. N6210 electrical requirements two controller nodes, with one 256-Gb Flash Cache module per node Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Input power frequency, Hz 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical to 60 System, two PSUs Table 161. N6220 electrical requirements one controller node, with one 512-GB Flash Cache module Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Input power frequency, Hz 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs 1, ,021 1, , to IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

217 Table 162. N6220/N6240 electrical requirements two controller nodes, with one 256-GB or one 512-GB Flash Cache module per controller node Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Input power frequency, Hz 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs 2, ,591 2, , to 60 Note: N6220 does not support the 256-GB Flash Cache module. Table 163. N6220/N6240 electrical requirements one controller node, with one 256-GB or one 512-GB Flash Cache module, and one I/O expansion module Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Input power frequency, Hz 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs 1, ,256 1, , to 60 Note: N6220 does not support the 256-GB Flash Cache module. Table 164. N6270 electrical requirements two controller nodes, with one 512-GB or one 1-TB Flash Cache module per controller node Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Chapter 4. Site planning 181

218 Table 164. N6270 electrical requirements two controller nodes, with one 512-GB or one 1-TB Flash Cache module per controller node (continued) Input oltage Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Input power frequency, Hz 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs 2, ,884 2, , to 60 Table 165. N6250/N6270 electrical requirements one controller node, with one 512-GB or one 1-TB Flash Cache module, and one I/O expansion module Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Input power frequency, Hz 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs 1, ,393 1, , to 60 N7000 series hardware specifications kg ( lbs) sc00168 The following tables list the hardware characteristics and enironmental and electrical requirements for N7000 series systems. DANGER The weight of this part or unit is between 32 and 55 kg (70.5 and lb). It takes three persons to safely lift this part or unit. (C010) Note: Operating at the extremes of the enironmental requirements might increase the risk of deice failure. 182 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

219 Table 166. N7000 series system physical characteristics Weight Rack units Height Width Depth 2866-A11, 2867-A A21, 2867-A A11, 2867-A A21, 2867-A A11, 2867-A A21, 2867-A kg (121 lb) kg (242 lb) 6U 12U 263 mm (10.4 in) 526 mm (20.8 in) 446 mm (17.6 in) 695 mm (27.4 in) without cable management tray 782 mm (30.8 in) with cable management tray Table 167. N7000 series system clearance dimensions Front-cooling All ersions 6 in. (15.2 cm) 25 in. (63.5 cm) Front-maintenance All ersions Rear-cooling All ersions 12 in. (30.5 cm) Rear-maintenance All ersions 40 in. (102 cm) Table 168. N7000 series system enironmental requirements 50 F to 104 F(10 C to 40 C) Operating temperature maximum range 68 F to 77 F(20 C to 25 C) Operating temperature recommended range -40 F to 149 F(-40 C to 65 C) Nonoperating temperature range 10 to 90% noncondensing Relatie humidity Recommended operating temperature relatie humidity range Maximum wet bulb temperature Maximum altitude,2 3 Acoustic leel - Normal operating conditions at 22 C at sea leel 40 to 55% 28 C (82 F) 2133 m (7,000 ft.) 56.5 dba sound pressure (LpA) Chapter 4. Site planning 183

220 Table 168. N7000 series system enironmental requirements (continued) 1. Noise emission notes: a. L WAd is the declared sound power emission leel for a production series of machines. b. L pam is the mean alue of the sound pressure emission leels at the operator position (if any) for a production series of machines. c. <L pa > m is the mean alue of the space-aeraged sound pressure emission leels at the one-meter positions for a production series of machines. d. N/A = Not Applicable (no operator position). e. All measurements are made in accordance with ISO DIS 779 and reported in conformance with ISO DIS 7574/4. f. N/A - not aailable. 2. The upper limit of the dry bulb temperature must be derated 1 C per 137 m (450 ft) aboe 915 m (3000 ft). 3. The upper limit of the wet bulb temperature must be derated 1 C per 274 m (900 ft) aboe 305 m (1000 ft). 4. Leels are for a single system installed in a 2101-N00 36U EIA rack with the center of the unit approximately 1500 mm (59 in.) off the floor. 5. All measurements made in accordance with ISO 7779, and declared in conformance with ISO In the following tables, worst-case indicates a system running with one PSU and high fan speed. Typical indicates a system running two PSUs on two circuits. Table 169. N7600 and N7700 electrical requirements Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Input power frequency, Hz 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worst-case Typical single PSU/system Worst-case / /2.8 Typical single PSU/system / / / / to 60 Table 170. N7600 and N7700 electrical requirements with four Performance Accelerator Module I or II cards Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Input power frequency, Hz 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worst-case, single PSU Typical single PSU/system Worst-case, single PSU Typical single PSU/system / / / / / / to IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

221 Table 171. N7800 and N7900 electrical requirements Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Input power frequency, Hz 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worst-case Typical single PSU/system Worst-case Typical single PSU/system / / / / / / to 60 Table 172. N7800 and N7900 electrical requirements with fie Performance Accelerator Module I or II cards Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Input power frequency, Hz 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worst-case, single PSU Typical single PSU/system Worst-case, single PSU Typical single PSU/system / / / / / / to 60 N7x50T series hardware specifications The following tables list the characteristics and requirements for your hardware. 55 kg ( lbs) sc00169 DANGER The weight of this part or unit is more than 55 kg (121.2 lb). It takes specially trained persons, a lifting deice, or both to safely lift this part or unit. (C011) Note: Operating at the extremes of the enironmental requirements might increase the risk of deice failure. Chapter 4. Site planning 185

222 Table 173. N7x50T series physical characteristics Weight Per enclosure: 58.6 kg (129.2 lb) Both enclosures: kg (258.4 lb) Rack units Per enclosure: 6U Both enclosures: 12U Height Width Per enclosure: 25.9 cm (10.2 in.) Both enclosures: 51.8 cm (20.4 in.) 44.7 cm (17.6 in.) Depth Without cable management arms: 62.7 cm (24.7 in.) With cable management arms: 74.6 cm (29.4 in.) Table 174. N7x50T series clearance dimensions Airflow Front 15.2 cm (6 in.) Rear 30.5 cm (12 in.) Serice Front 63.5 cm (25 in.) Rear 102 cm (40 in.) Table 175. N7x50T series enironmental requirements Operating temperature maximum range Operating temperature recommended range Nonoperating temperature range Operating relatie humidity Nonoperating relatie humidity Recommended operating temperature relatie humidity range Maximum wet bulb temperature Maximum altitude Acoustic leel - Normal operating conditions at 23 C at sea leel 50 F to 104 F (10 C to 40 C) 68 F to 77 F (20 C to 25 C) -40 F to 158 F (-40 C to 70 C) 20 to 80% noncondensing 10 to 95% noncondensing (in original container) 40 to 55% 28 C (82 F) 3050 m (10,000 ft.) 56.5 dba sound pressure (LpA) 7.0 B sound power (LWAd) The following tables list the maximum electrical power for the N7x50T series systems and the electrical requirements for different configurations of the N7x50T series systems. 186 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

223 Table 176. N7x50T series systems maximum electrical power System Maximum electrical power N7x50T series systems V ac, A, Hz. In the following tables, Worst-case indicates a system running with one PSU and high fan speed. Typical Per PSU/System, two PSUs indicates a system running one PSU on one circuit and a system running two PSUs on two circuits. Table 177. N7550T two controller modules electrical requirements: Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Input power frequency, Hz 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worstcase, single PSU 50 to 60 Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical NA NA NA System, two PSUs Table 178. Electrical requirements N7950T controller module and I/O expansion module, with all card slots filled, 25W draw per card Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Input power frequency, Hz 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical to 60 System, two PSUs EXN1000 hardware specifications The following table lists the characteristics and requirements for the EXN1000 storage expansion unit. The following tables list the characteristics and requirements for your hardware. Chapter 4. Site planning 187

224 DANGER Three people are required to lift the EXN1000 during installation. Note: Operating at the extremes of the enironmental requirements might increase the risk of deice failure. Table 179. EXN1000 physical characteristics Weight With maximum number of disk dries Empty 68 lbs (30.8 kg) 50.6 lbs (23 kg) Rack units 3 Height Width Depth 5.25 in. (13.3 cm) 17.6 in. (44.7 cm) 22 in. (55.2 cm) Table 180. EXN1000 clearance dimensions Front cooling 6 in. (15.3 cm) Rear cooling and maintenance 12 in. (30.5) Front maintenance 25 in. (55.9 cm) Table 181. EXN1000 enironmental requirements Operating temperature range 41 F to 104 F (5 C to 40 C) Nonoperating temperature range -40 F to 140 F (-40 C to 60 C) Relatie humidity Acoustic leel - Normal operating conditions at 23 C at sea leel 10 to 80% noncondensing 58 db sound pressure (LpA) 188 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

225 Table 181. EXN1000 enironmental requirements (continued) 1. Noise emission notes: a. L WAd is the declared sound power emission leel for a production series of machines. b. L pam is the mean alue of the sound pressure emission leels at the operator position (if any) for a production series of machines. c. <L pa > m is the mean alue of the space-aeraged sound pressure emission leels at the one-meter positions for a production series of machines. d. N/A = Not Applicable (no operator position). e. All measurements are made in accordance with ISO DIS 779 and reported in conformance with ISO DIS 7574/4. f. N/A - not aailable. 2. The upper limit of the dry bulb temperature must be derated 1 C per 137 m (450 ft) aboe 915 m (3000 ft). 3. The upper limit of the wet bulb temperature must be derated 1 C per 274 m (900 ft) aboe 305 m (1000 ft). 4. Leels are for a single system installed in a 2101-N00 36U EIA rack with the center of the unit approximately 1500 mm (59 in.) off the floor. 5. All measurements made in accordance with ISO 7779, and declared in conformance with ISO Table 182. EXN1000 electrical requirements (7.2K speed dries, HE PSUs) Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Size (GB) 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worst-case, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Worst-case, single PSU Per PSU Typical 750 GB TB TB GB TB TB GB TB TB System, two PSUs Table 183. EXN1000 electrical requirements (7.2K speed dries) Input oltage Input current measured, A Size (GB) 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worst-case, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Worst-case, single PSU Per PSU Typical 250 GB GB GB GB TB System, two PSUs Chapter 4. Site planning 189

226 Table 183. EXN1000 electrical requirements (7.2K speed dries) (continued) Input oltage Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Size (GB) 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worst-case, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Worst-case, single PSU Per PSU Typical 250 GB GB GB GB TB GB GB GB GB TB System, two PSUs EXN4000 hardware specifications The following tables list the characteristics and requirements for your EXN4000 storage expansion unit. DANGER Three people are required to lift the EXN4000 during installation. Table 184. EXN4000 physical characteristics Weight Rack units Height Width Depth With maximum number of disk dries Empty 77 lbs (35 kg) 50.6 lbs (23 kg) 3U 5.25 in. (13.3 cm) 17.6 in. (44.8 cm) 20 in. (50.9 cm) Table 185. EXN4000 clearance dimensions Front cooling 6 in. (15.3 cm) Rear cooling and maintenance 12 in. (30.5) Front maintenance 25 in. (55.9 cm) 190 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

227 Table 186. EXN4000 enironmental requirements Operating temperature maximum range 50 F to 104 F (10 C to 40 C) Operating temperature recommended range 68 F to 77 F (20 C to 25 C) Nonoperating temperature range -40 F to 149 F (-40 C to 65 C) Relatie humidity Recommended operating temperature relatie humidity range Maximum wet bulb temperature Maximum altitude 2, 3 Acoustic leel 1, 4 10 to 90% noncondensing 40 to 55% 28 C (82 F) 3050 m (10,000 ft.) C C 1. Noise emission notes: a. L WAd is the declared sound power emission leel for a production series of machines. b. L pam is the mean alue of the sound pressure emission leels at the operator position (if any) for a production series of machines. c. <L pa > m is the mean alue of the space-aeraged sound pressure emission leels at the one-meter positions for a production series of machines. d. N/A = Not Applicable (no operator position). e. All measurements are made in accordance with ISO DIS 779 and reported in conformance with ISO DIS 7574/4. f. N/A - not aailable. 2. The upper limit of the dry bulb temperature must be derated 1 C per 137 m (450 ft) aboe 915 m (3000 ft). 3. The upper limit of the wet bulb temperature must be derated 1 C per 274 m (900 ft) aboe 305 m (1000 ft). 4. Leels are for a single system installed in a 2101-N00 36U EIA rack with the center of the unit approximately 1500 mm (59 in.) off the floor. 5. All measurements made in accordance with ISO 7779, and declared in conformance with ISO Chapter 4. Site planning 191

228 Table 187. EXN4000 electrical requirements (10K speed dries) Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Size (GB) 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worst-case, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Worst-case, single PSU Per PSU Typical 72 GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB System, two PSUs Table 188. EXN4000 electrical requirements (15K speed dries) Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Size (GB) 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worst-case, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Worst-case, single PSU Per PSU Typical 72 GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB System, two PSUs Table 189. EXN4000 electrical requirements (HE PSUs, 15K speed dries) Input oltage Input current measured, A Size (GB) 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worst-case, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Worst-case, single PSU Per PSU Typical 144 GB GB GB GB System, two PSUs 192 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

229 Table 189. EXN4000 electrical requirements (HE PSUs, 15K speed dries) (continued) Input oltage Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Size (GB) 100 to 120V 200 to 240V Worst-case, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Worst-case, single PSU Per PSU Typical 144 GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB System, two PSUs Note: Worst-case indicates a system running with one PSU and high fan speed. Typical indicates a system running two PSUs on two circuits. EXN3000 hardware specifications The following tables list the characteristics and requirements for your EXN3000 storage expansion unit. DANGER Three people are required to lift the EXN3000 during installation. Note: For detailed EXN3000 electrical requirements with SAS and SATA dries, see Table 194 on page 195 and Table 196 on page 195. Note: Operating at the extremes of the enironmental requirements might increase the risk of deice failure. Table 190. EXN3000 physical characteristics Weight With maximum number of disk dries Without disk dries Empty Rack units Height Width Depth 98.3 lbs (44.6 kg) 52.8 lbs (24 kg) 21.5 lbs (9.8 kg) 4U 6.9 in. (17.5 cm) 17.7 in. (44.9 cm) 25.7 in. (65.4 cm) Table 191. EXN3000 clearance dimensions Front (cooling) Rear (cooling and maintenance) Front (maintenance) 6 in. (15.3 cm) 12 in. (30.5 cm) 25 in. (55.95 cm) Chapter 4. Site planning 193

230 Table 192. EXN3000 enironmental requirements Operating temperature maximum range 10 C to 40 C (50 F to 104 F) Operating temperature recommended range 20 C to 25 C (68 F to 77 F) Nonoperating temperature range -40 C to 65 C (-40 F to 149 F) Recommended operating range (relatie humidity) 40 to 55% Maximum operating range (relatie humidity) 20 to 80% (non-condensing) Non-operating range (relatie humidity) 10 to 95% (non-condensing). Maximum wet bulb temperature 28 C (82 F) Maximum altitude 3050 m (10,000 ft.) Acoustic leel Idle 5.7 bels (SATA dries) 6.0 bels (SAS dries) Operating 6.7 bels (SATA dries) 7.0 bels (SAS dries) Table 193. EXN3000 electrical requirements Wet bulb (caloric alue) 2,201 Btu/hr (fully loaded shelf, SAS dries) 1,542 Btu/hr (fully loaded shelf, SATA dries) Maximum electrical power 100 to 240 VAC 16-6 A (8-3A max per inlet); 50/60Hz Nominal Electrical Power 100 to 120 VAC, 6 A; 200 to 240 VAC, 3 A, 50/60 Hz (SAS dries) 100 to 120 VAC, 4.4 A; 200 to 240 VAC, 2.1 A, 50/60 Hz (SATA dries) In the following tables: Note: 1. Worst-case indicates a system running with two PSUs, high fan speed, and power distributed oer two power cords. 2. Per PSU pair indicates typical power needs, per PSU pair, for a system operating under normal conditions. 3. System indicates typical power needs for four PSUs in a system operating under normal conditions and power distributed oer four power cords. Note: Depending on the disk drie type, your EXN3000 might hae two or four power supplies. EXN3000s with SAS disk dries hae four power supplies and require the use of four power outlets. 194 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

231 Table 194. EXN3000 electrical requirements SAS dries Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Size (GB) 100 to 120V 200 to 240V (200V actual) 200 to 240V (215V actual) Worstcase, two PSUs Per PSU pair Typical System, four PSUs Worstcase, two PSUs Per PSU pair Typical System, four PSUs Worstcase, two PSUs Per PSU pair Typical n/a n/a System, four PSUs n/a Table 195. EXN3000 electrical requirements 4TB SAS dries Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr 100 to 120V 200 to 240V (200V actual) Worst-case, two PSUs Per PSU pair Typical System, two PSUs Worst-case, two PSUs Per PSU pair Typical System, two PSUs Table 196. EXN3000 electrical requirements SATA dries Input oltage Input current measured, A Size (GB) 100 to 120V 200 to 240V (200V actual) 200 to 240V (215V actual) Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical TB TB n/a 3 TB (SSD) System, two PSUs Chapter 4. Site planning 195

232 Table 196. EXN3000 electrical requirements SATA dries (continued) Input oltage Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Size (GB) 100 to 120V 200 to 240V (200V actual) 200 to 240V (215V actual) Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Worstcase, single PSU Per PSU Typical TB TB n/a 3 TB (SSD) System, two PSUs TB TB n/a 3 TB (SSD) Table 197. Electrical requirements SATA dries, GB or GB disk dries: Input oltage 100 to 120V 200 to 240V (200V actual) Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Qty. Worstcase, single PSU Typical Per PSU Sys., two PSUs Worstcase, single PSU Typical Per PSU Sys., two PSUs Table 198. Electrical requirements SATA dries, 6-100GB SSD dries with 18-1TB or 18-3TB disk dries: Input oltage 100 to 120V 200 to 240V (200V actual) Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Size (GB) Worstcase, single PSU Typical Per PSU Sys., two PSUs Worstcase, single PSU Typical Per PSU Sys., two PSUs 1-TB TB TB TB TB TB IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

233 EXN3200 hardware specifications The following tables list the characteristics and requirements for your EXN3200. Table 199. EXN3200 physical characteristics Weight Fully configured 145 lbs (65.77 kg) With midplane, four PSUs, 81 lbs (36.74 kg) two IOMs, four HDD carriers Rack units 4U Height 6.9 in. (17.5 cm) Width 19 in. (48.26 cm) Depth from mounting flange to rear chassis bulkhead 28 in. (71 cm) Table 200. EXN3200 clearance dimensions Front (cooling) Rear (cooling) Front (maintenance) Rear (maintenance) 10 in. (25.4 cm) 12 in. (30.5 cm) 30 in. (76.2 cm) 30 in. (76.2 cm) Table 201. EXN3200 enironmental requirements Operating temperature maximum range 10 C to 40 C (50 F to 104 F) Operating temperature recommended range 20 C to 25 C (68 F to 77 F) Nonoperating temperature range -40 C to 70 C (-40 F to 158 F) Recommended operating range (relatie humidity) 40 to 55% Maximum operating range (relatie humidity) 20 to 80% (non-condensing) Non-operating range (relatie humidity) 10 to 95% (non-condensing). Maximum wet bulb temperature 29 C (84.2 F) Maximum altitude 3000 m (10,000 ft.) Acoustic Normal operating conditions at 23 C at sea leel 7.2 bels Table 202. EXN3200 electrical power requirements Wet bulb (caloric alue) 1,542 Btu/hr (fully loaded shelf, SATA dries) Maximum electrical power 100 to 240 VAC 16-6 A (8-3A max per inlet); 50/60 Hz 0.7 kva Chapter 4. Site planning 197

234 Table 202. EXN3200 electrical power requirements (continued) Nominal Electrical Power 100 to 120 VAC, 4.4 A; 200 to 240 VAC, 2.1 A, 50/60 Hz (SATA dries) Table 203. EXN3200 electrical requirements Input oltage 100 to 240V (100V actual) 200 to 240V (200V actual) Total input current measured, A Total input power measured, W Total thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Size (GB) Worstcase, two PSUs Typical Per PSU pair Sys., four PSUs Worstcase, two PSUs Typical Per PSU pair 3-TB TB TB TB Sys., four PSUs 3-TB 2,970 1,122 2,243 3,137 1,181 2,362 4-TB 2,909 1,155 2,309 2,854 1,120 2,240 Note: 1. Worst-case indicates a system running with two PSUs, high fan speed, and power distributed oer two power cords. 2. Per PSU pair indicates typical power needs, per PSU pair, for a system operating under normal conditions. 3. System indicates typical power needs for four PSUs in a system operating under normal conditions and power distributed oer four power cords. EXN3500 hardware specifications The following tables list the hardware specifications for your EXN3500 storage expansion unit. DANGER Two people are required to lift the EXN3500 during installation. Table 204. EXN3500 physical characteristics Note: Operating at the extremes of the enironmental requirements might increase the risk of deice failure. Weight Rack units Height Width Depth With maximum number of disk dries Without disk dries Empty 49 lbs (22.2 kg) 38.9 lbs (17.6 kg) 17.8 lbs (8.1 kg) 2U 3.4 in. (8.5 cm) 19 in. (48 cm) 21.4 in. (54.3 cm) 198 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

235 Table 205. EXN3500 clearance dimensions Front (cooling) Rear (cooling and maintenance) Front (maintenance) 6 in. (15.3 cm) 12 in. (30.5 cm) 25 in. (55.9 cm) Table 206. EXN3500 enironmental and electrical requirements Operating temperature maximum range 10 C to 40 C (50 F to 104 F) Operating temperature recommended range 20 C to 25 C (68 F to 77 F) Nonoperating temperature range -40 C to 70 C (-40 F to 158 F) Recommended operating range (relatie humidity) 40 to 55% Maximum operating range (relatie humidity) 20 to 80% (non-condensing) Non-operating range (relatie humidity) 10 to 95% (non-condensing) Maximum wet bulb temperature 28 C (82 F) Maximum altitude 3045 m (10,000 ft.) 6.2 B (LWAd) (2 PCMs) Acoustic leel (SAS dries) Input power frequency, Hz (AC) 50 to 60 Hz Input power oltage, V RMS (AC) (auto-ranging) 100 to 120V or 200 to 240V 100 to 240 VAC, A; 50/60 Hz Maximum electrical power In the following tables: Note: 1. Worst-case indicates a system running with two PSUs, high fan speed, and power distributed oer two power cords. 2. Per PSU pair indicates typical power needs, per PSU pair, for a system operating under normal conditions. 3. System indicates typical power needs for four PSUs in a system operating under normal conditions and power distributed oer four power cords. Table 207. EXN3500 electrical requirements SAS dries 100 to 120V 200 to 240V (200V actual) Input oltage Input current measured, A Size Worst-case, single PSU Per PSU pair Typical System, four PSUs Worst-case, two PSUs Per PSU pair Typical 450 GB GB GB TB System, four PSUs Chapter 4. Site planning 199

236 Table 207. EXN3500 electrical requirements SAS dries (continued) 100 to 120V 200 to 240V (200V actual) Input oltage Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Size Worst-case, single PSU Per PSU pair Typical System, four PSUs Worst-case, two PSUs Per PSU pair Typical 450 GB GB GB TB GB GB GB TB 1, , System, four PSUs Table 208. EXN3500 electrical requirements 200 GB SSD dries Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Qty. in storage expansion unit 100 to 120V 200 to 240V (200V actual) Worst-case, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Worst-case, single PSU Per PSU Typical , , System, two PSUs Table 209. EXN3500 electrical requirements 800 GB SSD dries 100 to 120V 200 to 240V (200V actual) Input oltage Input current measured, A Input power measured, W Thermal dissipation, BTU/hr Worst-case, single PSU Per PSU Typical System, two PSUs Worst-case, single PSU Per PSU Typical , , System, two PSUs Important factors to consider when installing N series systems When installing the N series storage system, you must keep in mind certain enironmental factors. When you are planning your installation gie careful consideration to the following: Weight of the N series storage system. See Hardware specifications on page 148. The N series storage system requires three people to install it. 200 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

237 Rack considerations Rack considerations. The clearances and mounting requirements are specified in Rack considerations. Power supplies and power requirements. You may need to proide new serice or install an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS). See Power supplies and power requirements for more information. System input power. See System input power on page 204 for more information. Thermal considerations. See Thermal considerations on page 204. Floor loading. See Floor-loading specifications on page 205. Floor planning. See Floor plan considerations on page 205 for more information. Cabling. Both Ethernet and Fibre Channel cabling will be required. See Chapter 4, Site planning, on page 141 and Chapter 5, Cable planning, on page 207. AutoSupport. AutoSupport is a sophisticated, eent-drien logging agent featured in the Data ONTAP operating software and inside each N series storage systems that continuously monitors the health of your system. See Chapter 6, AutoSupport, on page 211. The four recommended racks for the N series storage system are: IBM 7014 Model T00 (a 36U high rack) IBM 7014 Model T42 (a 42U high rack) IBM 2101 Model N00 (a 36U high rack) IBM 2101 Model N42 (a 42U high rack) The N series storage system can also be mounted in some other IBM and non-ibm racks, proided the rack meets all the requirements specified in Appendix C, Specifications for IBM and non-ibm racks, on page 219. When clustering N series storage systems, the physical proximity of the cluster nodes is determined by the Infiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables that are ordered. Feature codes are aailable for cluster cables ranging in size from 2 m to 30 m. For more information, see Chapter 2, IBM N series hardware features, on page 13. Power supplies and power requirements N series storage systems contain two hot-swappable power supplies. They are both actie at the same time, but hae sufficient capacity that if one fails the other can assume the full load. Each power supply has a separate power cord. Separate power sources for each power cord are recommended. Power cords with attached plugs are proided for most ac-powered systems. The power cords are ordered by feature code and at least one power cord must be specified when the ordering the N series storage system. A feature code contains two cords, one for each power supply. Power cables ary by country and are listed in Appendix B, Power cord list for N series storage systems, on page 215. Specific oltage information for NAS storage systems and storage expansion units is proided in the following tables: N3150 storage systems: Chapter 4. Site planning 201

238 Table 97 on page 150 Table 98 on page 151 Table 99 on page 151 N3220 and N3240 storage systems: Table 103 on page 154 Table 104 on page 154 Table 105 on page 154 Table 106 on page 155 Table 107 on page 155 Table 108 on page 155 Table 109 on page 155 Table 110 on page 156 Table 111 on page 156 Table 112 on page 156 Table 113 on page 156 Table 114 on page 157 Table 115 on page 157 Table 116 on page 157 Table 117 on page 158 Table 118 on page 158 Table 119 on page 158 Table 120 on page 158 Table 121 on page 159 Table 122 on page 159 N3300 storage systems: Table 127 on page 161 Table 128 on page 163 Table 129 on page 164 Table 130 on page 164 N3400 storage systems: Table 131 on page 165 Table 132 on page 167 Table 133 on page 168 Table 134 on page 168 N3600 storage systems: Table 135 on page 169 Table 136 on page 170 Table 137 on page 171 Table 138 on page 172 N6000 series storage systems: Table 143 on page 174 Table 144 on page 174 Table 145 on page 174 Table 146 on page 175 Table 147 on page IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

239 Table 148 on page 175 Table 149 on page 176 Table 150 on page 176 Table 151 on page 176 Table 152 on page 177 Table 153 on page 177 Table 154 on page 177 N6200 series storage systems: Table 159 on page 180 Table 160 on page 180 Table 161 on page 180 Table 161 on page 180 Table 162 on page 181 Table 163 on page 181 Table 164 on page 181 Table 165 on page 182 N7000 series storage systems: Table 169 on page 184 Table 170 on page 184 Table 171 on page 185 Table 172 on page 185 N7x50T series storage systems: Table 177 on page 187 Table 178 on page 187 EXN1000 storage expansion units: Table 182 on page 189 Table 183 on page 189 EXN4000 storage expansion units: Table 187 on page 192 Table 188 on page 192 Table 189 on page 192 EXN3000 storage expansion units: Table 194 on page 195 Table 195 on page 195 Table 196 on page 195 Table 197 on page 196 Table 198 on page 196 EXN3200 storage expansion units: Table 202 on page 197 Table 203 on page 198 EXN3500 storage expansion units: Table 207 on page 199 Table 208 on page 200 Table 209 on page 200 Chapter 4. Site planning 203

240 System input power Important: 1. Before you install the N series storage system, you must make sure that its proposed location meets the power requirements. If necessary, consult an electrician to determine if your electrical infrastructure can support the N series storage system that you are installing. 2. Consider security when planning your power requirements. (For example, your power mains should be in a secure area.) See Security on page 206 for more information. The following input power considerations apply to all system units. See Rack considerations on page 201 for additional information about power. Electrical considerations These topics should be considered before you install a system. Thermal considerations Primary computer power serice Although a dedicated power supply is not necessary, for maximum reliability, the computer power panel should connect to feeders that do not sere other loads. Connect electrical noise-producing deices to panels separate from those feeding the system units. Grounding For information about grounding your N series storage systems and storage expansion units, see the Installation and Setup Instructions for your N series products. To ensure proper grounding, a licensed electrician should check the grounding and receptacles for conformance with the country electrical codes. Computer room emergency power-off controls As a safety precaution, you should proide computer room emergency power-off controls for disconnecting the main serice wiring that supplies the computer equipment. Install these controls at a conenient place for the operator and next to the main exit doors of the room. Lightning protection You should install lightning protection deices when in enironments such as these: An oerhead power serice supplies the primary power. The area is subject to electrical storms or equialent-type power surges. Three-phase power If your rack power distribution uses three-phase power, consult a licensed electrician to ensure that the loads are properly balanced. When installed in a rack, all components, including the N series storage system, should hae front-to-back air flow. Failure to do so results in a thermal loop, where the heated exhaust air from one unit is drawn into the air intake of another, which further heats the air. Eentually a unit will shut down or fail to operate due to high temperature. 204 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

241 Nsipg001 Airflow back Racks 1220 mm cold aisle width Airflow Cold aisle front Perforated tiles or gratings Air conditioner Racks front back 2440 mm between center lines of hot and cold aisle Hot aisle back Racks front Airflow Floor-loading specifications Floor plan considerations Figure 11. Example of cold aisle/hot aisle rack cabinet configuration Consult with an engineer to determine your floor-loading specifications. See Hardware specifications on page 148 for information on the N series storage system weight. See Appendix C, Specifications for IBM and non-ibm racks, on page 219 for rack floor-loading specifications. You need to create a floor plan before installing a N series storage system. This section describes floor planning considerations and how to create a floor plan. It also describes what security measures to keep in mind when doing floor planning. Before you create your floor plan, consider these ariables: Flow of work and personnel within the area Placement to optimize cooling, such as positioning the unit oer a cutout in a raised floor Routing of cables and length of cables Location of safety equipment Future expansion Creating a floor plan It is important to ensure that the total weight of installed racks and equipment does not exceed the maximum amount of weight that the floor in your facility Chapter 4. Site planning 205

242 supports. You need to create a floor plan before installing a N series storage system. This section discusses floor planning considerations and how to create a floor plan. It also discusses security measures to keep in mind when doing your floor planning. Note: You might need to prepare and analyze seeral plans before choosing a final one. If you install more than one N series storage system in more than one installation stage, prepare a separate plan for each installation stage. Begin with an accurate drawing of the installation area (blueprints and floor plans are appropriate). Include the following items in your floor plan: Serice and operational clearances. If the N series storage system will be on a raised floor, consider any objects that might obstruct cable routing and the height of the raised floor. If the N series storage system will not be on a raised floor, consider these factors: Placement of cables to minimize obstruction Amount of additional cable required if the cable is indirectly routed between N series storage system (for example, along the walls or suspended from the ceiling) Location of: Power receptacles Air conditioning equipment and controls File cabinets, desks, and other office equipment Room emergency power-off controls All entrances, walkways, exits, windows, columns, and pillars LAN and telephone connections. When you finish the floor plan, reiew it to make sure that all cables to be connected to the N series storage system are long enough. Also ensure that the N series storage system has enough clearance. Security In forming your floor plan, you should consider ways to keep your N series storage system secure. For security purposes, use these precautions: Choose a trusted administrator. Place any equipment that may disrupt operations (for example, power supplies) in a secure location. Keep rack cabinet keys in a secure location. 206 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

243 Chapter 5. Cable planning General considerations Before ordering, the customer is asked to deelop specific planning information concerning the physical layout of the installation. This chapter can help you plan your layout by presenting useful planning information for interconnecting the system units and deices. You must plan the type of cable, cable path, and cable length. Consider not only your current needs but also your anticipated growth and the relocation of personnel. To assist with the installation of your system, you should note cable paths on your floor plan. The customer is responsible for planning for the installation of interconnecting cables, including the proper lightning and surge protection as necessary and should contact the appropriate contractor for guidance and assistance as required. In preparing for cabling, consider the following: Where applicable, electrical and physical specifications of cables that you currently hae and plan to use with the N series storage system must be compatible with the standards mentioned in this manual. If no standard is specifically mentioned in this manual, the standards for the interface on that adapter must be met. Lengths and paths of cables. Communication signal cables should be installed away from power lines or other sources of electrical interference. Labeling of cables and ports you currently hae in order to indicate which deices you want attached to them. Electrostatic discharge (ESD) considerations. In particular, unprotected patch panels, punch blocks, or other intermediate routing or switching deices used in cabling can allow ESD into the network. Note: Lightning protection must be proided on any cable that traels outside of the building in which the system or deices are installed. Contact a cabling endor about proiding lightning protection for those cables. Fiber-optic cables do not require lightning protection. The following cabling is required: 1. Power cables for power supplies and rack power distribution. 2. Category 5 or better copper Ethernet cables with RJ-45 connectors. Note: EXN3000 and EXN3500 ACP cabling requires Category 6 or better Ethernet cables with RJ-45 connectors or 62.5 um fiber optic cable with LC connectors for Fiber Ethernet ports or 62.5 um fiber optic cable with LC connectors for Fibre Channel ports. 5. LVD SCSI cable for optional direct SCSI-attached tape backup. The connector on the rear of the N series storage system is a VHDCI mini 68 pin connector. Copyright IBM Corp. 2005,

244 6. If clustering, Infiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables are aailable for N7000 series models and can be ordered in the following lengths and types: Table 210. Infiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables Description Machine Model Feature 2m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 5m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 30m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable Copper-Fiber Conerter 2864, 2865, 2866, 2867, 2868, , 2865, 2866, 2867, 2868, , 2865, 2866, 2867, 2868, , 2865, 2866, 2867, 2868, 2869 A20/G20/A A20/G20/A A20/G20/A A20/G20/A Cable measuring Accurate measuring of cables is critical to a successful and efficient installation. Do not guess or estimate your cable lengths. Some cable lengths are fixed. For example, the Infiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables are fixed length cables that restrict the physical distance of the cluster nodes in the rack. The power cords, depending on the feature code, are also of fixed lengths. For the Ethernet and Fibre Channel cabling, consider the following: 1. Cabling that exits the N series storage system is typically run in a cable management tray, included with the N series storage system. 2. Aoid sharp bends and do not route cables near rack doors to aoid crimping cables. 3. Account for raised floor height, if appropriate. Cable labeling Cable labels can be used to organize your cabling. The fields on a cable label are: Room The room number, or other information about the physical location of the deice. Person The name of the person who uses the deice. Telephone # The nearest telephone number to the deice. Deice type This could be a printer, plotter, TTY, or similar deice. Deice ID The deice ID is determined when the software is configured on the system. Software location code The software location code is the link between the hardware and software. This code appears in the software configuration menus and in the hardware diagnostic menus. 208 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

245 Note: For specific location code information, see the Diagnostic Information manual for your system. Adapter type The adapter type number is located on a label attached to the end of the adapter. Note: Some of the adapters do not hae an adapter type. Interface Name of the asynchronous adapters, and some network adapters, generally includes the name of the interface. For example, Ethernet LAN or Fibre Channel SAN. EIA Used in a rack-type system unit to identify the physical location of the drawer within the rack. The label along the right side of the rack (with rear coer open) indicates numbers from 1, at the bottom, to 32, at the top of the rack. The number at the bottom-right corner of the drawer is the EIA location for this drawer. Slot Physical position within the system unit or drawer where the adapter is located. Each adapter slot is identified by a single digit number. Usually, the number is embossed in the adapter mounting frame. Connector Connector number on the adapter. Most adapters hae only one connector, so this number is 1. Tailgate The number of the tailgate connector to which this cable is attached if tailgates are used. System ID If an installation has more than one system unit, each one must be identified to preent connecting deices to the wrong system unit. The customer determines the System ID. Optical SAS cables for SAS or SATA storage expansion units Optical SAS cables allow connection of EXN3000, EXN3200, and EXN3500 storage expansions to N series controllers at greater distances than is supported with traditional copper SAS cabling. If optical SAS cables are used in a configuration, it is recommended that all SAS connections are optical. It is possible to hae optical between the controllers and the expansions, and copper from expansion to expansion, but not recommended. At no time should the SAS stack cabling transition from optical to copper more than once, for example, controller-optical-sas-expansion 1-copper- expansion 2-optical-expansion 3. These are designed to be used in Stretch MetroCluster enironments where the length limitations of traditional copper cables is insufficient, but extreme distances supported by a Fibre Channel fabric are not required. The fan-out cables (feature codes ) are used between the SAS port on the controller or expansion and a dark fiber patch panel. Each fan-out cable has four LC connections on it to support all four channels in the SAS architecture. These cables require QSFP MPO transceiers that proide the interface between the SAS port and the fan-out cables. Chapter 5. Cable planning 209

246 The fan-out cables are not designed to connect controllers to expansions without a patch panel. For those connections, the actie optical cables (AOC) are a better option. The AOC cables (feature codes ) are designed to be used where patch panels are not implemented. The most common use is as an alternatie to copper cabling within a rack, between expansions. These cables do not require a transceier, because the transceiers are built into the ends of the cables. The most common implementation of optical SAS cabling hae fan-out cables between the controllers and patch panels, then between the patch panels and expansions. AOC cabling is used between expansions. For detailed cabling requirements, see IBM System Storage N series Uniersal SAS and ACP Cabling Guide. 210 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

247 Chapter 6. AutoSupport AutoSupport is a sophisticated, eent-drien logging agent featured in the Data ONTAP operating software and inside each N series storage systems that continuously monitors the health of your system. It keeps a watchful eye on a multitude of preset conditions, automatically sending a status message to IBM Technical Support, and your system administrator if desired, for immediate action to correct potential problems. AutoSupport makes sure that your storage enironment is working at top efficiency. For more information on AutoSupport, go to the N series support website AutoSupport oeriew page at How does AutoSupport work? The AutoSupport feature triggers the automatic sending of notification messages to IBM Serice and Support. AutoSupport also has the ability to send notification messages to one or more customer-specified addresses which can alert recipients to potential problems with the N series storage system. As necessary, IBM Serice and Support will contact customers based on the contact information in the customer s record for resolution of potential system problems. Note: After an occurrence of an eent, an AutoSupport notification is sent to IBM Serice and Support ia HTTPS by a direct connection to the predefined location specified in Data ONTAP. AutoSupport is enabled by default with Data ONTAP or higher when you configure your N series storage system for the first time. IBM strongly encourages customers to enable AutoSupport. AutoSupport enables the IBM System Storage N series machines to send diagnostic information back to IBM when error conditions are encountered within the machines. AutoSupport can be enabled ia the command line interface ia the following command: options autosupport.enable on AutoSupport can also be enabled ia the FilerView web browser user interface by selecting Filer Configure AutoSupport in the left-hand naigation frame, and then selecting Yes from the drop-down list box next to AutoSupport Enabled. On later ersions of Data ONTAP, AutoSupport is enabled by default when you configure your N series storage system for the first time. After a grace period of 24 hours, AutoSupport messages start being generated. Note: You can disable AutoSupport at any time using the autosupport.enable option, but you are strongly adised to leae it enabled. Interaction with mail hosts N series storage systems do not function as mail hosts, they rely on another host at the customer site that listens on the SMTP port (25) to send mail to the customer-specified addresses. AutoSupport requires at least one host reachable by an N series storage system that runs an SMTP serer or a mail forwarder, such as the sendmail program. Copyright IBM Corp. 2005,

248 Subject line of AutoSupport messages The subject line of the messages sent by the AutoSupport mechanism contains a text string that identifies the reason for the notification. The subject also contains a relatie prioritization of the message, using syslog seerity leels from DEBUG to EMERGENCY. The messages and other information in the notification should be used to check on the problem being reported. The format of the subject line is as follows: System Notification from (message) Short messages for urgent eents Customers can specify up to fie addresses of recipients in which the N series storage systems can send a short alert notification containing only the reason for the alert to these recipients. The short messages contain the reason for the notification in the subject line and note the time of failure. These messages are triggered only by specific urgent eents. This feature is useful for system administrators who read messages on alphanumeric pagers. Recipients of AutoSupport messages Customers can specify up to fie recipient addresses for standard AutoSupport notification. Technical Support response When IBM Technical Support receies an alert AutoSupport notification, it takes correctie action to resole the problems. IBM Technical Support initiates a case and then contacts the customer to further inestigate the situation or to proide a correctie action to the customer. High-aailability considerations The AutoSupport notification messages from a N series storage system in a high-aailability configuration are different from the AutoSupport notification messages from a standalone N series storage system in the following ways: The AutoSupport messages from a N series storage system in a high-aailability configuration contain information about the N series storage system's partner, such as the partner system ID and the partner host name. In takeoer mode, if you reboot the lie N series storage system, two AutoSupport messages are sent to notify the recipients of the reboot. The lie N series storage system sends one message; the failed N series storage system sends the other message. The lie N series storage system sends an AutoSupport message after it completes the takeoer process. 212 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

249 Appendix A. Recommended power line sizes This appendix discusses how to determine the power line lengths running from your N series storage system to the power source. Recommended AC power line sizes Longer AC power feeds need to be properly designed to presere oltage leels to the equipment. The wiring from the breaker panel to the power strip, which supplies power to your N series storage system and storage expansion units, can often exceed 50 feet. Note: Total AC wire length = breaker to wall or ceiling outlet + extension cable or ceiling drop. The following tables list the recommended conductor size for 2% oltage drop for a particular distance in feet (taken from the Radio Engineer's Handbook). Table V, single phase recommended conductor sizes 110V, single-phase 20A circuit 30A circuit 40A circuit 50A circuit 25 feet 12 AWG 10 AWG 8 AWG 8 AWG 50 feet 8 AWG 6 AWG 6 AWG 4 AWG 75 feet 6 AWG 4 AWG 4 AWG 2 AWG Table V, single phase recommended conductor sizes 220V, single-phase 20A circuit 30A circuit 40A circuit 50A circuit 25 feet 14 AWG 12 AWG 12 AWG 10 AWG 50 feet 12 AWG 10 AWG 8 AWG 8 AWG 75 feet 10 AWG 8 AWG 6 AWG 6 AWG The following table lists the approximate equialent wire gauge (American Wire Gauge (AWG) to Harmonized Cordage). Table 213. American Wire Gage to Harmonized Cordage equialents AWG Harmonized, mm-mm mm-mm = millimeter squared Copyright IBM Corp. 2005,

250 214 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

251 Appendix B. Power cord list for N series storage systems This appendix contains information about FRU/CRUs and power cords for N series products. FRU/CRU list for N series products For the most current FRU/CRU list for your N series product, access the IBM N series support website, as described in Websites on page xxx, and refer to the FRU (Field Replaceable Units) lists. Power cord list for N series products The following list details the power cord feature codes (FCs) for N series products. FC 9000 (All countries) Power cord, Rack PDU 27 inches Rated 250 V/15 A Product end uses C14; PDU end uses C13. FC 9001 Europe and others Proides power cords for Austria, Belgium, Boliia, Bulgaria, Chile, Croatia, Czech Republic, Egypt, Estonia, European Union, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Indonesia, Latia, Lebanon, Lithuania, Luxemburg, Morocco, Netherlands, Norway, Peru, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Russia, Sloakia, Sloenia, Spain, Suriname, Sweden, Turkey 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A. Attached plug EL 211 (CEE 7-VII) designed for V ac input. FC 9002 United Kingdom and others Proides power cords for United Kingdom, Costa Rica, Cyprus, Guyana, Hong Kong, Ireland, Kuwait, Malta, Oman, Singapore, Sri Lanka 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A. Attached plug EL 210 (13A fuse) designed for V ac input. FC 9003 Japan Proides power cords for Japan 1.83 m (6 feet), unshielded, rated 125 V/15 A. Attached plug EL 302 (JIS C3306) designed for V ac input. FC 9004 U.S., Six Feet (2 m) Proides power cords for U.S., Canada, Mexico, Belize, Columbia, Ecuador, El Salador, Guatemala, Honduras, Korea, Nicaragua, Panama, Philippines, Puerto Rico, Saudi Arabia, Thailand, Venezuela 1.83 m (6 feet), unshielded, rated 125 V/15 A. Attached plug EL 302 (Nema 5-15P) designed for V ac input. FC 9005 Australia, New Zealand Proides power cords for Australia, New Zealand, Uruguay 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A. Attached plug EL 206 (AS 3112) designed for V ac input. Copyright IBM Corp. 2005,

252 FC 9006 Switzerland, Liechtenstein Proides power cords for Switzerland, Liechtenstein 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A. Attached plug EL 203 (SEV 1011) designed for V ac input. FC 9007 Argentina Proides power cords for Argentina 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A. Attached plug EL 219 (IRAM 2073) designed for V ac input. FC 9008 China Proides power cords for China 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A. Attached plug EL 602 (GB 2099/GB 1002) designed for V ac input. FC 9009 Denmark Proides power cords for Denmark 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A. Attached plug EL 213 (DHCR D1) designed for V ac input. FC 9010 India, Pakistan, South Africa Proides power cords for India, Macau, Pakistan, South Africa 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A. Attached plug EL 208 (BS 164-1, BS 546) designed for V ac input. FC 9011 Israel Proides power cords for Israel 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A. Attached plug EL 212 (SI 32) designed for V ac input. FC 9012 Italy Proides power cords for Italy 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A. Attached plug EL 502 (CEI 23-16) designed for V ac input. FC 9013 North America (250 V) Proides power cords for U.S m (6 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/15 A. Attached plug EL 309 (NEMA 6-15P) designed for V ac input. FC 9014 Brazil Proides power cords for Brazil 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A. Attached plug EL 211 (NBR 6147/2000) designed for V ac input FC 9015 Taiwan Proides 125 V power cords for Taiwan 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 125 V/15 A. Attached plug EL 302 (CNS ) designed for V ac input. FC 9016 Taiwan (250 V) Proides 250 V power cords for Taiwan 1.83 m (6 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A. 216 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

253 Attached plug EL 610 (CNS 10917, CNS 690) designed for 250 V ac input. Appendix B. Power cord list for N series storage systems 217

254 218 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

255 Appendix C. Specifications for IBM and non-ibm racks This chapter proides requirements and specifications for 19" racks used by the N series storage system Model N00 rack specifications Table 214. IBM 2101 Model N00 rack specifications Dimensions Height Capacity Width without side panels With side panels Depth with front and rear door installed 1804 mm 71.0 in. 36 EIA Units 623 mm 24.5 in. 650 mm 25.6 in mm 43.3 in. Weight Base rack 244 kg 535 lbs Full rack¹ 816 kg 1795 lbs See T00 and T42 rack weight distribution and floor loading on page 223. Electrical² (sum specified alues for drawers or enclosures in rack) AC rack Power source loading 4.8 maximum in kva (per PDU) 3 Voltage range (V ac) 200 to 240 Frequency (hertz) 50 or 60 Temperature requirements Humidity requirements Noise emissions (see specifications for drawers or enclosures) (see specifications for drawers or enclosures) (see specifications for drawers or enclosures) Clearances Front Back Left Right Install/air flow Rack airflow requirements are a function of the number and type of drawers installed (see item 5 on page 221). Refer to the indiidual drawer specifications. Serice 915 mm (36 in.) 915 mm (36 in.) 0 mm (0 in.) 0 mm (0 in.) 1. Configuration dependent, base rack weight plus the weight of the drawers mounted in the rack. The rack can support up to a maximum weight of 35 lbs/eia (Unit). 2. The total rack power should be deried from the sum of the power used by the drawers in the rack. 3. Each ac Power Distribution Unit (PDU) can supply 4.8 kva. A rack can hae up to four PDUs as required by the drawers mounted in the rack. The power limitations of the PDU single-phase power cord limit the number of drawers that can be plugged into a pair of PDUs. Each PDU single-phase power cord is limited to 24 amps. 4. All rack installations require careful site and facilities planning designed to both address the cumulatie drawer heat output and proide the airflow olumes rates necessary to comply with drawer temperature requirements Model N42 rack specifications Table 215. IBM 2101 Model N42 rack specifications Dimensions Height Capacity 2105 mm 79.3 in. 42 EIA Units Copyright IBM Corp. 2005,

256 Table 215. IBM 2101 Model N42 rack specifications (continued) Width without side panels With side panels Depth with front and rear door installed 623 mm 24.5 in. 650 mm 25.6 in mm 43.3 in. Weight Base rack 216 kg 475 lbs (without PDUs and with standard doors and two side panels) Full rack¹ 930 kg 2045 lbs See T00 and T42 rack weight distribution and floor loading on page 223. Electrical² (sum specified alues for drawers or enclosures in rack) AC rack Power source loading 4.8 maximum in kva (per PDU) 3 Voltage range (V ac) 200 to 240 Frequency (hertz) 50 or 60 Temperature requirements Humidity requirements Noise emissions (see specifications for drawers or enclosures) (see specifications for drawers or enclosures) (see specifications for drawers or enclosures) Clearances Front Back Left Right Install/air flow Rack airflow requirements are a function of the number and type of drawers installed (see item 5 on page 221). Refer to the indiidual drawer specifications. Serice 915 mm (36 in.) 915 mm (36 in.) 0 mm (0 in.) 0 mm (0 in.) 1. Configuration dependent, base rack weight plus the weight of the drawers mounted in the rack. The rack can support up to a maximum weight of 35 lbs/eia (Unit). 2. The total rack power should be deried from the sum of the power used by the drawers in the rack. 3. Each ac Power Distribution Unit (PDU) can supply 4.8 kva. A rack can hae up to four PDUs as required by the drawers mounted in the rack. The power limitations of the PDU single-phase power cord limit the number of drawers that can be plugged into a pair of PDUs. Each PDU single-phase power cord is limited to 24 amps. 4. All rack installations require careful site and facilities planning designed to both address the cumulatie drawer heat output and proide the airflow olumes rates necessary to comply with drawer temperature requirements. 5. For information about the Rear Door Heat exchanger (FC 6858), see the IBM Rear Door Heat exchanger Planning Guide on or see the IBM Power Systems Site Preparation and Physical Planning Guide, SA , or the IBM Storage Solution Rack 2101 Rack Installation and Serice Guide: Model N42, GC Rack specifications Model T00 rack Table 216. IBM 7014 Model T00 rack specifications Dimensions Height Capacity With PDP - DC only Width without side panels With side panels Depth with rear door only Depth with rear door and RS/6000 style front door 1804 mm 71.0 in. 36 EIA Units 1926 mm 75.8 in. 623 mm 24.5 in. 644 mm 25.4 in mm 41.0 in mm 43.3 in. 220 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

257 Table 216. IBM 7014 Model T00 rack specifications (continued) System p (sculptured) style front door 1147 mm 45.2 in. Weight Base rack 244 kg 535 lbs Full rack¹ 816 kg 1795 lbs See T00 and T42 rack weight distribution and floor loading on page 223. Electrical² (sum specified alues for drawers or enclosures in rack) DC rack Power source loading 8.4 maximum in kva³ Voltage range (V dc) -40 to -60 AC rack Power source loading 4.8 maximum in kva (per PDU)⁴ Voltage range (V ac) 200 to 240 Frequency (hertz) 50 or 60 Temperature requirements Humidity requirements Noise emissions (see specifications for drawers or enclosures) (see specifications for drawers or enclosures) (see specifications for drawers or enclosures) Clearances Front Back Left Right Install/air flow Rack airflow requirements are a function of the number and type of drawers installed (see item 5). Refer to the indiidual drawer specifications. Serice 915mm (36 in.) 915mm (36 in.) 915mm (36 in.) 915mm (36 in.) 1. Configuration dependent, base rack weight plus the weight of the drawers mounted in the rack. The rack can support up to a maximum weight of 35 lbs/eia (Unit). 2. The total rack power should be deried from the sum of the power used by the drawers in the rack. 3. The Power Distribution Panel (PDP) on the DC-powered rack can hold up to eighteen (nine per power source) 48 olt 20 to 50 amp circuit breakers (configuration dependent). Each power source supports up to 8.4 kva. Note: Because the N series storage system is an ac-only power unit, it is not recommended that the N series storage system be installed in a dc-only rack. 4. Each ac Power Distribution Unit (PDU) can supply 4.8 kva. A rack can hae up to four PDUs as required by the drawers mounted in the rack. 5. All rack installations require careful site and facilities planning designed to both address the cumulatie drawer heat output and proide the airflow olumes rates necessary to comply with drawer temperature requirements. Model T42 Rack Table 217. IBM 7014 Model T42 rack specifications Dimensions Height Capacity With PDP - DC only Width without side panels With side panels Depth with rear door only Depth with rear door and RS/6000 style front door System p (sculptured) style front door 2015 mm 79.3 in. 42 EIA Units Not applicable 623 mm 24.5 in. 644 mm 25.4 in mm 41.0 in mm 43.3 in mm 45.2 in. Weight Appendix C. Rack Specifications 221

258 Table 217. IBM 7014 Model T42 rack specifications (continued) Base rack Full rack¹ Serice clearance 261 kg 575 lbs 930 kg 2045 lbs See T00 and T42 rack weight distribution and floor loading on page 223. Recommended minimum ertical serice clearance from floor is 2439 mm or 8 feet. All other specifications For all other technical information, see Model T00 rack on page 220. T00 and T42 serice clearances and caster location The serice clearances and caster locations are shown in Figure 12: 915 mm (36 in.) 121 (4.8) Rear coer thickness 20 mm (0.8 in.) 80 (3.1) Caster Location 915 mm (36 in.) Side coer thickness 2x 10 mm (0.4 in.) 915 mm (36 in.) 915 mm (36 in.) Front coer thickness 58 mm (2.4 in.) Cable opening 310 mm (12.2 in.) x 50 mm (2 in.) 2921 mm (115 in.) Front 2474 mm (97.4 in.) Figure 12. Serice clearances and caster locations for the T00 and T42 racks. Note: Rack units are large and heay and are not easily moed. Because maintenance actiities require access at both the front and back, extra room needs to be allowed. The footprint shows the radius of the swinging doors on the I/O rack. The Figure 13 on page 223 shows the minimum space required. T00 and T42 racks multiple attachments 222 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

259 T00 or T42 Rack T00 or T42 Rack Separation 25.4 mm (1 in.) Figure 13. Model T00 and T42 racks multiple attachments T00 racks and T42 racks can be bolted together in a multiple rack arrangement as shown aboe. A kit is aailable including the bolts, spacers, and decoratie trim pieces to coer the 25.4 mm (1 in.) space. For serice clearances, see the serice clearances as shown in the table for the Model T00 rack on page 220. T00 and T42 rack weight distribution and floor loading The T00 and T42 racks can be extremely heay when seeral drawers are present. Table 218 shows the necessary weight distribution distances for the T00 and T42 racks when it is loaded. Table 218. T00 and T42 rack weight distribution Rack System weight (1) lbs (kg) Width (2) in. (mm) Depth (2) in. (mm) 7014-T00 (4) 7014-T00 (5) 7014-T00 (6) 7014-T42 (4) 7014-T42 (5) 7014-T42 (6) Weight distribution distance (3) Front & back in. (mm) 1795 (816) 24.5 (623) 40.2 (1021) 20.3 (515.6), 18.8 (477.5) 1795 (816) 24.5 (623) 40.2 (1021) 20.3 (515.6), 18.8 (477.5) 1795 (816) 24.5 (623) 40.2 (1021) 20.3 (515.6), 18.8 (477.5) 2045 (930) 24.5 (623) 40.2 (1021) 20.3 (515.6), 18.8 (477.5) 2045 (930) 24.5 (623) 40.2 (1021) 20.3 (515.6), 18.8 (477.5) 2045 (930) 24.5 (623) 40.2 (1021) 20.3 (515.6), 18.8 (477.5) Left & right in. (mm) 18.4 (467.4) 0.0 (0.0) 22 (559) 18.4 (467.4) 0.0 (0.0) 27 (686) The following table shows the necessary floor-loading specifications for the T00 and T42 racks when it is loaded. Table 219. T00 and T42 rack floor-loading specifications Rack Floor loading Raised kg/m2 Non-raised kg/m2 Raised lbs/ft2 Non-raised lbs/ft T00 (4) T00 (5) T00 (6) Appendix C. Rack Specifications 223

260 Table 219. T00 and T42 rack floor-loading specifications (continued) Rack Floor loading Raised kg/m2 Non-raised kg/m2 Raised lbs/ft2 Non-raised lbs/ft T42 (4) T42 (5) T42 (6) Rack specifications The following notes are for both of the preceding tables. Note: 1. For maximum weight of fully populated rack, units are lbs with kg in parentheses. 2. For dimensions without coers, units are inches with mm in parentheses. 3. The weight distribution distance in all four directions is the area around the rack perimeter (minus coers) necessary to distribute the weight beyond the perimeter of the rack. Weight distribution areas cannot oerlap with adjacent computer equipment weight distribution areas. Units are inches with mm in parentheses. 4. Weight distribution distance is 1/2 the serice clearance alues shown in the figure plus coer thickness. 5. No left and right weight distribution distance. 6. Left and right weight distribution distance required for a 70 lbs/ft2 raised floor loading objectie. All racks used for N series storage system installation must conform to the specifications in this section. Both the IBM 7014 (Model T00 and Model T42) and the IBM 2101 Model N00 racks conform, but some other racks, including a few from IBM do not. The rack or cabinet must meet the EIA Standard EIA-310-D for 19-inch racks. The front rack opening must be 451 mm wide mm (17.75 in in.), and the rail-mounting holes must be 465 mm mm (18.3 in in.) apart on center (horizontal width between ertical columns of holes on the two front-mounting flanges and on the two rear-mounting flanges). Rail-mounting holes must be 7.1 mm mm (0.28 in in.) in diameter. 224 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

261 571mm (22.50 in.) Rear, No Door 203mm (8.0 in.) Drawer Rail Mounting Flanges 494mm (19.45 in.) 719mm (28.31 in.) Front, No Door 51mm (2.01 in.) 451mm (17.76 in.) 494mm (19.45 in.) Figure 14. Top iew of non-ibm rack specifications dimensions The ertical distance between mounting holes must consist of sets of 3 holes spaced (from bottom to top) 15.9 mm (0.625 in.), 15.9 mm (0.625 in.), and mm (0.5 in.) on center (making each 3-hole set of ertical hole spacing mm (1.75 in.) apart on center). Appendix C. Rack Specifications 225

262 Figure 15. Rack specifications dimensions, top front iew Hole Diameter = 7.1 +/- 0.1mm 465 +/- 0.8mm Rack Mounting Holes Center-to-Center 450 +/- 0.75mm Rack Front Opening EIA Hole Spacing 12.7mm 15.9mm 15.9mm 12.7mm 15.9mm 15.9mm 6.75mm min 12.7mm 15.9mm 15.9mm 12.7mm 15.9mm 15.9mm 6.75mm min Bottom Front of Rack Figure 16. Rack specifications dimensions, bottom front iew The rack or cabinet must be capable of supporting an aerage load of 15.9 kg (35 lbs) of product weight per EIA unit. 226 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

263 For example, a 4-EIA drawer will hae a maximum drawer weight of 63.6 kg (140 lbs). Only ac power drawers are supported in the rack or cabinet. It is strongly recommended that you use a power distribution unit (PDU) that meets the same specifications as IBM PDUs to supply rack power. Each Power Distribution Bus installed in a rack requires a dedicated power line of 200 to 240 V ac and 30 A. Rack or cabinet power distribution deices must meet the drawer power requirements, as well as that of any additional products that will be connected to the same power distribution deice. The rack or cabinet power receptacle (PDU, UPS or multi-outlet strip) must hae a compatible plug type for your drawer or deice. Note: Refer to the sales manual for 7014 or 2101 racks if you want to use PDUs that are designed for 7014 or 2101 racks. The customer is responsible for ensuring that the PDU is compatible with the rack or cabinet and assumes responsibility for any and all agency certifications required. The rack or cabinet must be compatible with drawer mounting rails, including a secure and snug fit of the rail-mounting pins and screws into the rack or cabinet rail support hole. Note: If the rack or cabinet has square holes, a plug-in hole adapter may be required. The plug-in hole adapters are NOT part of the N series rail mounting kit included with eery N series machine. The rails proided with the N series storage system hae been designed and tested to safely support the weight of your drawer or deice. The rails also proide rear tie-down brackets. The front and rear mounting flanges in the rack or cabinet must be 719 mm (28.3 in.) apart and the internal width bounded by the mounting flanges at least 494 mm (19.45 in.), for the IBM rails to fit in your rack or cabinet (see figure, Top View of non-ibm Rack Specifications Dimensions on page Figure 14 on page 225). The rack or cabinet must hae stabilization feet or brackets installed both in the front and rear of the rack, or hae another means of preenting the rack or cabinet from tipping while the drawer or deice is installed or remoed. Examples of some acceptable alternaties: The rack or cabinet may be securely bolted to the floor, ceiling or walls, or to adjacent racks or cabinets in a long and heay row of racks or cabinets. Refer to the Rack Installation Guide for the 7014 or 2101 and the indiidual drawer installation guides for additional information. There must be adequate front and rear serice clearances (in and around the rack or cabinet). The rack or cabinet must hae sufficient horizontal width clearance in the front and rear to allow the drawer to be fully slid into the front and, if applicable, the rear serice access positions (typically this requires mm (36 in.) clearance in both the front and rear). If present, front and rear doors must be able to open far enough to proide unrestrained access for serice or be easily remoable. If doors must be remoed for serice, it is the customer's responsibility to remoe them prior to serice. The rack or cabinet must proide adequate clearance around the rack drawer. There must be adequate clearance around the drawer bezel so that it can be opened and closed, according to the product specifications (refer to the 7014 or 2101 Rack Installation Guides and the indiidual drawer installation guides). Appendix C. Rack Specifications 227

264 Front or rear doors must also maintain a minimum of 51 mm (2 in.) front, 203 mm (8 in.) rear, door-to-mounting flange clearance, and 494 mm (19.4 in.) front, 571 mm (22.5 in.) rear, side-to-side clearance for drawer bezels and cables (see Figure 14 on page 225). The rack or cabinet must proide adequate front-to-back entilation. For optimum entilation, it is recommended the rack or cabinet not hae a front door. If the rack or cabinet has doors, the doors must be fully perforated so that there is proper front-to-back airflow to maintain the required drawer ambient inlet temperature between 10 C and 40 C (50 F and 104 F), with an ideal 22 C (72 F), inside the rack. The perforations must yield 34% minimum open area per square inch. General safety requirements for IBM products installed in a non-ibm rack Any product or component that plugs into either an IBM Power Distribution Unit (PDU) or main power (using a power cord), or uses any oltage oer 42 V ac must be Safety Certified by a Nationally Recognized Test Laboratory (NRTL) for the country in which it will be installed. Some of the items that require safety certification may include: the rack or cabinet (if it contains electrical components integral to the rack or cabinet), fan trays, PDU, uninterruptible power supplies (UPS), multi-outlet strips, or any other products installed in the rack or cabinet that connect to hazardous oltage. Examples of OSHA-approed NRTLs for the USA: UL ETL CSA (with CSA NRTL or CSA US mark) Examples of approed NRTLs for Canada: UL (Ulc mark) ETL (ETLc mark) CSA The European Union requires a CE mark and a Manufacturer's Declaration of Conformity (DOC). Certified products should hae the NRTL logos or marks somewhere on the product or product label. Howeer, proof of certification must be made aailable to IBM upon request. Proof consists of such items as copies of the NRTL license or certificate, a CB Certificate, a Letter of Authorization to apply the NRTL mark, the first few pages of the NRTL certification report, Listing in an NRTL publication, or a copy of the UL Yellow Card. Proof should contain the manufacturer's name, product type and model, standard to which it was certified, the NRTL name or logo, the NRTL file number or license number, and a list of any Conditions of Acceptance or Deiations. A Manufacturer's Declaration is not proof of certification by an NRTL. The rack or cabinet must meet all electrical and mechanical safety legal requirements for the country in which it is installed. The rack or cabinet must be free of exposed hazards (such as oltages oer 60 V dc or 42 V ac, energy oer 240 VA, sharp edges, mechanical pinch points, or hot surfaces). There must be an accessible and unambiguous disconnect deice for each product in the rack, including any PDU. 228 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

265 A disconnect deice may consist of either the plug on the power cord (if the power cord is no longer than 6 feet), the inlet receptacle (if the power cord is of a detachable type), or a power on/off switch, or an Emergency Power Off switch on the rack, proided all power is remoed from the rack or product by the disconnect deice. If the rack or cabinet has electrical components (such as fan trays or lights), the rack must hae an accessible and unambiguous disconnect deice. The rack or cabinet, PDU and Multi-Outlet Strips, and products installed in the rack or cabinet must all be properly grounded to the customer facility ground. There must be no more than 0.1 Ohms between the ground pin of the PDU or rack plug and any touchable metal or conductie surface on the rack and on the products installed in the rack. Grounding method must comply with applicable country's electric code (such as NEC or CEC). Ground continuity can be erified by your IBM serice personnel, after the installation is completed, and should be erified prior to the first serice actiity. The oltage rating of the PDU and multi-outlet strips must be compatible with the products plugged into them. The current and power ratings for the PDU or multi-outlet strips must be at least 1.25 times the sum of the ratings of the products that will plug into it. The current rating of the PDU or multi-outlet strip must be less than 0.80 of the rating for the building supply circuit (as required by the NEC and CEC). Example: A PDU rating of 12A for a 15A wall breaker, and sum of product ratings does not exceed 9.6A. If a UPS is installed, it must meet all the aboe electrical safety requirements as described for a PDU (including certification by an NRTL). The rack or cabinet, PDU, UPS, multi-outlet strips and all products in the rack or cabinet must be installed according to the manufacturer's instructions, and in accordance with all national, state or proince, and local codes and laws. The rack or cabinet, PDU, UPS, multi-outlet strips and all products in the rack or cabinet must be used as intended by the manufacturer (per manufacturer's product documentation and marketing literature). All documentation for use and installation of the rack or cabinet, PDU, UPS, and all products in the rack or cabinet, including safety information, must be aailable on-site. If there is more than one source of power in the rack or cabinet, there must be clearly isible safety labels for "Multiple Power Source" (in the languages required for the country in which the product is installed). If the rack or cabinet or any products installed in the cabinet had safety or weight labels applied by the manufacturer, they must be intact and translated into the languages required for the country in which the product is installed. If the rack or cabinet has doors, the rack becomes a fire enclosure by definition and must meet the applicable flammability ratings (V-0 or better). Totally metal enclosures at least 1 mm (0.04 in.) thick are considered to comply. Nonenclosure (decoratie) materials must hae a flammability rating of V-1 or better. If glass is used (such as in rack doors) it must be safety glass. If wood sheles are used in the rack or cabinet, they must be treated with a UL Listed flame-retardant coating. The rack or cabinet configuration must comply with all IBM requirements for "safe to serice" (contact your IBM Installation Planning Representatie if in doubt). There must be no unique maintenance procedures or tools required for serice. Appendix C. Rack Specifications 229

266 Eleated serice installations, where the products to be sericed are installed between 1.5 m and 3.7 m (5 ft and 12 ft) aboe the floor, require the aailability of an OSHA- and CSA-approed nonconductie step ladder. If a ladder is required for serice, the customer must supply the OSHA- and CSA-approed nonconductie step ladder (unless other arrangements hae been made with the local IBM Serice Branch Office). Products installed oer 2.9 m (12 ft) aboe the floor require a Special Bid to be completed before they can be sericed by IBM serice personnel. For products not intended for rack-mounting to be sericed by IBM, the products and parts that will be replaced as part of that serice must not weigh oer 11.4 kg (25 lbs) (contact your Installation Planning Representatie if in doubt). There must not be any special education or training required for safe sericing of any of the products installed in the racks (contact your Installation Planning Representatie if in doubt). Any rack or cabinet must hae stabilization feet or brackets installed, or hae another means of preenting the rack or cabinet from tipping during product operation or serice. Examples of some acceptable alternaties: The rack or cabinet may be securely bolted to the floor, ceiling or walls, or to adjacent racks or cabinets in a long and heay row of racks or cabinets. It is strongly recommended that the mounting rails that are shipped with the product be used to install it in the rack. The mounting rails that ship with IBM products hae been designed and tested to safely support the product during operation and serice actiities. The mounting rails used on products to be sericed by IBM must be certified for use with the products by an NRTL to all applicable country safety standards. Note: IBM requires that mounting rails must be able to support four times the maximum rated product weight in its worst-case position (fully extended front and rear positions) for one full minute without catastrophic failure. 230 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

267 Appendix D. Optional adapter cards supported by the N3150 Table 220. Mezzanine cards supported by the N3150 Feature Code Feature Code Description GbE Mezzanine card 10 GbE Mezzanine card (FC 2031) This feature proides a mezzanine card with two 10 Gbps Ethernet ports that utilize SFP+ connections to the network. One of feature #2031 is required per controller for 10 Gbps network connections. Copyright IBM Corp. 2005,

268 232 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

269 Appendix E. Optional adapter cards supported by the N3220 and N3240 Table 221. Mezzanine cards supported by the N3220 and N3240 Feature Code Feature Code Description Gb FC Mezzanine card GbE Mezzanine card 8 Gb Mezzanine card (FC 2030) This feature proides a mezzanine card with two Fibre Channel ports that will auto- negotiate to 1, 2, 4, or 8 Gbps speeds. One of feature #2030 is required, per controller, for installations utilizing Fibre Channel connectiity. There are no on-board Fibre Channel ports on the N3220 and N3240 models A22 and A24. Feature #2030 is mutually exclusie of # GbE Mezzanine card (FC 2031) This feature proides a mezzanine card with two 10 Gbps Ethernet ports that utilize SFP+ connections to the network. One of feature #2031 is required per controller for 10 Gbps network connections. Feature #2031 is mutually exclusie to #2030. Copyright IBM Corp. 2005,

270 234 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

271 Appendix F. Optional adapter cards supported by the N3600 IBM supports the following optional PCIe adapter cards in the N3600. Table 222. Optional adapter cards supported by the N3600 Feature Code Feature Code Description 1012 Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) 1013 Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) 1014 Dual-port 4-Gbps FC HBA for disk attachment 1015 Dual-port 4-Gbps FC HBA for tape attachment 1021 Dual-port GbE iscsi target adapter (optical) 1023 Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) 1026 Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iscsi target adapter (copper) 1029 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk and tape attachment 1030 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) 1033 SnapMirror oer Fibre Channel HBA 1036 Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA 1060 Dual-port Mini-SAS Adapter 1062 Single-port 10-Gbps NIC 1063 Dual-port Fibre Channel oer Ethernet (FCoE) Target adapter (optical) 1064 Dual-port Fibre Channel oer Ethernet (FCoE) Target adapter (copper) For the single-node models, the total number of PCIe adapters cannot exceed one. For the dual-node models the total number of PCIe adapters cannot exceed two. For information about monitoring the LEDs for your optional adapter cards, see the IBM System Storage N series Platform Monitoring Guide. Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012) Feature code 1012 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-SX) adapter. This adapter has two LC duplex connectors and supports a maximum distance of 275m using 62.5-micron MMF media and 550m using 50-micron MMF media. For a single-node model (2862-A10), the maximum number of this adapter is one. For a dual-node model (2862-A20), the maximum number of this adapter is two. Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1013) Feature code 1013 is a dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter. This adapter supports 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T Ethernet standards. This adapter has two RJ-45 connectors and supports a maximum distance of 100m using Category 5 or better unshielded twisted pair (UTP) four-pair media. For a single-node model (2862-A10), the maximum number of this adapter is one. For a dual-node model (2862-A20), the maximum number of this adapter is two. Copyright IBM Corp. 2005,

272 Dual-port 4-Gbps FC HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014) Feature code 1014 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA. This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter may only be used for attaching supported N series disk storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN4000). The FC ports on this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports. This adapter has two small form factor (SFF) multi-mode optics with LC-style connectors. This adapter supports the following maximum cable lengths. Table 223. Dual-port 4 Gbps FC HBA for disk - maximum cable lengths 62.5 micron multi-mode Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre fibre 1 Gbps 500m 300m 2 Gbps 300m 150m 4 Gbps 150m 70m For a single-node model (2862-A10), the maximum number of this adapter is one. For a dual-node model (2862-A20), the maximum number of this adapter is two. Dual-port 4-Gbps FC HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015) Feature code 1015 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment. This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter has two SFF multi-mode optics with LC-style connectors. This adapter supports the following maximum cable lengths. Table 224. Dual-port 4-Gbps FC HBA for tape - maximum cable lengths 62.5 micron multi-mode Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre fibre 1 Gbps 500m 300m 2 Gbps 300m 150m 4 Gbps 150m 70m For a single-node model (2862-A10), the maximum number of this adapter is one. For a dual-node model (2862-A20), the maximum number of this adapter is two. This feature code includes a 50-micron optical loopback cable with LC connectors. Dual-port GbE iscsi target adapter (optical) (FC 1021) Feature code 1021 is a Gigabit Ethernet iscsi PCIe TCP/IP offload engine (TOE) adapter that proides two optical LC duplex connectors for connection to iscsi hosts. For a single-node model (2862-A10), the maximum number of this adapter is one. For a dual-node model (2862-A20), the maximum number of this adapter is two. 236 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

273 Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1023) Feature code 1023 is a quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter. This adapter supports 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T Ethernet standard. It has four RJ-45 connectors and supports a maximum distance of 100 meters using Category 5 or better unshielded twisted pair (UTP) four-pair media. For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is one. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is two. Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iscsi target adapter (copper) (FC 1026) Feature code 1026 is a gigabit Ethernet iscsi target PCIe adapter that proides two Ethernet iscsi ports to be configured as target connections for iscsi hosts. For a single-node model (2862-A10), the maximum number of this adapter is one. For a dual-node model (2862-A20), the maximum number of this adapter is two. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk and tape attachment (FC 1029) Feature code 1029 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for attaching supported N series disk storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN4000) and tape deices to N series storage controllers. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Four small form factor (SFF) multimode optical ports with LC connectors support the following cable lengths: Table 225. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk and tape attachment (FC 1029) - maximum cable lengths 62.5 micron multi-mode Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre fibre 1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters 2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters 4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters The ports of this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports. For a single-node model (2862-A10), the maximum number of this adapter is one. For a dual-node model (2862-A20), the maximum number of this adapter is two. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1030) Feature code 1030 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for FCP target ports. This adapter may only be used to proide additional target ports; it may not be used to attach storage expansion units. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Two SFP multimode optical ports with LC connectors support the following cable lengths: Table 226. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1030) - maximum cable lengths 62.5 micron multi-mode Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre fibre 1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters Appendix F. Optional adapter cards supported by the N

274 Table 226. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1030) - maximum cable lengths (continued) 62.5 micron multi-mode Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre fibre 2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters 4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters For a single-node model (2862-A10), the maximum number of this adapter is one. For a dual-node model (2862-A20), the maximum number of this adapter is two. Note: Feature code 1030 requires Data ONTAP 7.3 or higher. SnapMirror oer Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1033) Feature code 1033 is a 4-Gbps PCIe card used to support SnapMirror oer Fibre Channel. For a single-node model (2862-A10), the maximum number of this adapter is one. For a dual-node model (2862-A20), the maximum number of this adapter is two. Note: Feature code 1033 requires Data ONTAP or higher. Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1036) Feature code 1036 is a dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for FCP target ports. This adapter may only be used to proide additional target ports. It is not used for attaching N series storage expansion units. It auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. This adapter has two SFP multimode optical ports with LC connectors. This adapter supports the following cable lengths: Table 227. Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1036) - maximum cable lengths 62.5 micron multi-mode Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fiber fiber 1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters 2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters 4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters For a single-node model (2862-A10), the maximum number of this adapter is one. For a dual-node model (2862-A20), the maximum number of this adapter is two. Note: Feature code 1036 requires Data ONTAP or higher. Dual-port Mini-SAS Adapter (FC 1060) Feature code 1060 is a PCIe adapter with two SAS ports for connecting SAS-based storage (EXN3000 and EXN3500) behind the N series controller. The SAS adapter operates at 3 Gbps. 238 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

275 For a single-node model (2862-A10), the maximum number of this adapter is one. For a dual-node model (2862-A20), the maximum number of this adapter is two. Note: Feature code 1060 requires Data ONTAP or higher. Single-port 10-Gbps NIC (FC 1062) Feature code 1062 is a PCIe adapter with one 10-Gb Ethernet port for connecting the N series controller to 10-Gb Ethernet networks. For a single-node model (2862-A10), the maximum number of this adapter is one. For a dual-node model (2862-A20), the maximum number of this adapter is two. Note: Feature code 1062 requires Data ONTAP or higher. Dual-port Fibre Channel oer Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (optical) (FC 1063) Feature code 1063 is a PCIe adapter with two Fibre Channel oer Ethernet (FCoE) ports for connecting the N series controller to FCoE enironments. This adapter utilizes optical connections to the FCoE networks. The adapter ships with SFPs plugged into the bare cage connectors on the card to attach to LC cables. For a single-node model (2862-A10), the maximum number of this adapter is one. For a dual-node model (2862-A20), the maximum number of this adapter is two. Note: Feature code 1063 requires Data ONTAP or higher. Dual-port Fibre Channel oer Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (copper) (FC 1064) Feature code 1064 is a PCIe adapter with two Fibre Channel oer Ethernet (FCoE) ports for connecting the N series controller to FCoE enironments. This adapter utilizes copper connections to the FCoE networks. The adapter has bare cage connectors that enable attachment to copper cables with integral SFPs. For a single-node model (2862-A10), the maximum number of this adapter is one. For a dual-node model (2862-A20), the maximum number of this adapter is two. Note: Feature code 1064 requires Data ONTAP or higher. Appendix F. Optional adapter cards supported by the N

276 240 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

277 Appendix G. Optional adapter cards supported by N6000 series systems IBM supports the following optional PCIe adapter cards in N6000 series systems. Table 228. Optional adapter cards supported by N6000 series systems Feature Code Feature Code Description Supported systems 1012 Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter (optical) N6040, N6060, N Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) N6040, N6060, N Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk N6040, N6060, N6070 attachment 1015 Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape N6040, N6060, N6070 attachment 1017 Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA N6040, N6060, N Dual-port GbE iscsi adapter (optical) N6040, N6060, N Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) N6040, N6060, N Dual-port GbE iscsi target adapter (copper) N6040, N6060, N Quad-port copper GbE NIC N6040, N6060, N Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk N6040, N6060, N6070 and tape attachment 1030 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA N6040, N6060, N Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter N6040, N6060, N Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA (A20/A21/A22 N6040, N6060, N6070 models only) 1033 SnapMirror oer Fibre Channel HBA N6040, N6060, N Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape N6040, N6060, N6070 and disk attachment 1036 Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA N6040, N6060, N GB Performance Acceleration Module (PAM) N6040, N6060, N GB Flash Cache module Note: Flash Cache modules were formerly referred to as Performance Acceleration Modules (PAM) II. N GB Flash Cache module Note: Flash Cache modules were formerly referred to as Performance Acceleration Modules (PAM) II. N6040, N Quad-port 3-Gbps SAS adapter N6040, N6060, N Dual-port Fibre Channel oer Ethernet (FCoE) N6040, N6060, N6070 Target Adapter (optical) 1064 Dual-port Fibre Channel oer Ethernet (FCoE) N6040, N6060, N6070 Target Adapter (copper) 1065 Dual-port 10-Gbps NIC N6040, N6060, N GB Flash Cache II module N6040, N6060 Copyright IBM Corp. 2005,

278 Table 228. Optional adapter cards supported by N6000 series systems (continued) Feature Code Feature Code Description Supported systems GB Flash Cache II module N6070 The following is the priority order for installing optional adapter cards into the N6000 series system: 1. Storage adapters for attaching disk storage expansion units (FC 1014, 1029, 1035, 1061) 2. Storage adapters for mirroring or MetroCluster configurations (FC 1032, 1033) 3. Performance Acceleration modules (PAMs) or Flash Cache modules (FC 1056, 1057, 1058, 1070, 1071) 4. Adapters for host block access (FC 1017, 1021, 1026, 1030, 1036, 1063, 1064, 1065) 5. Network Interface cards (FC 1012, 1013, 1023, 1028, 1031) 6. Storage adapters for tape attachment (FC 1015, 1029) For the single-node models, the total number of PCIe adapters cannot exceed four. For the dual-node (actie/actie or high aailability) models, the total number of PCIe adapters cannot exceed eight. For information about monitoring the LEDs for your optional adapter cards, see the IBM System Storage N series Platform Monitoring Guide. Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012) Feature code 1012 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-SX) adapter. This adapter has two LC duplex connectors and supports a maximum distance of 275 meters using 62.5-micron MMF media and 550m using 50-micron MMF media. For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is eight. The slot priority order for this adapter is 4, 3, 2, 1. Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1013) Feature code 1013 is a dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter. This adapter supports 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T Ethernet standards. This adapter has two RJ-45 connectors and supports a maximum distance of 100 meters using Category 5 or better unshielded twisted pair (UTP) four-pair media. For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is eight. The slot priority order for this adapter is 4, 3, 2, 1. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014) Feature code 1014 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA. This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter may only be used for attaching supported N series disk storage expansion units (EXN1000 and EXN4000). The Fibre Channel ports on this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports. 242 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

279 This adapter has two small form factor (SFF) multi-mode optics with LC-style connectors. This adapter supports the following maximum cable lengths. Table 229. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk (FC 1014) - maximum cable lengths 62.5 micron multi-mode Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fiber fiber 1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters 2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters 4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is eight. The slot priority order for this adapter is 4, 3, 2, 1. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015) Feature code 1015 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment. This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter has two SFF multi-mode optics with LC-style connectors. This adapter supports the following maximum cable lengths. Table 230. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape (FC 1015) - maximum cable lengths 62.5 micron multi-mode Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fiber fiber 1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters 2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters 4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is eight. The slot priority order for this adapter is 4, 3, 2, 1. This feature code includes a 50-micron optical loopback cable with LC connectors. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017) Feature code 1017 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for FCP target ports. This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter is used for proiding two additional 4-Gbps FCP target ports. It is not used for attaching N series storage expansion units. This adapter has two SFF multi-mode optics with LC-style connectors. This adapter supports the following maximum cable lengths. Appendix G. Optional adapter cards supported by N6000 series systems 243

280 Table 231. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017) - maximum cable lengths 62.5 micron multi-mode Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fiber fiber 1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters 2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters 4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is two. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. The slot priority order for this adapter is 4, 3, 2, 1. Dual-port GbE iscsi adapter (optical) (FC 1021) Feature code 1021 is a dual-port Ethernet iscsi adapter. For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is eight. The slot priority order for this adapter is 4, 3, 2, 1. Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1023) Feature code 1023 is a quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter. This adapter supports 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T Ethernet standard. It has four RJ-45 connectors and supports a maximum distance of 100 meters using Category 5 or better unshielded twisted pair (UTP) four-pair media. For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is eight. The slot priority order for this adapter is 4, 3, 2, 1. Dual-port GbE iscsi target adapter (copper) (FC 1026) Feature code 1026 is a dual-port Ethernet iscsi adapter. For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is eight. The slot priority order for this adapter is 4, 3, 2, 1. Quad-port Copper GbE NIC (FC 1028) Feature code 1028 is a 4-port copper GbE Network Interface Card (NIC). This 10/100/1000 Ethernet (10Base-t, 100Base-TX, and 1000Base-T) PCIe feature proides four RJ45 connectors. The maximum supported distance is 100 meters using Cat. 5, or better, unshielded twisted pair (UTP) four-pair media. Ethernet cables are proided by the customer. 244 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

281 The maximum number allowed for this adapter is: Models A10 and A11 four. Models A20 and A21 eight. The total number of all adapter features is four for Models A10 and A11, eight for Models A11 and A21. The slot priority order for this adapter is 4, 3, 2, 1. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk and tape attachment (FC 1029) Feature code 1029 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for attaching supported N series disk storage expansion units (EXN1000, and EXN4000) and tape deices to N series storage controllers. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Four small form factor (SFF) multimode optical ports with LC connectors support the following cable lengths: Table 232. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk and tape attachment (FC 1029) - maximum cable lengths 62.5 micron multi-mode Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fiber fiber 1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters 2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters 4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters The ports of this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports. For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is eight. The slot priority order for this adapter is 1, 2, 3, 4. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (FC 1030) Feature code 1030 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for FCP target ports. This adapter may only be used to proide additional target ports; it may not be used to attach storage expansion units. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Two SFP multimode optical ports with LC connectors support the following cable lengths: Table 233. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1030) - maximum cable lengths 62.5 micron multi-mode Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fiber fiber 1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters 2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters 4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters For the single-node model the maximum number of this adapter is four. For the dual-node model the maximum number of this adapter is eight. This adapter is a PCIe adapter. For a single-node configuration, the slot priority order is 3, 4, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 1, 2, 4. Appendix G. Optional adapter cards supported by N6000 series systems 245

282 Note: Feature code 1030 requires Data ONTAP 7.3 or higher. Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter (FC 1031) Feature code 1031 is a 10-Gb Ethernet PCIe TOE adapter feature that proides dual LC duplex connectors. It supports a maximum distance of 300 meters using 850-nanometer (nm) multimode fiber (MMF) media. For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is eight. The slot priority order for this adapter is 1, 2, 3, 4. Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA (Models A20/A21/A22 only) (FC 1032) Feature code 1032 is used for fabric MetroCluster installations only. It is required by MetroCluster. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, the MetroCluster Remote adanced function authorization and IBM B Fibre Channel switches are required. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, the cluster interconnect traffic is carried across the Fibre Channel SAN ia this adapter instead of across the normal Infiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, two of these adapter cards must be ordered (one for each node of a dual-node cluster). This adapter must be installed in slot 1. SnapMirror oer Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1033) Feature code 1033 is a 4-Gbps PCIe card used to support SnapMirror oer Fibre Channel. For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is one. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is two. The slot priority order for this adapter is 3, 4. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment (FC 1035) Feature code 1035 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for attaching tape and supported N series disk storage expansion units (EXN1000 and EXN4000) to N series storage controllers. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Four small form factor (SFF) multimode optical ports with LC connectors support the following cable lengths: Table 234. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment (FC 1035) - maximum cable lengths 62.5 micron multi-mode Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fiber fiber 1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters 2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters 4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters 246 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

283 The ports of this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports. Note: This adapter is not supported for N6000 series MetroCluster configurations or filers with gateway features. For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is eight. The slot priority order for this adapter is 1, 2, 3, 4. Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1036) Feature code 1036 is a dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for FCP target ports. This adapter may only be used to proide additional target ports. It is not used for attaching N series storage expansion units. It auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. This adapter has two SFP multimode optical ports with LC connectors. This adapter supports the following cable lengths: Table 235. Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1036) - maximum cable lengths 62.5 micron multi-mode Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fiber fiber 1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters 2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters 4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is eight. The slot priority order for this adapter is 4, 3, 2, GB Performance Acceleration Module (FC 1056) Feature code 1056 is a PCIe adapter with 16 GB of onboard cache memory that works as a performance acceleration module. It is designed to augment the system's memory and improe performance with some applications when a configuration has a limited number of disks. This design allows the N series disk configuration to be sized based on capacity, rather than performance requirements. For more information about PAM cards, see Appendix K, Installing or replacing a Flash Cache module or PAM, on page 289. Use of the 16 GB Performance Acceleration Module I (FC 1056) requires the FlexScale software feature. For the single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four for the N6070 and two for the N6040 or N6060. For the dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. This adapter is a PCIe adapter. For both single-node and dual-node configurations, the slot priority order is 1, Note: Feature code 1056 requires Data ONTAP 7.3 or higher. Appendix G. Optional adapter cards supported by N6000 series systems 247

284 512-GB Flash Cache module (FC 1057) Feature code 1057 is a PCIe adapter with 512 GB of onboard cache memory that works as a Flash Cache module. The Flash Cache module is the second generation of caching module adapters for N series systems. It is designed to augment the system's onboard memory, improing performance with some configurations. The design allows the N series system to be sized based on required capacity instead of performance, reducing the need for excess spindles in some enironments and helping to improe capacity utilization. For more information about Flash Cache cards, see Appendix K, Installing or replacing a Flash Cache module or PAM, on page 289. Use of the 512-GB Flash Cache module (FC 1057) requires the Flash Cache module software feature. Note: Flash Cache modules were formerly referred to as Performance Acceleration Modules (PAM) II. For the single-node N6070, the maximum number of this adapter is two. For the dual-node N6070, the maximum number of this adapter is four. This adapter is a PCIe adapter. For both single-node and dual-node configurations, the slot priority order is 1, 2, 3, 4. Note: Feature code 1057 requires Data ONTAP or higher. 256-GB Flash Cache module (FC 1058) Feature code 1058 is a PCIe adapter with 256 GB of onboard cache memory that works as a Flash Cache module. The Flash Cache module is the second generation of caching module adapters for N series systems. It is designed to augment the system's onboard memory, improing performance with some configurations. The design allows the N series system to be sized based on required capacity instead of performance, reducing the need for excess spindles in some enironments and helping to improe capacity utilization. For more information about Flash Cache modules, see Appendix K, Installing or replacing a Flash Cache module or PAM, on page 289. Use of the 256-GB Flash Cache module (FC 1058) requires the Flash Cache module software feature. Note: Flash Cache modules were formerly referred to as Performance Acceleration Modules (PAM) II. For the single-node N6040, the maximum number of this adapter is one. For the dual-node N6040, the maximum number of this adapter is two. For the single-node N6060, the maximum number of this adapter is two. For the dual-node N6060, the maximum number of this adapter is four. The slot priority order for this adapter is 1, 2, 3, 4. Note: Feature code 1058 requires Data ONTAP or higher. Note: N6040 systems running Data ONTAP 8.1.x with Flash Cache cards installed cannot be booted up if upgraded to Data ONTAP IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

285 Quad-port 3-Gbps SAS Adapter (FC 1061) Feature code 1061 is a PCIe adapter with four SAS ports for connecting N series SAS-based storage (EXN3000 and EXN3500) behind the N series controller. The SAS adapter operates at 3 Gbps. For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is eight. The slot priority order for this adapter is 1, 2, 3, 4. Note: Feature code 1061 requires Data ONTAP or higher. Dual-port Fibre Channel oer Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (optical) (FC 1063) Feature code 1063 is a PCIe adapter with two Fibre Channel oer Ethernet (FCoE) ports for connecting the N series controller to FCoE enironments. This adapter utilizes optical connections to the FCoE networks. For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is eight. The slot priority order for this adapter is 4, 3, 2, 1. Note: Feature code 1063 requires Data ONTAP or higher. Dual-port Fibre Channel oer Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (copper) (FC 1064) Feature code 1064 is a PCIe adapter with two Fibre Channel oer Ethernet (FCoE) ports for connecting the N series controller to FCoE enironments. This adapter utilizes copper connections to the FCoE networks. For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is eight. The slot priority order for this adapter is 4, 3, 2, 1. Note: Feature code 1064 requires Data ONTAP or higher. Dual-port 10-Gbps NIC (FC 1065) Feature code 1065 is a 10-Gb Ethernet PCIe NIC adapter feature proides dual LC duplex connectors. It supports a maximum distance of 300 meters using 850-nanometer (nm) multimode fiber (MMF) media. Cable features 5m 50-micron MMF Cable (FC 1045), 30m 50-micron MMF Cable (FC 1046), 10-GbE Fi cable 30m LC/SC (FC 1047), or 10-GbE Fi cable 5m LC/SC (FC 1048) can optionally be ordered with this feature. FC 1045 and FC 1046 are LC/LC cables; FC 1047 and FC 1048 are LC/SC cables. For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is eight. Appendix G. Optional adapter cards supported by N6000 series systems 249

286 The slot priority order for this adapter is 1, 2, 3, 4. Note: Feature code 1065 requires Data ONTAP or higher. 256-GB Flash Cache II module (FC 1070) Feature code 1070, a 256-GB Flash Cache module, is the third generation of PCIe Flash Cache adapters for N series systems. It is designed to augment the system's onboard memory, improing performance with some configurations. The design allows the N series system to be sized based on required capacity instead of performance, reducing the need for excess spindles in some enironments and helping improe capacity utilization. For more information about Flash Cache modules, see Appendix K, Installing or replacing a Flash Cache module or PAM, on page 289. Use of the 256-GB Flash Cache II module (FC 1070) requires the Flash Cache module software feature. Note: Flash Cache modules were formerly referred to as Performance Acceleration Modules (PAM) II. For the single-node N6040 Model A10 and N6060 Model A12, the maximum number of this adapter is two. For the dual-node N6040 Model A20 and N6060 Model A22, the maximum number of this adapter is four. The slot priority order for this adapter is 1, 2, 3, 4. Note: Feature code 1070 requires Data ONTAP or higher or Data ONTAP or higher or Data ONTAP RC1 or higher. Note: N6040 systems running Data ONTAP 8.1.x with Flash Cache cards installed cannot be booted up if upgraded to Data ONTAP GB Flash Cache II module (FC 1071) Feature code 1071, a 512-GB Flash Cache module, is the third generation of PCIe Flash Cache adapters for N series systems. It is designed to augment the system's onboard memory, improing performance with some configurations. The design allows the N series system to be sized based on required capacity instead of performance, reducing the need for excess spindles in some enironments and helping improe capacity utilization. For more information about Flash Cache modules, see Appendix K, Installing or replacing a Flash Cache module or PAM, on page 289. Use of the 512-GB Flash Cache module (FC 1071) requires the Flash Cache module software feature. Note: Flash Cache modules were formerly referred to as Performance Acceleration Modules (PAM) II. For the single-node N6070, the maximum number of this adapter is two. For the dual-node N6070, the maximum number of this adapter is four. This adapter is a PCIe adapter. For both single-node and dual-node configurations, the slot priority order is 1, 2, 3, IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

287 Note: Feature code 1071 requires Data ONTAP or higher or Data ONTAP or higher. Appendix G. Optional adapter cards supported by N6000 series systems 251

288 252 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

289 Appendix H. Optional adapter cards supported by N6200 series systems IBM supports the following optional PCIe adapter cards in N6200 series systems. Table 236. Optional adapter cards supported by N6200 series systems Feature Code Feature Code Description Supported models 1012 Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter (optical) N6210, N6240, and N6270 only 1014 Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment 1015 Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment N6210, N6240, and N6270 only N6210, N6240, and N6270 only 1017 Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA All N6200 series models 1023 Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) N6210, N6240, and N6270 only 1028 Quad-port copper GbE NIC All N6200 series models 1029 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk All N6200 series models attachment 1030 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA All N6200 series models 1036 Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA All N6200 series models GB Flash Cache module N6240 and N6270 only 1061 Quad-port 3/6-Gbps SAS adapter All N6200 series models 1063 Dual-port Fibre Channel oer Ethernet (FCoE) All N6200 series models Target Adapter (optical) 1064 Dual-port Fibre Channel oer Ethernet (FCoE) All N6200 series models Target Adapter (copper) 1065 Dual-port 10-Gbps NIC N6210, N6240, and N6270 only Gbps MetroCluster VI Fibre Channel HBA N6210-C20, N6220-C25, N6220-E25, N6240-E21, N6250-E26, and N6270-E22 only Gbps SnapMirror oer Fibre Channel HBA All N6200 series models 1070 Flash Cache II 256 GB N6210 and N6240 models 1071 Flash Cache II 512 GB N6220, N6240, N6250, and N6270 models 1072 Flash Cache II 1 TB N6250 and N Flash Cache II 512 GB ersion 2 N6220, N6240, N6250, and N6270 models 1074 Flash Cache II 1 TB ersion 2 N6250 and N6270 models 1078 Dual-port, 10GbE NIC, SFP+ All N6200 series models 1081 Quad-port, 8 Gbps FC adapter All N6200 series models 1082 Quad-Port, 1-GbE optical adapter All N6200 series models Copyright IBM Corp. 2005,

290 Table 236. Optional adapter cards supported by N6200 series systems (continued) Feature Code Feature Code Description Supported models 1084 Dual-port 10G-Base-T NIC All N6200 series models 2014 SFP+ optical module for 1078 All N6200 series models The following is the priority order for installing optional adapter cards into the N6200 series system: 1. Storage adapters for attaching disk storage expansion units (FC 1014, 1029, 1061, 1081) 2. Storage adapters for mirroring or MetroCluster configurations (FC 1066, 1067) 3. Flash Cache II modules (1057, 1070, 1071, 1072, 1073, 1074) 4. Adapters for host block access (FC 1017, 1030, 1036, 1063, 1064, 1065) 5. Network Interface cards (FC 1012, 1028, 1078, 1082, 1084) 6. Storage adapters for tape attachment (FC 1015) For models C10 and C15, the total number of PCIe adapters cannot exceed two. For models C20, C21, C22, and C25, the total number cannot exceed four. For models E11, E12, E15, and E16, the total number cannot exceed six. For models E21, E22, E25, and E26, the total number cannot exceed twele. For information about monitoring the LEDs for your optional adapter cards, refer to the IBM System Storage N series Platform Monitoring Guide. Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012) Feature code 1012 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-SX) adapter. This adapter has two LC duplex connectors and supports a maximum distance of 275 meters using 62.5-micron MMF media and 550 meters using 50-micron MMF media. For N6210-C10, N6210-C20, N6240-C21, and N6270-C22: The maximum number of this adapter is two per controller module. The slot priority order is 1, 2. For N6240-E11, N6240-E21, N6270-E12 and N6270-E22: The maximum number of this adapter is six per controller module. The slot priority order is 3, 4, 5, 6, 1, 2. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014) Feature code 1014 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA. This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter may only be used for attaching supported N series disk storage expansion units (EXN1000, and EXN4000). The Fibre Channel ports on this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports. This adapter has two small form factor (SFF) multi-mode optics with LC-style connectors. This adapter supports the following maximum cable lengths. 254 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

291 Table 237. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk (FC 1014) - maximum cable lengths 62.5 micron multi-mode Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fiber fiber 1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters 2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters 4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters For N6210-C10, N6210-C20, N6240-C21, and N6270-C22: The maximum number of this adapter is two per controller module. The slot priority order is 1, 2. For N6240-E11, N6240-E21, N6270-E12 and N6270-E22: The maximum number of this adapter is six per controller module. The slot priority order is 3, 4, 5, 6, 1, 2. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015) Feature code 1015 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment. This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This feature code includes a 50-micron optical loopback cable with LC connectors. This adapter has two SFF multi-mode optical ports with LC connectors. The Fibre Channel ports on this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports. This adapter supports the following maximum cable lengths. Table 238. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape (FC 1015) - maximum cable lengths 62.5 micron multi-mode Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fiber fiber 1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters 2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters 4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters For N6210-C10, N6210-C20, N6240-C21, and N6270-C22: The maximum number of this adapter is two per controller module. The slot priority order is 1, 2. For N6240-E11, N6240-E21, N6270-E12 and N6270-E22: The maximum number of this adapter is six per controller module. The slot priority order is 3, 4, 5, 6, 1, 2. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017) Feature code 1017 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for FCP target ports. This adapter is used for proiding two additional 4-Gbps FCP target ports. It is not used for attaching N series storage expansion units. Note: All FC target ports must be either onboard FC ports or FC HBA ports (using FC 1017); they may not be used in combination. This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter has two SFF multi-mode optics with LC-style connectors. This adapter supports the following maximum cable lengths. Appendix H. Optional adapter cards supported by N6200 series systems 255

292 Table 239. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017) - maximum cable lengths 62.5 micron multi-mode Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fiber fiber 1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters 2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters 4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters For N6210-C10, N6210-C20, N6220-C15, N6220-C25, N6240-C21, and N6270-C22: The maximum number of this adapter is two per controller module. The slot priority order is 1, 2. For N6220-E15, N6220-E25, N6240-E11, N6240-E21, N6250-E16, N6250-E26, N6270-E12, and N6270-E22: The maximum number of this adapter is six per controller module. The slot priority order is 3, 4, 5, 6, 1, 2. Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1023) Feature code 1023 is a quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter. This adapter supports 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T Ethernet standard. It has four RJ-45 connectors and supports a maximum distance of 100 meters using Category 5 or better unshielded twisted pair (UTP) four-pair media. For N6210-C10, N6210-C20, N6240-C21, and N6270-C22: The maximum number of this adapter is two per controller module. The slot priority order is 1, 2. For N6240-E11, N6240-E21, N6270-E12 and N6270-E22: The maximum number of this adapter is six per controller module. The slot priority order is 3, 4, 5, 6, 1, 2. Quad-port Copper GbE NIC (FC 1028) Feature code 1028 is a 4-port copper GbE Network Interface Card (NIC). This 10/100/1000 Ethernet (10Base-t, 100Base-TX, and 1000Base-T) PCIe feature proides four RJ45 connectors. The maximum supported distance is 100 meters using Cat. 5, or better, unshielded twisted pair (UTP) four-pair media. Ethernet cables are proided by the customer. For N6210-C10, N6210-C20, N6220-C15, N6220-C25, and N6240-C21: The maximum number of this adapter is two per controller module. The slot priority order is 1, 2. For N6220-E15, N6220-E25, N6240-E11, N6240-E21, N6250-E16, and N6250-E26: The maximum number of this adapter is six per controller module. The slot priority order is 3, 4, 5, 6, 1, 2. Note: Data ONTAP supports a maximum of fie of this feature on Model E11, ten on Model E21. To use the maximums of six and 12 requires Data ONTAP or or higher. The slot priority order for this adapter is 4, 3, 2, IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

293 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1029) Feature code 1029 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for attaching supported N series disk storage expansion units (EXN1000 and EXN4000) to N series storage controllers. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Four small form factor (SFF) multimode optical ports with LC connectors support the following cable lengths: Table 240. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1029) - maximum cable lengths 62.5 micron multi-mode Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fiber fiber 1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters 2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters 4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters The ports of this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports. For N6210-C10, N6210-C20, N6220-C15, N6220-C25, N6240-C21, and N6270-C22: The maximum number of this adapter is two per controller module. The slot priority order is 1, 2. For N6220-E15, N6220-E25, N6240-E11, N6240-E21, N6250-E16, N6250-E26, N6270-E12, and N6270-E22: The maximum number of this adapter is six per controller module. The slot priority order is 3, 4, 5, 6, 1, 2. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (FC 1030) Feature code 1030 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for FCP target ports. This adapter may only be used to proide additional target ports; it may not be used to attach storage expansion units. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Two SFP multimode optical ports with LC connectors support the following cable lengths: Table 241. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1030) - maximum cable lengths 62.5 micron multi-mode Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fiber fiber 1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters 2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters 4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters For N6210-C10, N6210-C20, N6220-C15, N6220-C25, N6240-C21, and N6270-C22: The maximum number of this adapter is two per controller module. The slot priority order is 1, 2. For N6220-E15, N6220-E25, N6240-E11, N6240-E21, N6250-E16, N6250-E26, N6270-E12, and N6270-E22: For systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.5, the maximum number of this adapter is four per controller module. For systems running Data ONTAP and later, the maximum number of this adapter is six per controller module. The slot priority order is 3, 4, 5, 6, 1, 2. Appendix H. Optional adapter cards supported by N6200 series systems 257

294 Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1036) Feature code 1036 is a dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for FCP target ports. This adapter is only used to proide additional target ports. It is not used for attaching N series storage expansion units. It auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. This adapter has two SFP multimode optical ports with LC connectors. This adapter supports the following cable lengths: Table 242. Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1036) - maximum cable lengths 62.5 micron multi-mode Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fiber fiber 1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters 2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters 4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters For N6210-C10, N6210-C20, N6220-C15, N6220-C25, N6240-C21, and N6270-C22: The maximum number of this adapter is two per controller module. The slot priority order is 1, 2. For N6220-E15, N6220-E25, N6240-E11, N6240-E21, N6250-E16, N6250-E26, N6270-E12, and N6270-E22: The maximum number of this adapter is six per controller module. The slot priority order is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, GB Flash Cache module (FC 1057) Feature code 1057 is a PCIe adapter with 512 GB of onboard cache memory that works as a Flash Cache module. Feature code 1057 is only supported for the N6240 and N6270. The Flash Cache module is the second generation of caching module designed for N series systems. It augments the system's onboard memory, improing performance with some configurations. The design allows the N series system to be sized based on required capacity instead of performance, reducing the need for excess spindles in some enironments and helping to improe capacity utilization. For more information about Flash Cache modules, see Appendix K, Installing or replacing a Flash Cache module or PAM, on page 289. Use of the 512-GB Flash Cache module (FC 1057) requires the Flash Cache module software feature. For all models, the maximum number of this adapter is one per controller module. For N6240-C21 and N6270-C22: The slot priority order is 1, 2. For N6240-E11, N6240-E21, N6270-E12 and N6270-E22: The slot priority order is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

295 Quad-port 3/6-Gbps SAS Adapter (FC 1061) Feature code 1061 is a PCIe adapter with four SAS ports for connecting N series SAS-based storage behind the N series controller. The SAS adapter operates at 3/6 Gbps. For N6210-C10, N6210-C20, N6220-C15, N6220-C25, N6240-C21, and N6270-C22: The maximum number of this adapter is two per controller module. The slot priority order is 1, 2. For N6220-E15, N6220-E25, N6240-E11, N6240-E21, N6250-E16, N6250-E26, N6270-E12, and N6270-E22: The maximum number of this adapter is six per controller module. The slot priority order is 3, 4, 5, 6, 1, 2. Dual-port Fibre Channel oer Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (optical) (FC 1063) Feature code 1063 is a PCIe adapter with two Fibre Channel oer Ethernet (FCoE) ports for connecting the N series controller to FCoE enironments. This adapter utilizes optical connections to the FCoE networks. For N6210-C10, N6210-C20, N6240-C21, and N6270-C22: The maximum number of this adapter is two per controller module. The slot priority order is 1, 2. For N6220-E15, N6220-E25, N6240-E11, N6240-E21, N6250-E16, N6250-E26, N6270-E12, and N6270-E22: The maximum number of this adapter is six per controller module. The slot priority order is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6. Dual-port Fibre Channel oer Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (copper) (FC 1064) Feature code 1064 is a PCIe adapter with two Fibre Channel oer Ethernet (FCoE) ports for connecting the N series controller to FCoE enironments. This adapter utilizes copper connections to the FCoE networks. For N6210-C10, N6210-C20, N6220-C15, N6220-C25, N6240-C21, and N6270-C22: The maximum number of this adapter is two per controller module. The slot priority order is 1, 2. For N6220-E15, N6220-E25, N6240-E11, N6240-E21, N6250-E16, N6250-E26, N6270-E12, and N6270-E22: The maximum number of this adapter is six per controller module. The slot priority order is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6. Dual-port 10-Gbps Ethernet NIC (FC 1065) Feature code 1065 is a dual-port 10-Gb Ethernet PCIe NIC adapter feature that proides two SFP+ ports on the adapter. To use optical LC fiber optic cables, one SFP+ optical module (FC 2012) is required for each optical port. To connect to a switch using copper SFP+ cables, use one FC 1055 per port (each feature proides one passie, copper, SFP+ cable). For N6210-C10, N6210-C20, N6240-C21, and N6270-C22: The maximum number of this adapter is two per controller module. The slot priority order is 1, 2. Appendix H. Optional adapter cards supported by N6200 series systems 259

296 For N6220-E15, N6220-E25, N6240-E11, N6240-E21, N6250-E16, N6250-E26, N6270-E12, and N6270-E22: The maximum number of this adapter is six per controller module. The slot priority order is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6. 8-Gbps MetroCluster VI Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1066) FC 1066 is PCIe adapter is used only in support of the MetroCluster license function feature and compatible switches. It proides the connection heartbeat for the cluster oer a Fibre Channel link. One is used per node in a Fabric MetroCluster implementation. This adapter is not required for Stretch MetroCluster installations. FC 1066 is supported only for the N6210-C20, N6220-C25, N6220-E25, N6240-E21, N6250-E26, and N6270-E22 models. For all supported N6200 series models, the maximum number of this adapter is one per controller node. 8-Gbps SnapMirror oer Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1067) FC 1067 proides one 8-Gb PCIe card for support of SnapMirror oer Fibre Channel. Use this feature to configure 8-Gbps Fibre Channel for SnapMirror. For all supported N6200 series models, the maximum number of this adapter is one per controller module. The slot priority is GB Flash Cache II module (FC 1070) Feature code 1070, a 256-GB Flash Cache module, is the third generation of PCIe Flash Cache adapters for N series systems. It is designed to augment the system's onboard memory, improing performance with some configurations. The design allows the N series system to be sized based on required capacity instead of performance, reducing the need for excess spindles in some enironments and helping improe capacity utilization. For more information about Flash Cache modules, see Appendix K, Installing or replacing a Flash Cache module or PAM, on page 289. Use of the 256-GB Flash Cache II module (FC 1070) requires the Flash Cache module software feature. Note: Flash Cache modules were formerly referred to as Performance Acceleration Modules (PAM) II. The maximum number of this adapter for the N6210-C10 is one and for the N6210-C20, two. The slot priority order is 1. The maximum number of this adapter for the N6240-C21 is four. The slot priority order is 2. The maximum number of this adapter for the N6240-E11 is two, and for the N6240-E21, four. The slot priority order is 2. Note: Feature code 1070 requires Data ONTAP or higher or Data ONTAP or higher or Data ONTAP RC1 or higher. 260 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

297 Note: N6210 systems running Data ONTAP 8.1.x with Flash Cache cards installed cannot be booted up if upgraded to Data ONTAP GB Flash Cache II module (FC 1071) Feature code 1071, a 512-GB Flash Cache module, is the third generation of PCIe Flash Cache adapters for N series systems. It is designed to augment the system's onboard memory, improing performance with some configurations. The design allows the N series system to be sized based on required capacity instead of performance, reducing the need for excess spindles in some enironments and helping improe capacity utilization. For more information about Flash Cache modules, see Appendix K, Installing or replacing a Flash Cache module or PAM, on page 289. Use of the 512-GB Flash Cache module (FC 1071) requires the Flash Cache module software feature. Note: Flash Cache modules were formerly referred to as Performance Acceleration Modules (PAM) II. The maximum number of this module for the N6220-C15 is one. The slot priority order is 1. The maximum number of this module for N6220-C25 and N6240-C21 is two. The slot priority order is 1. The maximum number of this module for N6220-E15 and N6240-E11 is one, and for N6220-E25 and N6240-E21, two. The slot priority order is 1. The maximum number of this module for the N6250-E16 is two, and for the N6250-E26, four. The slot priority order is 2. The maximum number of this module for the N6270-E12 is two, and for the N6270-E22, four. The slot priority order is 2. Note: Feature code 1071 requires Data ONTAP or higher or Data ONTAP or higher. 1-TB Flash Cache II module (FC 1072) Feature code 1072, a 1-TB Flash Cache module, is the third generation of PCIe Flash Cache adapters for N series systems. It is designed to augment the system's onboard memory, improing performance with some configurations. The design allows the N series system to be sized based on required capacity instead of performance, reducing the need for excess spindles in some enironments and helping improe capacity utilization. For more information about Flash Cache modules, see Appendix K, Installing or replacing a Flash Cache module or PAM, on page 289. Use of the 1-TB Flash Cache module (FC 1072) requires the Flash Cache module software feature. Note: Flash Cache modules were formerly referred to as Performance Acceleration Modules (PAM) II. Appendix H. Optional adapter cards supported by N6200 series systems 261

298 The maximum number of this module for N6250-E16 and N6270-E12 is one, and for the N6250-E26, N6270-C22, and N6270-E22, two. The maximum Flash Cache capacity is 8 TB per controller. The slot priority order is 1. Note: Feature code 1072 requires Data ONTAP or higher. 512-GB Flash Cache II ersion 2 (FC 1073) Feature code 1073, a 512-GB Flash Cache module, is the third generation of PCIe Flash Cache adapters for N series systems. It is designed to augment the system's onboard memory, improing performance with some configurations. The design allows the N series system to be sized based on required capacity instead of performance, reducing the need for excess spindles in some enironments and helping improe capacity utilization. For more information about Flash Cache modules, see Appendix K, Installing or replacing a Flash Cache module or PAM, on page 289. Use of the 512-GB Flash Cache module (FC 1073) requires the Flash Cache module software feature. Note: Flash Cache modules were formerly referred to as Performance Acceleration Modules (PAM) II. The maximum number of this module for N6220-C15 is one. The slot priority order is 1, 2. The maximum number of this module for N6220-C25 and N6240-C21 is two. The slot priority order is 1, 2. The maximum number of this module for N6220-E15 and N6240-E11 is one, and for N6220-E25 and N6240-E21, two. The slot priority order is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6. The maximum number of this module for the N6250-E16 is two, and for the N6250-E26, four. The slot priority order is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6. The maximum number of this module for the N6270-E12 is two, and for the N6270-E22, four. The slot priority order is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6. Note: Feature code 1073 requires Data ONTAP RC1 or higher or 8.2 RC1 or higher. 1-TB Flash Cache II module ersion 2 (FC 1074) Feature code 1074, a 1-TB Flash Cache module, is the third generation of PCIe Flash Cache adapters for N series systems. It is designed to augment the system's onboard memory, improing performance with some configurations. The design allows the N series system to be sized based on required capacity instead of performance, reducing the need for excess spindles in some enironments and helping improe capacity utilization. For more information about Flash Cache modules, see Appendix K, Installing or replacing a Flash Cache module or PAM, on page 289. Use of the 1-TB Flash Cache module (FC 1074) requires the Flash Cache module software feature. 262 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

299 For N6250-E16, N6250-E26, N6270-C22, N6270-E12, N6270-E22: The maximum number of this adapter is 1. The maximum Flash Cache capacity is 1 TB per controller. The slot priority order is 1, 2, 3, 5, 4, 6. Note: Feature code 1074 requires Data ONTAP RC1 or higher or Data ONTAP 8.2 RC1 or higher. Dual-Port 10-GbE NIC (FC 1078) This feature proides two 10 gigabit Ethernet connections for network connectiity. This adapter uses SFP+ modules for optical connections (FC 2014), or SFP+ embedded copper cables for copper networks. Note: If this feature is used to connect to a network ia optical fiber cables, feature SFP+ Optical mod. for FC 1078, FC 2014 is required. If this feature is used to connect to a network ia copper cable, customer-supplied twinax cables are required. The maximum number of this module for the N6210-C10 is one, N62x0-C2x is two, N62x0-E1x is six, and N62x0-E2x is twele. The slot priority order for C models would be 1,2 and the slot priority for E models would be 1,2,3,4,5,6. Note: Feature code 1078 requires Data ONTAP 8.1 or later. Quad-port, 8 Gbps FC adapter (FC 1081) FC 1081 is an 8-Gb Quad-Port Host Bus Adapter (HBA) that supports fiber optic cables. This PCIe adapter has four LC fiber-optic connectors For N6210-C10, N6210-C20, N6220-C15, N6220-C25, N6240-C21, and N6270-C22: The maximum number of this adapter is two per controller module. The slot priority order is 1, 2. For N6220-E15, N6220-E25, N6240-E11, N6240-E21, N6250-E16, N6250-E26, N6270-E12, and N6270-E22: The maximum number of this adapter is six per controller module. The slot priority order is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6. Quad-Port, 1-GbE optical adapter (FC 1082) Feature code 1082 is a PCIe quad-port Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-SX) optical adapter. This adapter has four LC fiber-optic connectors and it supports MMF SR cable. For N6210-C10, N6210-C20, N6220-C15, N6220-C25, N6240-C21, and N6270-C22: The maximum number of this adapter is two per controller module. The slot priority order is 1, 2. For N6220-E15, N6220-E25, N6240-E11, N6240-E21, N6250-E16, N6250-E26, N6270-E12, and N6270-E22: The maximum number of this adapter is six per controller module. The slot priority order is 3, 4, 5, 6, 1, 2. Dual-port, 10G-Base-T NIC (FC 1084) This is a PCIe-based, dual-port, Ethernet network interface card (NIC). It supports 1000BASE-T and 10GBASE T copper media types. Appendix H. Optional adapter cards supported by N6200 series systems 263

300 The maximum number of this module for the C models is two and for E models it is six. The slot priority order for C models would be 1, 2 and the slot priority for E models would be 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6. Note: Feature code 1084 requires Data ONTAP RC1 or later. SFP+ Optical mod. for 1078 (FC 2014) This feature conerts the standard copper SFP+ ports on FC 1078 to optical, allowing use of optical Ethernet infrastructures. Each FC 1078 adapter supports a maximum of 2 of these for optical connections. Note: This feature is a corequisite of FC 1078 if FC 1078 is used with fiber optic cabling. 264 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

301 Appendix I. Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems PCI-X Adapters IBM supports optional adapter cards in the N7000 series models. The following is the priority order for installing optional adapter cards into the N7000 series models: 1. Storage adapters for attaching disk storage expansion units or disk systems (FC 1014, 1029, 1035, 1061) 2. Storage adapters for mirroring and MetroCluster configurations (FC 1032, 1033 and 1034) 3. Performance Acceleration modules (PAM) or Flash Cache modules (FC 1056, 1057, 1071) 4. Storage adapter for host block access (FC 1010, 1011, 1017, 1021, 1026, 1030, 1036, 1063, 1064, 1065) 5. Network Interface cards (FC 1007, 1008, 1009, 1012, 1013, 1023, 1031) 6. Storage adapters for tape attachment (FC 1016, 1015, ) N7000 series models support the following PCI-X adapters. Table 243. Optional PCI-X Adapters Feature Code Feature Code Description Models Supported 1007 Quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) N7700, N Single-port 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10 GbE) TOE (optical) N7700, N7900, N7600, N Quad-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) TOE (copper) N7700, N7900, N7600, N Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) iscsi target adapter (copper) 1011 Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) iscsi target adapter (optical) N7700, N7900, N7600, N7800 N7700, N7900, N7600, N SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel tape HBA N7700, N7900, N7600, N SnapMirror oer Fibre Channel HBA Note: FC 1034 is supported for N7000 series systems running Data ONTAP and higher ersions of Data ONTAP 7.2.x. It is not supported for N7000 series systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.x or Data ONTAP 8.x. N7700, N7900, N7600, N7800 For single-node models, the total number of PCI-X adapters cannot exceed three. For dual-node models, the total number of PCI-X adapters cannot exceed six. For dual-node models, adapters must be ordered in pairs, one for each node. Copyright IBM Corp. 2005,

302 Quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1007) Feature code 1007 is a quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet network interface card. This adapter supports 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, and 1000BASE-T network topologies. This adapter has four RJ-45 connectors and supports a maximum cable distance of 100 meters using Category 5 or better 4-pair unshielded twisted pair (UTP) media. For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is two. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. Since this adapter is a PCI-X adapter, it may only be installed in slots 3, 4 or 9. The slot priority order for this adapter is 9, 3, 4. Note: This feature requires Data ONTAP or higher. Single-port 10 GbE TOE adapter (FC 1008) Feature code 1008 is a single-port 10 GbE (10GBASE-SR) fibre short-range (SR) PCI-X adapter with a single LC duplex connector. This adapter supports a maximum distance of 300 meters using 850 nanometer (nm) multi-mode fibre (MMF) media. For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is two. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. Since this adapter is a PCI-X adapter, it may only be installed in slots 3 or 9. The slot priority order for this adapter is slot 9, 3. For technical reasons, this TOE adapter is not permitted in slot 4. Quad-port Gigabit Ethernet TOE adapter (FC 1009) Feature code 1009 is a quad-port Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-T) adapter. The adapter has four copper RJ-45 connections. This adapter supports a maximum distance of 100 meters using Category 5 or better unshielded twisted pair (UTP) four-pair media. For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is two. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. Since this adapter is a PCI-X adapter, it may only be installed in slots 3 or 9. The slot priority order for this adapter is slot 9, 3. For technical reasons, this TOE adapter is not permitted in slot 4. Dual-port GbE iscsi target adapter (copper) (FC 1010) Feature code 1010 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iscsi target adapter. The adapter has two copper RJ-45 connections. For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is three. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is six. Since this adapter is a PCI-X adapter, it may only be installed in slots 3, 4 or 9. The slot priority order for this adapter is 3, 4, IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

303 Dual-port GbE iscsi target adapter (optical) (FC 1011) Feature code 1011 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iscsi target adapter. The adapter has two optical LC duplex connectors. For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is three. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is six. Since this adapter is a PCI-X adapter, it may only be installed in slots 3, 4 or 9. The slot priority order for this adapter is 3, 4, 9. SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel LVD tape adapter (FC 1016) Feature code 1016 is a SCSI Ultra320 dual-channel LVD adapter. This adapter contains two 68-pin VHDCI external connectors (Channel A and Channel B) and two 68-pin VHDCI internal connectors (Channel A and Channel B). Customers are only expected to use the two external connectors. This feature code includes two SCSI LVD two-meter cables for attaching tape deices to this SCSI HBA. Each cable has two 68-pin VHDCI connectors, one at each end. For the single-node models, the maximum number of this adapter is three. For the dual-node models, the maximum number of this adapter is six. Since this adapter is a PCI-X adapter, it may only be installed in slots 3, 4 or 9. The slot priority order for this adapter is 4, 9, 3. SnapMirror oer Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1034) Feature code 1034 is a 4-Gbps PCI-X card used to support SnapMirror oer Fibre Channel. PCI-Express (PCIe) adapters For single-node models, the maximum number of this adapter is two. For dual-node models, the maximum number of this adapter is four. Since this adapter is a PCI-X adapter, it may only be installed in slots 3, 4 or 9. The slot priority order for this adapter is 3, 4, 9. Note: FC 1034 is supported for N7000 series systems running Data ONTAP and higher ersions of Data ONTAP 7.2.x. It is not supported for N7000 series systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.x or Data ONTAP 8.x. N7000 series models support the following PCIe adapters. Table 244. Optional PCIe adapters Feature Code Feature Code Description Models Supported 1012 Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter (optical) N7700, N7900, N7600, N Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) N7700, N7900, N7600, N Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment N7700, N7900, N7600, N7800 Appendix I. Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems 267

304 Table 244. Optional PCIe adapters (continued) Feature Code Feature Code Description Models Supported 1015 Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment N7700, N7900, N7600, N Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA N7700, N7900, N7600, N Dual-port GbE iscsi target adapter (optical) N7700, N7900, N7600, N Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) N7700, N7900, N7600, N Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iscsi target adapter (copper) 1028 Quad-port Copper GbE NIC N Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk or tape attachment N7700, N7900, N7600, N7800 N7700, N7900, N7600, N Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter N7700, N7900, N7600, N Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter N7700, N7900, N7600, N Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA (A20/A21 models only) N7700, N7900, N7600, N SnapMirror oer Fibre Channel HBA N7700, N7900, N7600, N Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment N7700, N7900, N7600, N Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter N7700, N7900, N7600, N GB Performance Acceleration Module (PAM) N7700, N7900, N7600, N GB Flash Cache module Note: Flash Cache modules were formerly referred to as Performance Acceleration Modules (PAM) II. N7700, N7900, N7600, N Quad-port 3-Gbps SAS adapter N7700, N7900, N7600, N Dual-port Fibre Channel oer Ethernet (FCoE) Target adapter (optical) 1064 Dual-port Fibre Channel oer Ethernet (FCoE) Target adapter (copper) N7700, N7900, N7600, N7800 N7700, N7900, N7600, N Dual-port 10-Gbps NIC N7700, N7900, N7600, N GB Flash Cache II module N7900 For the single-node models, the total number of PCIe adapters cannot exceed fie. For the dual-node models, the total number of PCIe adapters cannot exceed ten. 268 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

305 Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012) Feature code 1012 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-SX) adapter. This adapter has two LC duplex connectors and supports a maximum distance of 275m using 62.5-micron MMF media and 550 meters using 50-micron MMF media. For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is fie. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is ten. This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6, 7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2. Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1013) Feature code 1013 is a dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter. This adapter supports 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T Ethernet standards. This adapter has two RJ-45 connectors and supports a maximum distance of 100 meters using Category 5 or better UTP four-pair media. For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is fie. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is ten. This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6, 7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014) Feature code 1014 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA. This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter may only be used for attaching supported N series disk storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN4000). The Fibre Channel ports on this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports. This adapter has two small form factor (SFF) multi-mode optics with LC-style connectors. This adapter supports the following maximum cable lengths. Table 245. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk (FC 1014) - maximum cable lengths 62.5 micron multi-mode Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre fibre 1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters 2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters 4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is fie. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is ten. This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6, 7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2. Appendix I. Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems 269

306 Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015) Feature code 1015 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment. This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter has two SFF multi-mode optics with LC-style connectors. This adapter supports the following maximum cable lengths. Table 246. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape (FC 1015) - maximum cable lengths 62.5 micron multi-mode Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre fibre 1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters 2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters 4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is three. For a dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is six. This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6, 7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2. This feature code will include a 50-micron optical loopback cable with LC connectors. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017) Feature code 1017 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for FCP target ports. This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter is used for proiding two additional 4-Gbps FCP target ports. It is not used for attaching storage expansion units. This adapter has two SFF multi-mode optics with LC-style connectors. This adapter supports the following maximum cable lengths. Table 247. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017) - maximum cable lengths 62.5 micron multi-mode Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre fibre 1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters 2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters 4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters For the single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. For the dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is eight. This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6, 7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

307 Dual-port GbE iscsi target adapter (optical) (FC 1021) Feature code 1021 is a Gigabit Ethernet iscsi PCIe TCP/IP offload engine (TOE) adapter that proides two optical LC duplex connectors for connection to iscsi hosts. For single-node models, the maximum number of this adapter is fie. For dual-node models, the maximum number of this adapter is ten. This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6, 7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2. Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1023) Feature code 1023 is a 10/100/1000 Ethernet (10Base-T, 100Base-TX, and 1000Base-T) PCIe feature that proides four RJ-45 connectors. The maximum supported distance is 100 meters using Category 5, or better, unshielded twisted pair (UTP) four-pair media. For the single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is fie. For the dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is ten. This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6, 7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2. Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iscsi target adapter (copper) (FC 1026) Feature code 1026 is a gigabit Ethernet iscsi target PCIe adapter that proides two Ethernet iscsi ports to be configured as target connections for iscsi hosts. For the single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is fie. For the dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is ten. This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6, 7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2. Quad-port Copper GbE NIC (FC 1028) Feature code 1028 is a 4-port copper GbE Network Interface Card (NIC). This 10/100/1000 Ethernet (10Base-t, 100Base-TX, and 1000Base-T) PCIe feature proides four RJ45 connectors. The maximum supported distance is 100 meters using Cat. 5, or better, unshielded twisted pair (UTP) four-pair media. Ethernet cables are proided by the customer. The maximum number of this adapter for the N7900-A11 is six, and for the N7900-A21, twele.. The slot priority order is 1, 2. Note: Data ONTAP supports a maximum of fie of this feature on Model A11, ten on Model A21. To use the maximums of six and 12 requires Data ONTAP or or higher. Appendix I. Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems 271

308 This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6, 7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk or tape attachment (FC 1029) Feature code 1029 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for attaching supported N series disk storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN4000) or tape deices to N series storage controllers. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Four small form factor (SFF) multimode optical ports with LC connectors support the following cable lengths: Table 248. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk or tape attachment (FC 1029) - maximum cable lengths 62.5 micron multi-mode Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre fibre 1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters 2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters 4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters The ports of this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports. For the single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is fie. For the dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is ten. This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, and 8. For a single-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1030) Feature code 1030 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for FCP target ports. This adapter may only be used to proide additional target ports; it may not be used to attach storage expansion units. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Two SFP multimode optical ports with LC connectors support the following cable lengths: Table 249. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1030) - maximum cable lengths 62.5 micron multi-mode Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre fibre 1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters 2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters 4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters For the single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. For the dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is eight. This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6, 7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

309 Note: Feature code 1030 requires Data ONTAP 7.3 or higher. Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter (FC 1031) Feature code 1031 is a 10-Gb Ethernet PCIe TOE adapter feature that proides dual LC duplex connectors. It supports a maximum distance of 300 meters using 850-nanometer (nm) multimode fiber (MMF) media. For the single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is fie. For the dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is ten. This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6, 7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2. Note: This feature requires Data ONTAP or higher. Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA (Models A20/A21 only) (FC 1032) Feature code 1032 is used for fabric MetroCluster installations only. It is required by MetroCluster. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, the MetroCluster Remote adanced function authorization and IBM B Fibre Channel switches are required. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, the cluster interconnect traffic is carried across the Fibre Channel SAN ia this adapter instead of across the normal Infiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration (2866/2867-A20/A21), two of these adapter cards must be ordered (one for each node of a dual-node cluster). This adapter must be installed in slot 1. Note: This feature requires Data ONTAP or higher. SnapMirror oer Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1033) Feature code 1033 is a 4-Gbps PCIe card used to support SnapMirror oer Fibre Channel. For single-node models, the maximum number of this adapter is two. For dual-node models, the maximum number of this adapter is four. This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8. For a single-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8. Note: This feature requires Data ONTAP or higher. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment (FC 1035) Feature code 1035 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for attaching tape and supported N series disk storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN4000) to N series storage controllers. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Four small form factor (SFF) multimode optical ports with LC connectors support the following cable lengths: Appendix I. Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems 273

310 Table 250. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment (FC 1035) - maximum cable lengths 62.5 micron multi-mode Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre fibre 1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters 2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters 4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters The ports of this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports. Note: This adapter is not supported for N7000 series MetroCluster configurations or filers with gateway features. For the single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is fie. For the dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is ten. This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, and 8. For a single-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2. Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1036) Feature code 1036 is a PCIe dual-port 8-Gbps HBA for FCP target ports. This adapter may only be used to proide additional target ports; it may not be used to attach storage expansion units or backend gateway storage. It auto-negotiates connections of 1 Gbps, 2 Gbps, 4 Gbps, or 8 Gbps. Two SFP multimode optical ports with LC connectors support the following cable lengths: Table 251. Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1036) - maximum cable lengths 62.5 micron multi-mode Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre fibre 1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters 2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters 4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters 8 Gbps 70 meters 21 meters This feature requires Data ONTAP 7.3.1, or higher. For the single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is fie. For the dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is ten. This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6, 7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

311 16-GB Performance Acceleration Module I (FC 1056) Feature code 1056 is a PCIe adapter with 16 GB of onboard cache memory that works as a performance acceleration module. It is designed to augment the system's memory and improe performance with some applications when a configuration has a limited number of disks. This design allows the N series disk configuration to be sized based on capacity, rather than performance requirements. For more information about PAM cards, see Appendix K, Installing or replacing a Flash Cache module or PAM, on page 289. Use of the 16-GB Performance Acceleration Module I (FC 1056) requires the FlexScale software feature. For the single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four for the N7600 and N7700 and fie for the N7800 and N7900. For the dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is eight for the N7600 and N7700 and ten for the N7800 and N7900. This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, and 8. For all models of the N7600 and N7700: The slot priority order is 5, 6, 7 and 8. For single-node models of the N7800 and N7900: The slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8 and 1. For dual-node models of the N7800 and N7900: The slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8 and GB Flash Cache module (FC 1057) Feature code 1057 is a PCIe adapter with 512 GB of onboard cache memory that works as a Flash Cache module. It is designed to augment the system's onboard memory, improing performance with some configurations. The design allows the N series system to be sized based on required capacity instead of performance, reducing the need for excess spindles in some enironments and helping to improe capacity utilization. For more information about Flash Cache modules, see Appendix K, Installing or replacing a Flash Cache module or PAM, on page 289. Use of the 512 GB Flash Cache module (FC 1057) requires the Flash Cache module software feature. Note: Flash Cache modules were formerly referred to as Performance Acceleration Modules (PAM) II. For the single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is two for the N7600 and N7700 and four for the N7800 and N7900. For the dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four for the N7600 and N7700 and eight for the N7800 and N7900. This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8. The slot priority order is 5, 6, 7 and 8. Note: 1. For the N7600, N7700 and N7900, feature code 1057 requires Data ONTAP or higher. Appendix I. Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems 275

312 2. For the N7800, feature code 1057 requires Data ONTAP or higher. Quad-port 3-Gbps SAS Adapter (FC 1061) Feature code 1061 is a PCIe adapter with four SAS ports for connecting N series SAS-based storage (EXN3000 and EXN3500) behind the N series controller. The SAS adapter operates at 3 Gbps. For single-node models the maximum number of this adapter is fie. For dual-node models the maximum number of this adapter is ten. This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6, 7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2. Note: Feature code 1061 requires Data ONTAP or higher. Dual-port Fibre Channel oer Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (optical) (FC 1063) Feature code 1063 is a PCIe adapter with two Fibre Channel oer Ethernet (FCoE) ports for connecting the N series controller to FCoE enironments. This adapter utilizes optical connections to the FCoE networks. For single-node models the maximum number of this adapter is fie. For dual-node models the maximum number of this adapter is ten. This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6, 7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2. Note: Feature code 1063 requires Data ONTAP or higher. Dual-port Fibre Channel oer Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (copper) (FC 1064) Feature code 1064 is a PCIe adapter with two Fibre Channel oer Ethernet (FCoE) ports for connecting the N series controller to FCoE enironments. This adapter utilizes copper connections to the FCoE networks. For single-node models the maximum number of this adapter is fie. For dual-node models the maximum number of this adapter is ten. This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6, 7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2. Note: Feature code 1064 requires Data ONTAP or higher. Dual-port 10-Gbps NIC (FC 1065) Feature code 1065 is a 10-Gb Ethernet PCIe NIC adapter feature proides dual LC duplex connectors. It supports a maximum distance of 300 meters using 850-nanometer (nm) multimode fiber (MMF) media. Cable features 5m 50-micron MMF Cable (FC 1045), 30m 50-micron MMF Cable (FC 1046), 10-GbE Fi cable 30m LC/SC (FC 1047), or 10-GbE Fi cable 5m LC/SC 276 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

313 (FC 1048) can optionally be ordered with this feature. FC 1045 and FC 1046 are LC/LC cables; FC 1047 and FC 1048 are LC/SC cables. For single-node models the maximum number of this adapter is fie. For dual-node models the maximum number of this adapter is ten. This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6, 7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2. Note: Feature code 1065 requires Data ONTAP or higher. 512-GB Flash Cache II module (FC 1071) Feature code 1071, a 512-GB Flash Cache module, is the third generation of PCIe Flash Cache adapters for N series systems. It is designed to augment the system's onboard memory, improing performance with some configurations. The design allows the N series system to be sized based on required capacity instead of performance, reducing the need for excess spindles in some enironments and helping improe capacity utilization. For more information about Flash Cache modules, see Appendix K, Installing or replacing a Flash Cache module or PAM, on page 289. Use of the 512-GB Flash Cache module (FC 1071) requires the Flash Cache module software feature. For the N7900 single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. For the N7900 dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is eight. This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8. The slot priority order is 5, 6, 7 and 8. Note: Feature code 1071 requires Data ONTAP or higher or Data ONTAP or higher. Appendix I. Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems 277

314 278 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

315 Appendix J. Optional adapter cards supported by N7x50T series systems IBM supports the following optional PCIe adapter cards in N7x50T series systems. Table 252. Optional adapter cards supported by N7x50T series systems Feature Code Feature Code Description Supported models 1012 Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter (optical) N7550T, N7950T 1014 Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment 1015 Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment N7550T, N7950T N7550T, N7950T 1028 Quad-port copper GbE NIC N7550T, N7950T 1029 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment N7550T, N7950T 1030 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA N7550T, N7950T 1036 Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA N7550T, N7950T 1061 Quad-port 3-Gbps SAS adapter N7550T, N7950T 1063 Dual-port Fibre Channel oer Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (optical) 1064 Dual-port Fibre Channel oer Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (copper) N7550T, N7950T N7550T, N7950T Gbps MetroCluster VI Fibre Channel HBA N7550T, N7950T Gbps SnapMirror oer Fibre Channel HBA N7550T, N7950T 1071 Flash Cache II 512 GB N7550T, N7950T 1072 Flash Cache II 1-TB N7550T, N7950T 1073 Flash Cache II 512 GB ersion 2 N7550T, N7950T 1074 Flash Cache II 1 TB ersion 2 N7550T, N7950T 1075 Flash Cache II 2 TB ersion 2 N7550T, N7950T 1078 Dual-port 10-GbE NIC SFP+ N7550T, N7950T 1079 Quad-port 8-Gbps FC HBA N7550T, N7950T 1080 Quad-port 6-Gbps SAS HBA N7550T, N7950T 1081 Quad-port 8-Gbps FC adapter N7550T, N7950T 1082 Quad-port 1GbE optical adapter N7550T, N7950T 1084 Dual-port 10G-Base-T NIC N7550T, N7950T The following is the priority order for installing optional adapter cards into the N7x50T series system, from top to bottom: 1. Fabric MetroCluster adapter (FC 1066) 2. High performance network and block access adapters (FC 1036, 1063, 1064, 1067, 1078) 3. Vertical adapters (FC 1079, 1080) Copyright IBM Corp. 2005,

316 4. Flash Cache II modules (FC 1071, 1072, 1073, 1074, 1075) 5. Storage adapters for attaching disk storage expansion units (FC 1014, 1029, 1061, 1081) 6. Standard performance block access adapters (FC 1012, 1028, 1081, 1082, and 1084) 7. Storage adapters for tape attachment (FC 1015) There are two aailable ertical expansion slots and four PCIe expansion slots per controller node on the N7x50T storage systems. N7950T also includes one I/O expansion module per controller node; each I/O expansion module proides two additional ertical slots and eight PCIe slots, which means a total of 4 aailable ertical slots and twele PCIe slots for adapter expansion per node. One ertical slot per controller is occupied by the NVRAM card and the other three ertical slots are resered for features 1079 and Any and all adapter cards (hardware features) added to an N7950T configuration must be added in equal numbers to the two nodes of the N7950T. The two nodes must be identically configured. For information about monitoring the LEDs for your optional adapter cards, refer to the IBM System Storage N series Platform Monitoring Guide. Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012) Feature code 1012 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-SX) adapter. This adapter has two LC duplex connectors and supports a maximum distance of 275 meters using 62.5-micron MMF media and 550 meters using 50-micron MMF media. For N7550T-C20: The maximum number of this adapter is 4. The slot priority order is 3, 5, 4, 6. For N7950T-E22: The maximum number of this adapter is 24. The slot priority order is 13, 7, 5, 3, 15, 9, 14, 8, 6, 4, 16, 10. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014) Feature code 1014 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA. This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2, and 1 Gbps. This adapter may only be used for attaching supported N series disk storage expansion units (EXN1000 and EXN4000). The Fibre Channel ports on this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports. This adapter has two small form factor (SFF) multi-mode optics with LC-style connectors. This adapter supports the following maximum cable lengths. Table 253. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk (FC 1014) - maximum cable lengths 62.5 micron multi-mode Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fiber fiber 1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters 2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters 4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters 280 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

317 For N7550T-C20: The maximum number of this adapter is 4. The slot priority order is 3, 5, 4, 6. For N7950T-E22: The maximum number of this adapter is 24. The slot priority order is 13, 7, 5, 3, 15, 9, 14, 8, 6, 4, 16, 10. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015) Feature code 1015 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment. This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2, and 1 Gbps. This adapter has two SFF multi-mode optical ports with LC connectors. The Fibre Channel ports on this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports. This adapter supports the following maximum cable lengths. Table 254. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape (FC 1015) - maximum cable lengths 62.5 micron multi-mode Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fiber fiber 1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters 2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters 4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters For N7550T-C20: The maximum number of this adapter is 4. The slot priority order is 3, 5, 4, 6. For N7950T-E22: The maximum number of this adapter is 16. The slot priority order is 13, 7, 5, 3, 15, 9, 14, 8, 6, 4, 16, 10. Quad-port Copper GbE NIC (FC 1028) Feature code 1028 is a 4-port copper GbE Network Interface Card (NIC). This 10/100/1000 Ethernet (10Base-t, 100Base-TX, and 1000Base-T) PCIe feature proides four RJ45 connectors. The maximum supported distance is 100 meters using Cat. 5, or better, unshielded twisted pair (UTP) four-pair media. Ethernet cables are proided by the customer. For N7550T-C20: The maximum number of this adapter is 4. The slot priority order is 3, 5, 4, 6. For N7950T-E22: The maximum number of this adapter is 12. The slot priority order is 13, 7, 5, 3, 15, 9, 14, 8, 6, 4, 16, 10. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1029) Feature code 1029 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for attaching supported N series disk storage expansion units (EXN1000 and EXN4000) to N series storage controllers. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Four small form factor (SFF) multimode optical ports with LC connectors support the following cable lengths: Appendix J. Optional adapter cards supported by N7x50T series systems 281

318 Table 255. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1029) - maximum cable lengths 62.5 micron multi-mode Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fiber fiber 1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters 2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters 4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters The ports of this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports. For N7550T-C20: The maximum number of this adapter is 4. The slot priority order is 3, 5, 4, 6. For N7950T-E22: The maximum number of this adapter is 24. The slot priority order is 13, 7, 5, 3, 15, 9, 14, 8, 6, 4, 16, 10. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (FC 1030) Feature code 1030 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for FCP target ports. This adapter may only be used to proide additional target ports; it may not be used to attach storage expansion units. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Two SFP multimode optical ports with LC connectors support the following cable lengths: Table 256. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1030) - maximum cable lengths 62.5 micron multi-mode Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fiber fiber 1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters 2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters 4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters For N7550T-C20: The maximum number of this adapter is 4. The slot priority order is 3, 5, 4, 6. For N7950T-E22: The maximum number of this adapter is 12. The slot priority order is 13, 7, 5, 3, 15, 9, 14, 8, 6, 4, 16, 10. Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1036) Feature code 1036 is a dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for FCP target ports. This adapter is only used to proide additional target ports. It is not used for attaching N series storage expansion units. It auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, 4-Gbps, or 8-Gbps. This adapter has two SFP multimode optical ports with LC connectors. This adapter supports the following cable lengths: 282 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

319 Table 257. Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1036) - maximum cable lengths 62.5 micron multi-mode Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fiber fiber 1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters 2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters 4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters 8 Gbps 50 meters (OM2 21 meters 8 Gbps 150 meters (OM3) For N7550T-C20: The maximum number of this adapter is 4. The slot priority order is 3, 5, 4, 6. For N7950T-E22: The maximum number of this adapter is 24. The slot priority order is 13, 7, 5, 3, 15, 9, 14, 8, 6, 4, 16, 10. Quad-port 6-Gbps SAS Adapter (FC 1061) Feature code 1061 is a PCIe adapter with four SAS ports for connecting N series SAS-based storage (EXN3000 or EXN3500) behind the N series controller. The SAS adapter operates at 3 or 6 Gbps. For N7550T-C20: The maximum number of this adapter is 4. The slot priority order is 3, 5, 4, 6. For N7950T-E22: The maximum number of this adapter is 12. The slot priority order is 1, 11, 12. Dual-port Fibre Channel oer Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (optical) (FC 1063) Feature code 1063 is a PCIe adapter with two Fibre Channel oer Ethernet (FCoE) ports for connecting the N series controller to FCoE enironments, supporting Fibre Channel oer Ethernet, iscsi, NFS, and CIFS with FCoE-enabled hosts. This adapter utilizes optical connections to the FCoE networks. For N7550T-C20: The maximum number of this adapter is 4. The slot priority order is 3, 5, 4, 6. For N7950T-E22: The maximum number of this adapter is 24. The maximum number of Ethernet ports on all cards is 48. The slot priority order is 13, 7, 5, 3, 15, 9, 14, 8, 6, 4, 16, 10. Dual-port Fibre Channel oer Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (copper) (FC 1064) Feature code 1064 is a PCIe adapter with two Fibre Channel oer Ethernet (FCoE) ports for connecting the N series controller to FCoE enironments, supporting Fibre Channel oer Ethernet, iscsi, NFS, and CIFS with FCoE-enabled hosts. This adapter utilizes copper connections to the FCoE networks. For N7550T-C20: The maximum number of this adapter is 4. The slot priority order is 3, 5, 4, 6. Appendix J. Optional adapter cards supported by N7x50T series systems 283

320 For N7950T-E22: The maximum number of this adapter is 24. The maximum number of Ethernet ports on all cards is 48. The slot priority order is 13, 7, 5, 3, 15, 9, 14, 8, 6, 4, 16, Gbps MetroCluster VI Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1066) FC 1066 is PCIe adapter is used only in support of the MetroCluster license function feature and compatible switches. It proides the connection heartbeat for the cluster oer a Fibre Channel link. One is used per node in a Fabric MetroCluster implementation. This adapter is not required for Stretch MetroCluster installations. For N7550T-C20: The maximum number of this adapter is 1. The slot priority order is 6. For N7950T-E22: The maximum number of this adapter is 2. The slot priority order is 2. 8-Gbps SnapMirror oer Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1067) FC 1067 proides one 8-Gb PCIe card for support of SnapMirror oer Fibre Channel. Use this feature to configure 8-Gbps Fibre Channel for SnapMirror. For N7550T-C20: The maximum number of this adapter is 2. The slot priority order is 3, 5, 4. For N7950T-E22: The maximum number of this adapter is 4. The slot priority order is 13, 7, 5, 3, 15, 9, 14, 8, 4, 16, GB Flash Cache II module (FC 1071) Feature code 1071, a 512-GB Flash Cache module, is the third generation of PCIe Flash Cache adapters for N series systems. It is designed to augment the system's onboard memory, improing performance with some configurations. The design allows the N series system to be sized based on required capacity instead of performance, reducing the need for excess spindles in some enironments and helping improe capacity utilization. For more information about Flash Cache modules, see Appendix K, Installing or replacing a Flash Cache module or PAM, on page 289. Use of the 512-GB Flash Cache module (FC 1071) requires the Flash Cache module software feature. For N7550T-C20: The maximum number of this adapter is 3. The slot priority order is 3, 5, 4, 6. For N7950T-E22: The maximum number of this module is 24. The maximum Flash Cache capacity is 8 TB per controller. The slot priority order is 13, 7, 5, 3, 15, 9, 14, 8, 6, 4, 16, 10. Note: Feature code 1071 requires Data ONTAP or higher. 284 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

321 1-TB Flash Cache II module (FC 1072) Feature code 1072, a 1-TB Flash Cache module, is the third generation of PCIe Flash Cache adapters for N series systems. It is designed to augment the system's onboard memory, improing performance with some configurations. The design allows the N series system to be sized based on required capacity instead of performance, reducing the need for excess spindles in some enironments and helping improe capacity utilization. For more information about Flash Cache modules, see Appendix K, Installing or replacing a Flash Cache module or PAM, on page 289. Use of the 1-TB Flash Cache module (FC 1072) requires the Flash Cache module software feature. For N7550T-C20: The maximum number of this adapter is 1. The slot priority order is 3, 5, 4, 6. For N7950T-E22: The maximum number of this module is 16. The maximum Flash Cache capacity is 8 TB per controller. The slot priority order is 13, 7, 5, 3, 15, 9, 14, 8, 6, 4, 16, 10. Note: Feature code 1072 requires Data ONTAP or higher. 512-GB Flash Cache II module ersion 2 (FC 1073) Feature code 1073, a 512-GB Flash Cache module, is the third generation of PCIe Flash Cache adapters for N series systems. It is designed to augment the system's onboard memory, improing performance with some configurations. The design allows the N series system to be sized based on required capacity instead of performance, reducing the need for excess spindles in some enironments and helping improe capacity utilization. For more information about Flash Cache modules, see Appendix K, Installing or replacing a Flash Cache module or PAM, on page 289. Use of the 512-GB Flash Cache module (FC 1073) requires the Flash Cache module software feature. For N7550T-C20: The maximum number of this adapter is 8. The slot priority order is 3, 5, 4, 6. For N7950T-E22: The maximum number of this module is 24. The maximum Flash Cache capacity is 8 TB per controller. The slot priority order is 13, 7, 5, 3, 15, 9, 14, 8, 6, 4, 16, 10. Note: Feature code 1073 requires Data ONTAP RC1 or 8.2 RC1 or higher. 1-TB Flash Cache II module ersion 2 (FC 1074) Feature code 1074, a 1-TB Flash Cache module, is the third generation of PCIe Flash Cache adapters for N series systems. It is designed to augment the system's onboard memory, improing performance with some configurations. The design allows the N series system to be sized based on required capacity instead of performance, reducing the need for excess spindles in some enironments and helping improe capacity utilization. For more information about Flash Cache modules, see Appendix K, Installing or replacing a Flash Cache module or PAM, on page 289. Appendix J. Optional adapter cards supported by N7x50T series systems 285

322 Use of the 1-TB Flash Cache module (FC 1074) requires the Flash Cache module software feature. For N7550T-C20: The maximum number of this adapter is 6. The maximum Flash Cache capacity is 3 TB per controller. The slot priority order is 3, 5, 4, 6. For N7950T-E22: The maximum number of this module is 16. The maximum Flash Cache capacity is 8 TB per controller. The slot priority order is 13, 7, 5, 3, 15, 9, 14, 8, 6, 4, 16, 10. Note: Feature code 1074 requires Data ONTAP RC1 or 8.2 RC1 or higher. 2-TB Flash Cache II module ersion 2 (FC 1075) Feature code 1075, a 2-TB Flash Cache module, is the third generation of PCIe Flash Cache adapters for N series systems. It is designed to augment the system's onboard memory, improing performance with some configurations. The design allows the N series system to be sized based on required capacity instead of performance, reducing the need for excess spindles in some enironments and helping improe capacity utilization. For more information about Flash Cache modules, see Appendix K, Installing or replacing a Flash Cache module or PAM, on page 289. Use of the 2-TB Flash Cache module (FC 1075) requires the Flash Cache module software feature. For N7550T-C20: The maximum number of this adapter is 2. The maximum Flash Cache capacity is 3 TB per controller. The slot priority order is 3, 5, 4, 6. For N7950T-E22: The maximum number of this module is 8. The maximum Flash Cache capacity is 16 TB per controller. The slot priority order is 13, 7, 5, 3, 15, 9, 14, 8, 6, 4, 16, 10. Note: Feature code 1075 requires Data ONTAP RC1 or 8.2 RC1 or higher. Dual-port 10-GbE NIC SFP+ (FC 1078) Feature code 1078, a dual-port 10 GbE NIC proides two 10 gigabit Ethernet connections for network connectiity. This adapter uses SFP+ modules for optical connections (feature #2014), or SFP+ embedded copper cables for copper networks. Note: If this feature is used to connect to a network ia optical fiber cables, feature SFP+ Optical module, FC 2014, is required. If this feature is used to connect to a network ia copper cable, customer-supplied twinax cables are required. The maximum number of Ethernet ports on the system is 48. For N7550T-C20: The maximum number of this adapter is 2. The slot priority order is 3, 5, 4, 6. For N7950T-E22: The maximum number of this adapter is 16. The slot priority order is 13, 7, 5, 3, 15, 9, 14, 8, 6, 4, 16, IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

323 Quad-port 8 Gbps FC HBA (FC 1079) Feature code 1079, a 4-port 8 Gbps FC HBA proides four, 8 gigabit fibre channel ports to expand the basic connectiity of the N series controller. These ports are used to connect to fibre channel expansion units (EXN1000 or EXN4000). These adapters use resered slots, and do not apply to the maximum of 24 adapters. For N7550T-C20: The maximum number of this adapter is 1. The slot priority order is 1. Note: Note: At least one of either FC 1079 or 1080 must be ordered with the N7950T. For N7950T-E22: The maximum number of this adapter is 6. No more than six FC 1079 and 1080 are supported. The slot priority order is 1, 11, 12. Quad-port 6-Gbps SAS HBA (FC 1080) Feature code 1079, a 4-port 6 Gbps SAS HBA proides four, 6 gigabit serial attached SCSI (SAS) ports to expand the basic connectiity of the N series controller. These ports are used to connect to the SAS expansion units (EXN3000 or EXN3500). For N7550T-C20: The maximum number of this adapter is 1. The slot priority order is 1. Note: Note: At least one of either FC 1079 or 1080 must be ordered with the N7950T. For N7950T-E22: The maximum number of this adapter is 6. No more than six FC 1079 and 1080 are supported. The slot priority order is 1, 11, 12. Quad-port, 8 Gbps FC adapter (FC 1081) FC 1081 is an 8-Gb Quad-Port Host Bus Adapter (HBA) that supports fiber optic cables. This PCIe adapter has four LC fiber-optic connectors For N7550T-C20: The maximum number of this adapter is 4. The slot priority order is 3, 5, 4, 6. For N7950T-E22: The maximum number of this adapter is 12 per controller module. The slot priority order is 13, 7, 5, 3, 15, 9, 14, 8, 6, 4, 16, 10. Quad-Port, 1-GbE optical adapter (FC 1082) Feature code 1082 is a PCIe quad-port Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-SX) optical adapter. This adapter has four LC fiber-optic connectors and it supports MMF SR cable. For N7550T-C20: The maximum number of this adapter is 4. The slot priority order is 3, 5, 4, 6. For N7950T-E22: The maximum number of this adapter is eight per controller module. The slot priority order is 13, 7, 5, 3, 15, 9, 14, 8, 6, 4, 16, 10. Appendix J. Optional adapter cards supported by N7x50T series systems 287

324 Dual-port, 10G-Base-T NIC (FC 1084) This is a PCIe-based, dual-port, Ethernet network interface card (NIC). It supports 1000BASE-T and 10GBASE T copper media types. For N7550T-C20: The maximum number of this adapter is 4. The slot priority order is 3, 5, 4, 6. For N7950T-E22: The maximum number of this adapter is 12. The slot priority order is 13, 7, 5, 3, 15, 9, 14, 8, 6, 4, 16, 10. Note: Feature code 1084 requires Data ONTAP RC1 or later. 288 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

325 Appendix K. Installing or replacing a Flash Cache module or PAM You can install 512 GB, 1 TB, and 2 TB Flash Cache 2 modules; 256 GB, 512 GB, and 1 TB Flash Cache modules, and 16 GB performance acceleration modules (PAMs) in an existing storage system as a first-time installation, as an addition to a storage system that already has caching modules, as an upgrade from PAMs to Flash Cache modules, or as replacements when a caching module is no longer functioning. Note: 1. Flash Cache modules (256-GB or 512-GB) were preiously referred to as PAM II modules. 2. This appendix proides Flash Cache module and PAM information for all N series systems. Some content in this appendix may not apply to your N series system platform. Refer to the appropriate "Optional adapter cards" appendix for your N series system for details about caching module support. After installing a new or replacement caching module, you should run diagnostics. Depending on your platform model, you use the SYSDIAG tool or system-leel diagnostics to run diagnostics. You use the SYSDIAG tool to run diagnostics on platforms older than N6200 series and N7x50T series. Note: If you hae a N7900 system, the system must be running the SYSDIAG tool ersion 5.6 or higher: You can see what ersion of the SYSDIAG tool your system is running by entering the ersion -b command at the storage controller console. You can update the SYSDIAG tool ersion by going to the N series support website to download the serice image at nseries/. You use system-leel diagnostics to run diagnostics on N6200 series and N7x50T series platforms. For information about the PAM and Flash Cache module LEDs, see the IBM System Storage N series Platform Monitoring Guide or the flyer that shipped with your PAM or Flash Cache module. Installing or replacing a caching module Installing or replacing a caching module inoles shutting down and opening your system, remoing a failed module if applicable, installing the new module, and running diagnostics. If you are installing a caching module for the first time or upgrading PAMs to Flash Cache modules, you must also enable the software license and configure options. For the latest information about supported ersions of Data ONTAP, supported storage systems, and slot assignments for your caching module, see the appropriate section of this document, the N series Introduction and Planning Guide or the Hardware and Serice Guide for your N series system, and the N series support Copyright IBM Corp. 2005,

326 website product publications matrices. The latest ersions of these documents are aailable on the IBM N series support website, which is accessed and naigated as described in Websites on page xxx Before you begin installing or replacing a caching module Your system must meet certain criteria depending on your situation. If your system does not meet these criteria, you should contact technical support. You must check the appropriate hardware and serice guide and the N series support site at to determine the following for both first-time and additional caching module installations. The caching module is supported on the system that you hae selected for the installation. Your system is running a ersion of Data ONTAP that supports the caching module you are installing. The PCIe slots that are supported for your particular system and caching module card, and that an appropriate PCIe slot is aailable for each caching module you are installing. When installing additional caching modules that are a different type than are currently installed, you must erify that your system supports the mixed caching module types. For example, some storage systems support mixing 256 GB, 512 GB, 1 TB, and 2 TB Flash Cache and Flash Cache 2 modules. Note: You cannot mix PAMs (16-GB modules) with Flash Cache modules. For dual-node high-aailability (HA) pairs, you must install an equal number of caching modules in each node. You must hae a alid caching module license key to complete the caching module installation. IBM proides your license key on the printed IBM System Storage N series Function Authorization form that you receied from IBM with your software offering order. If you do not hae the Function Authorization form, contact the IBM Manufacturing Quality Hotline. When upgrading 16-GB PAMs to Flash Cache modules, you must hae purchased the WAFL external software license that supports Flash Cache modules. Note: There are two different WAFL external software licenses. One is used with PAMs, and one is used with Flash Cache modules. All other components in the system must be functioning properly. If not, you should contact technical support prior to attempting to install a caching module. Installing or replacing a caching module About this task Installing or replacing a caching module inoles opening your system, running diagnostics, and if installing a caching module for the first-time or upgrading to Flash Cache modules, enabling the software license and configuration options. Refer to the Hardware and Serice Guide for your storage system for detailed instructions about shutting down, opening, and closing your system to access the PCIe slots, and instructions for rebooting your system. These guides also contain instructions about remoing and installing a PCIe card. Note: Steps 1 5 below present a general sequence of steps for all platforms. Refer to your specific system Hardware and Serice Guide for platform-specific details. 290 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

327 Attention: This procedure is disruptie for single-controller configurations, and is recommended to be performed on single-controller configurations only during a maintenance window. For actie/actie or high aailability configurations, this is a nondisruptie procedure.. Procedure 1. Shut down the controller in which you are replacing or adding a caching module. Attention: An HA pair with two controllers in a chassis must hae the power supplies kept on. An HA pair with one controller in a chassis must hae the power supplies in the target node turned off. Stand-alone configurations must hae the power supplies turned off. Power supplies that are turned off must also be unplugged from the power sources If your system is... An HA pair running 7-Mode An HA pair running Clustered Data ONTAP A stand-alone configuration running 7-Mode A stand-alone configuration operating in Clustered Data ONTAP Then enter... From the partner node console: cf takeoer from the partner node console: storage failoer takeoer -bynode node At the system console: halt At the system console: halt local Running diagnostics 2. Open your system. 3. Remoe the failed caching module (if necessary). Refer to Replacing PCI Cards and Risers or Replacing PCI adapters sections in the Hardware and Serice Guide for your platform. 4. Install the new caching module. Note: If you are installing a PAM, the DRAM arrangement on the PAM you are installing might look different than the DRAM arrangement on the one in your system. The difference is because of DRAM technology, but the module functionality is the same and the modules are compatible. 5. Close and reboot your system. 6. Press Ctrl+C to stop the boot process and get to the Loader prompt. 7. Run diagnostics on the new caching module, using the applicable instructions in Running diagnostics. After you finish running diagnostics, return here to complete the next step. 8. Go to Completing the replacement process on page 296. After installing a new or replacement caching module, run the appropriate diagnostics. Depending on your platform model, you use system-leel diagnostics or the SYSDIAG tool or to run diagnostics. For N6200 series and N7x50T systems, see Running system-leel diagnostics on page 292. For all other N series systems, see Running SYSDIAG tool diagnostics on page 294. Appendix K. Installing or replacing a Flash Cache module or PAM 291

328 Running system-leel diagnostics Use the system-leel diagnostics procedure to run diagnostics on N6200 and N7x50T series platforms. To run diagnostics on earlier platforms, use the SYSDIAG tool. About this task You use the system-leel diagnostics procedure to run diagnostics on N6200 series and N7x50T platforms. If you are running diagnostics on earlier platforms, you must use the SYSDIAG tool (see Running SYSDIAG tool diagnostics on page 294). You can stop the diagnostics test at any time without harm to the system by entering the sldiag deice stop command. For additional information about system-leel diagnostics, see the IBM System Storage N series System-Leel Diagnostics Guide on the N series support website at Complete the following steps to run diagnostics on N6200 series and N7x50T platforms.. Procedure 1. Complete the step, depending on where the node halted during the boot process. If the node halted at the... Then enter... Loader prompt Go to step 2. Boot menu 1. Select the Maintenance mode option from the menu. 2. Enter the following command at the prompt: halt After you issue the command, wait until the system stops at the Loader prompt. 3. Go to step Enter the following command at the Loader prompt: boot_diags Note: You must run this command from the Loader prompt for system-leel diagnostics to function properly. The boot_diags command starts driers that are designed specially for system-leel diagnostics. Attention: If you hae an N6200 series system, during the boot_diags process, the following warning message might display. Enter "y" before the system boots to Maintenance mode. WARNING: System id mismatch. This usually occurs when replacing CF or NVRAM cards! Oerride system ID? {y/n} [n]y The Maintenance mode prompt (*>) is displayed. Enter the remaining commands in this procedure in the Maintenance mode unless specified otherwise. 3. Enter the following command: sldiag For details about the sldiag command, see the sldiag man page. 292 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

329 4. Clear the status logs by entering the following command: sldiag deice clearstatus 5. Verify that the log is cleared by entering the following command: sldiag deice status The following default response is displayed: SLDIAG: No log messages are present 6. Run the diagnostics test by entering the applicable command in the following table. If your system has only Flash Cache 2 modules, the test should complete within two minutes. If your system has only Flash Cache modules or a mix of Flash Cache and Flash Cache 2 modules, the test should complete in approximately 10 minutes. Note: Best practice is to run the diagnostics test on all caching modules in the system. The test runs in parallel on all caching modules. Howeer, you can run the test on the specific module you installed. If you run the test on a specific module, the N used in the command corresponds to the slot number. For example, to test the caching module in slot 3 (running Data ONTAP or later), you enter the sldiag deice run -de fcache -name fcache_slot3 command. If your system has... Data ONTAP or later Data ONTAP earlier than Then enter... sldiag deice run -de fcache sldiag deice run -de pam2 You can run the test on a specific caching module, by entering the following command... sldiag deice run -de fcache -name fcache_slotn sldiag deice run -de pam2 -name pam2_slotn 7. View the status of the test by entering the following command: sldiag deice status Your storage system proides the following output while the tests are still running: There are still test(s) being processed After all the tests are completed, the following response displays by default: *> <SLDIAG:_ALL_TESTS_COMPLETED> 8. Verify that no hardware problems resulted from the addition or replacement of hardware components on your system by entering the applicable command: If your system has... Data ONTAP or later Data ONTAP earlier than Then enter... sldiag deice status -de fcache -long -state failed sldiag deice status -de pam2 -long -state failed If there are problems in hardware, the prompt is followed by the status of the test failures. If there are no hardware problems, only the prompt is displayed. 9. Proceed based on the results of the tests: Appendix K. Installing or replacing a Flash Cache module or PAM 293

330 If system-leel diagnostics tests... Were completed without any failure Failed Then... Return your system to normal operation. 1. Clear the status logs by entering the following command: sldiag deice clearstatus 2. Verify that the log is cleared by entering the following command: sldiag deice status The following response is displayed: SLDIAG: No log messages are present 3. Exit Maintenance mode by entering the following command: halt 4. Reboot the storage system by entering the following command at the firmware prompt: boot_ontap 5. If your system is in an HA pair, run the cf gieback command (for 7-Mode) or storage failoer gieback command (for Clustered Data ONTAP) from the partner node console. Determine the cause of the problem. 1. Exit Maintenance mode by entering the following command: halt 2. Perform a clean shutdown and disconnect the power supplies. 3. Verify that cables are securely connected, and that hardware components are properly installed in the storage system. 4. Reconnect the power supplies and power on the storage system. 5. Rerun the system-leel diagnostics. 10. When the system-leel diagnostics tests are successful, you hae completed system-leel diagnostics. Go to Completing the replacement process on page 296, to finish. Running SYSDIAG tool diagnostics About this task You use the SYSDIAG tool to run diagnostics on platforms earlier than N6200 series and N7x50T series. If you are running diagnostics on N6200 series and N7x50T series platforms, you must use system-leel diagnostics (see Running system-leel diagnostics on page 292). You can stop the diagnostics test at any time without harm to the system by pressing Ctrl+C. For additional information about the SYSDIAG tool, see the IBM System Storage N series Diagnostics Guide on the N series support website at support/nseries/. 294 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

331 Complete the following steps to run diagnostics on all platforms other than N6200 series or N7x50T systems. Procedure 1. Enter the following command at the Loader prompt to bring up the diagnostics menu: boot_diags. The Maintenance mode prompt (*>) appears. 2. Enter the applicable command: If you hae a... PAM Flash Cache module and you are running a ersion of SYSDIAG that is 5.5 or higher. Flash Cache module and you are running a ersion of SYSDIAG that is earlier than 5.5 Then enter... iomem fcache pam2 3. When prompted, enter the following selection to start the module selection process: When prompted, enter the slot number of each module you want to test. 5. When prompted, enter the following selection to erify your configuration: 51 The output for each slot you designated should be PASSED. If the result is something other than PASSED, see the IBM System Storage N series Diagnostics Guide for a list of error messages and correctie actions. This guide is aailable on the IBM N series support website, which is accessed and naigated as described in Websites on page xxx. 6. If you hae a Flash Cache module, complete the following substeps; otherwise, go to step 9. The memory size of the caching module dictates the amount of time a full memory test takes. For example, running a full memory test on a Flash Cache module can take about one hour, so you want to minimize the test time by setting the test address range. a. When prompted, enter the following selection: 81 b. Answer the prompts to set the address range. c. When prompted, enter the following selection to erify the address range you designated for the Flash Cache module: When prompted, enter the following selection to run the comprehensie test on the new caching module: 1 The output for each slot you designated should be PASSED. If the result is something other than PASSED, see the IBM System Storage N series Diagnostics Guide for a list of error messages and correctie actions. This guide is aailable on the IBM N series support website, which is accessed and naigated as described in Websites on page xxx. 8. Exit diagnostics by entering the exit command. 9. Return the system to normal operation: If your system is... An HA pair running 7-Mode A stand-alone configuration An HA pair operating in Clustered Data ONTAP Then enter... From the partner node console: cf gieback At the prompt to boot the system: boot_ontap From the partner node console: storage failoer gieback Appendix K. Installing or replacing a Flash Cache module or PAM 295

332 10. Go to Completing the replacement process. Completing the replacement process About this task Once you hae completed all of the other installation procedures, refer to this table to determine your final steps. If you are... Installing an additional caching module in a system with preexisting caching modules Replacing a failed caching module Then... You hae completed the installation process and are done with this procedure. Return the failed part to IBM, following the RMA instructions shipped with the kit. Contact IBM Serice and Support: IBM-SERV ( ) if you need the RMA number or additional help with the replacement procedure. 296 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

333 If you are... Installing a caching module for the first time or upgrading the 16-GB PAMs to Flash Cache modules Then... You must hae a alid WAFL external cache software license key to complete the WAFL external cache installation. IBM proides your license key on the printed IBM System Storage N series Function Authorization form that you receied from IBM with your software offering order. If you do not hae the Function Authorization form, contact the IBM Manufacturing Quality Hotline. Enable the WAFL external cache software and set the software configuration options by completing the following substeps: Enable the WAFL external cache software license by entering the following command:license add license key For 7-Mode, run this command from the system console prompt. For a 7-Mode HA pair, run this command from each node. WAFL external cache functionality is enabled automatically. Verify that WAFL external cache functionality is enabled by entering the following command: options flexscale.enable For 7-Mode, run this command from the system console prompt. For a 7-Mode HA pair, run this command from each node. The output should show that the functionality is on. Read about the WAFL external cache configurations in the Data ONTAP Mode System Administration Guide (aailable at: nseries/). Knowing your application and olume configuration helps you decide what configuration options to choose. Note: You can set the WAFL external cache configuration options now or later, but it is recommended that you set the options now to ensure optimal performance for the system's workload. Follow the applicable option-enabling procedures in the Data ONTAP Mode System Administration Guide. Note: The option-enabling procedures in the Data ONTAP Mode System Administration Guide apply to 7-Mode. Note: For a 7-Mode HA pair, you must configure options on each node. For Clustered Data ONTAP, you must configure the option from the nodeshell of the target node. Appendix K. Installing or replacing a Flash Cache module or PAM 297

334 298 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

335 Appendix L. IBM System Storage N series documentation The following lists present an oeriew of the IBM System Storage N series hardware and Data ONTAP product libraries, as well as other related documents. You can access the latest ersions of the documents listed in these tables on the IBM N series support website, which is accessed and naigated as described in Websites on page xxx. N7x50T series systems library (coering N7550T and N7950T) N7000 series systems library IBM System Storage N7x50T Series Hardware and Serice Guide, GA IBM System Storage N7x50T Series Filer Installation and Setup Instructions, GA IBM System Storage N7x50T Series Gateway Installation and Setup Instructions, GA IBM System Storage N7000 Series Hardware and Serice Guide, GC IBM System Storage N7000 Series Filer Installation and Setup Instructions, GC IBM System Storage N7000 Series Gateway Installation and Setup Instructions, GC N6200 series systems library (coering N6210, N6220, N6240, N6250, and N6270) IBM System Storage N6200 Series Hardware and Serice Guide, GC IBM System Storage N6200 Series Filer Installation and Setup Instructions, GA IBM System Storage N6200 Series Gateway Installation and Setup Instructions, GA N6000 series systems library (coering N6040, N6060 and N6070) IBM System Storage N6000 Series Hardware and Serice Guide, GC IBM System Storage N6000 Series Filer Installation and Setup Instructions, GC IBM System Storage N6000 Series Gateway Installation and Setup Instructions, GC N3300, N3400, and N3600 storage systems library IBM System Storage N3300, N3400 and N3600 Hardware and Serice Guide, GC IBM System Storage N3300 Installation and Setup Instructions, GC IBM System Storage N3400 Installation and Setup Instructions, GC IBM System Storage N3600 Installation and Setup Instructions, GC Copyright IBM Corp. 2005,

336 N3150, N3220, and N3240 storage systems library IBM System Storage N3150, N3220 and N3240 Hardware and Serice Guide, SC IBM System Storage N3150 Installation and Setup Instructions, GC IBM System Storage N3220 Installation and Setup Instructions, GA IBM System Storage N3240 Installation and Setup Instructions, GA N series storage expansion units library IBM System Storage EXN1000 Storage Expansion Unit Hardware and Serice Guide, GC IBM System Storage EXN1000 Installation and Setup Instructions, GC IBM System Storage EXN3000 Storage Expansion Unit Hardware and Serice Guide, GC IBM System Storage EXN3000 Installation and Setup Instructions, GC IBM System Storage EXN3200 Storage Expansion Unit Hardware and Serice Guide, SC IBM System Storage EXN3200 Installation and Setup Instructions, GC IBM System Storage EXN3500 Storage Expansion Unit Hardware and Serice Guide, GC IBM System Storage EXN3500 Installation and Setup Instructions, GC IBM System Storage EXN4000 Storage Expansion Unit Hardware and Serice Guide, GC Clustered Data ONTAP 8.2 library IBM System Storage EXN4000 Installation and Setup Instructions, GC IBM System Storage N series Uniersal SAS and ACP Cabling Guide, GC Configuring a MetroCluster with SAS disk sheles and FibreBridge 6500N Guide ATTO Installation and Operation Manual (not IBM-branded) IBM System Storage N series Clustered Data ONTAP 8.2 Release Notes, SC IBM System Storage N series Clustered Data ONTAP 8.2 Command Map for 7-Mode Administrators, SC IBM System Storage N series Clustered Data ONTAP 8.2 Commands: Manual Page Reference for Cluster-Mode, SC IBM System Storage N series Clustered Data ONTAP 8.2 Data Protection Guide, SC IBM System Storage N series Clustered Data ONTAP 8.2 Data Protection Tape Backup and Recoery Guide, SC IBM System Storage N series Clustered Data ONTAP 8.2 File Access and Protocols Management Guide, SC IBM System Storage N series Clustered Data ONTAP 8.2 High Aailability Configuration Guide, SC IBM System Storage N series Clustered Data ONTAP 8.2 Logical Storage Management Guide, SC IBM System Storage N series Clustered Data ONTAP 8.2 Network Management Guide, SC IBM System Storage N series Clustered Data ONTAP 8.2 Physical Storage Management Guide, SC IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

337 IBM System Storage N series Clustered Data ONTAP 8.2 SAN Administration Guide, SC IBM System Storage N series Clustered Data ONTAP 8.2 SAN Configuration Guide, SC IBM System Storage N series Clustered Data ONTAP 8.2 Software Setup Guide, SC IBM System Storage N series Clustered Data ONTAP 8.2 System Administration Guide for Vserer Administrators, SC IBM System Storage N series Clustered Data ONTAP 8.2 Upgrade and Reert/Downgrade Guide, SC IBM System Storage N series Clustered Data ONTAP 8.2 System Administration Guide for Cluster Administrators, SC IBM System Storage N series Clustered Data ONTAP 8.2 SAN Express Setup Guide for N6200 Series Systems, SC IBM System Storage N series Clustered Data ONTAP 8.2 SAN Express Setup Guide for N7x50T Series Systems, SC IBM System Storage N series Clustered Data ONTAP 8.2 Cluster and Vserer Peering Express Guide, SC IBM System Storage N series Clustered Data ONTAP 8.2 SnapVault Express Guide, SC IBM System Storage N series Clustered Data ONTAP 8.2 CIFS/SMB Serer Configuration Express Guide, SC IBM System Storage N series Clustered Data ONTAP 8.2 FC Configuration and Proisioning Express Guide for Windows, SC IBM System Storage N series Clustered Data ONTAP 8.2 File Access Oer SMB Express Guide, SC IBM System Storage N series Clustered Data ONTAP 8.2 FC Configuration and Proisioning for ESX Express Guide, SC IBM System Storage N series Clustered Data ONTAP 8.2 iscsi Configuration and Proisioning Express Guide for ESX, SC IBM System Storage N series Clustered Data ONTAP 8.2 iscsi Configuration and Proisioning for Windows Express Guide, SC IBM System Storage N series Clustered Data ONTAP 8.2 Multiprotocal File Access Express Guide, SC IBM System Storage N series Clustered Data ONTAP 8.2 Multiprotocol Serer Configuration Express Guide, SC IBM System Storage N series Clustered Data ONTAP 8.2 NAS Express Setup Guide for N6200 series Systems, SC IBM System Storage N series Clustered Data ONTAP 8.2 NAS Express Setup Guide for N7x50T series Systems, SC IBM System Storage N series Clustered Data ONTAP 8.2 NFS3 File Access Express Guide, SC IBM System Storage N series Clustered Data ONTAP 8.2 NFS3 Serer Configuration Express Guide, SC IBM System Storage N series Clustered Data ONTAP 8.2 Vserer Root Volume Protection Express Guide, SC IBM System Storage N series Clustered Data ONTAP 8.2 SnapMirror Intercluster Configuration Express Guide, SC IBM System Storage N series Clustered Data ONTAP 8.2 SnapMirror Intercluster Failoer and Resync Express Guide, SC Appendix L. IBM System Storage N series documentation 301

338 Clustered Data ONTAP Switch library Data ONTAP Mode library Data ONTAP Mode library IBM System Storage N series 10G Cluster-Mode Switch Installation Guide, GI IBM System Storage N series Clustered Data ONTAP Switch Setup and Configuration Guide, SC IBM System Storage N series CN1610 Switch Administrator s Guide, SC IBM System Storage N series CN1610 Network Switch CLI Command Reference, SC Migrating to a two-node switched cluster with CN1610 cluster switches, SC Transitioning to a two-node switchless cluster, SC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.2 Release Notes for 7-Mode, SC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.2 Upgrade and Reert/Downgrade Guide For 7-Mode, SC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.2 Software Setup Guide For 7-Mode, SC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.2 System Administration Guide For 7-Mode, SC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.2 Storage Management Guide For 7-Mode, SC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.2 Storage Efficiency Management Guide For 7-Mode, SC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.2 High Aailability and MetroCluster Configuration Guide For 7-Mode, SC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.2 MultiStore Management Guide For 7-Mode, SC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.2 Network Management Guide For 7-Mode, SC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.2 SAN Administration Guide For 7-Mode, SC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.2 SAN Configuration Guide For 7-Mode, SC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.2 Archie and Compliance Management Guide For 7-Mode, SC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.2 Commands: Manual Page Reference For 7-Mode Volume 1, SC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.2 Commands: Manual Page Reference For 7-Mode Volume 2, SC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.2 Data Protection Online Backup and Recoery Guide For 7-Mode, SC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.2 Data Protection Tape Backup and Recoery Guide For 7-Mode, SC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.2 File Access and Protocols Management Guide For 7-Mode, SC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.1 Release Notes for 7-Mode, GA IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

339 Data ONTAP Mode library IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.1 Archie and Compliance Management Guide for 7-Mode, GA IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.1 Upgrade and Reert/Downgrade Guide for 7-Mode, GA IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.1 Data ONTAP 8.1 SAN Administration Guide for 7-Mode, GA IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.1 High Aailability Configuration Guide for 7-Mode, GA IBM System Storage N Series Data ONTAP 8.1 Commands Man Page Reference for 7-Mode, Volume 1, GA IBM System Storage N Series Data ONTAP 8.1 Commands Man Page Reference for 7-Mode, Volume 2, GA IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.1 Data Protection Online Backup and Recoery Guide for 7-Mode, GA IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.1 Data Protection Tape Backup and Recoery Guide for 7-Mode, GA IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.1 MultiStore Management Guide for 7-Mode, GA IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.1 Network Management Guide for 7-Mode, GA IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.1 File Access and Protocol Management Guide for 7-Mode, GA IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.1 Software Setup Guide for 7-Mode, GA IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.1 Storage Management Guide for 7-Mode, GA IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.1 System Administration Guide for 7-Mode, GA IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.1 SAN Configuration Guide for 7-Mode, GA IBMSystem Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.1 Storage Efficiency Management Guide for 7-Mode, GA IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP Mode Release Notes, GA IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP Mode Upgrade Guide, GA IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP Mode Block Access Management Guide for iscsi and FCP, GA IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP Mode High Aailability Configuration Guide, GA IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP Mode Commands: Manual Page Reference, Volume 1, GA IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP Mode Commands: Manual Page Reference, Volume 2, GA IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP Mode Core Commands Quick Reference, GA IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP Mode Data Protection Online Backup and Recoery Guide, GA Appendix L. IBM System Storage N series documentation 303

340 Data ONTAP 7.3 library IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP Mode Data Protection Tape Backup and Recoery Guide, GA IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP Mode File Access and Protocols Management Guide, GA IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP Mode MultiStore Management Guide, GA IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP Mode Network Management Guide, GA IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP Mode Software Setup Guide, GA IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP Mode Storage Management Guide, GA IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP Mode System Administration Guide, GA IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iscsi Configuration Guide for the Data ONTAP 8.0 Release Family, GA IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3.x Release Notes, GC Note: Beginning with Data ONTAP 7.3.1, a single Data ONTAP 7.3.x Release Notes coers both filers and gateways. IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3. Release Notes, GC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Actie/Actie Configuration Guide, GC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 File Access and Protocols Management Guide, GC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Storage Management Guide, GC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Data Protection Online Backup and Recoery Guide, GC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Data Protection Tape Backup and Recoery Guide, GC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 MultiStore Management Guide, GC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Network Management Guide, GC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Commands: Manual Page Reference, Volume 1, GC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Commands: Manual Page Reference, Volume 2, GC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Upgrade Guide, GC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Block Access Management Guide for iscsi and FCP, GC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 System Administration Guide, GC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Software Setup Guide, GC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Core Commands Quick Reference, GC IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

341 Data ONTAP 7.2 library Data ONTAP 7.1 library IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Archie and Compliance Management Guide, GC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Storage Efficiency Management Guide, GA IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iscsi Configuration Guide for the Data ONTAP 7.3 Release Family, GC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2.x Release Notes, GC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Actie/Actie Configuration Guide, GC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 File Access and Protocols Management Guide, GC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Storage Management Guide, GC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Data Protection Online Backup and Recoery Guide, GC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Data Protection Tape Backup and Recoery Guide, GC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 MultiStore Management Guide, GC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Network Management Guide, GC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Commands: Manual Page Reference, Volume 1, GC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Commands: Manual Page Reference, Volume 2, GC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Upgrade Guide, GC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Block Access Management Guide for iscsi & FCP, GC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 System Administration Guide, GC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Software Setup Guide, GC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Core Commands Quick Reference, GC IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iscsi Configuration Guide for Data ONTAP 7.2 and Earlier Release Families, GC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1.x Release Notes, GC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Cluster Installation and Management Guide, GC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 File Access and Protocols Management Guide, GA IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Storage Management Guide, GA IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Data Protection Online Backup and Recoery Guide, GA Appendix L. IBM System Storage N series documentation 305

342 IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Data Protection Tape Backup and Recoery Guide, GA IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 MultiStore Management Guide, GA IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Network Management Guide, GA IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Commands: Manual Page Reference, Volume 1, GA IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Commands: Manual Page Reference, Volume 2, GA IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Upgrade Guide, GC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Block Access Management Guide for iscsi and FCP, GA IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 System Administration Guide, GA IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Software Setup Guide, GA IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Core Commands Quick Reference, GA IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iscsi Configuration Guide for Data ONTAP 7.2 and Earlier Release Families, GC Gateway systems library (Data ONTAP 7.2 and later, including Data ONTAP Mode) Release Notes IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2.x Gateway Release Notes, GC IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3.x Release Notes, GC Note: In Data ONTAP and later releases, including Data ONTAP Mode, a single Data ONTAP Release Notes will coer both filers and gateways. IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.x 7-Mode Release Notes, GA Other publications IBM System Storage N series Gateway Installation Requirements and Reference Guide, GA IBM System Storage N series Gateway Implementation Guide for Third-party Storage, GA IBM System Storage N series Gateway Installation Requirements and Reference Guide, GC IBM System Storage N series Gateway Metrocluster Guide, GC IBM System Storage N series Gateway Implementation Guide for Natie Disk Sheles, GC (for Data ONTAP 7.3 and later gateways only) IBM System Storage N series Gateway Implementation Guide for EMC Symmetrix Storage, GC IBM System Storage N series Gateway Implementation Guide for HP EVA Storage, GC IBM System Storage N series Gateway Implementation Guide for HP XP Storage, GC IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

343 IBM System Storage N series Gateway Implementation Guide for 3PAR InSer Storage, GC IBM System Storage N series Gateway Implementation Guide for EMC CLARiiON Storage, GC IBM System Storage N series Gateway Implementation Guide for IBM Storage, GC IBM System Storage N series Gateway Implementation Guide for IBM SAN Volume Controller Storage, GC IBM System Storage N series Gateway Implementation Guide for Hitachi Storage, GC IBM System Storage N series Gateway Implementation Guide for Fujitsu ETERNUS Storage, GC IBM System Storage N series Gateway Implementation Guide for RamSan Storage, GC IBM System Storage N series Gateway Implementation Guide for IBM XIV Storage,, GA The following gateway guides were eliminated in the Data ONTAP and releases; their content was merged with other Data ONTAP documentation. IBM System Storage N series Gateway Planning Guide, GC IBM System Storage N series Gateway Upgrade Guide, GC IBM System Storage N series Gateway Software Setup, Installation, and Management Guide, GC Data ONTAP 7.1 gateway systems library IBM System Storage N series Gateway Planning Guide, GC IBM System Storage N series Gateway Integration Guide for IBM Storage, GC IBM System Storage N series Gateway Integration Guide for Hitachi Storage, GC IBM System Storage N series Gateway Integration Guide for HP Storage, GC IBM System Storage N series Gateway Software Upgrade Guide, GC IBM System Storage N series Gateway Software Setup, Installation, and Management Guide, GC IBM System Storage N series Gateway 7.1.x Release Notes, GC Other N series and N series-related documents IBM System Storage N Series Platform Monitoring Guide, GC (preiously called the IBM System Storage N series Error Messages and Troubleshooting Guide, GC ) IBM System Storage N series Diagnostics Guide, GC (supporting N3300, N3400, N3600, N6000 series, and N7000 series systems) IBM System Storage N series System Leel Diagnostics Guide, GA (supporting N6200 series, N7x50T series and later systems) IBM System Storage N series Introduction and Planning Guide, GA IBM System Storage N series AutoSupport Oeriew, GC IBM System Storage N series: Changing the cluster cfmode Setting in Fibre Channel SAN Configurations, GC IBM System Storage series Fabric-attached MetroCluster Systems: Brocade Switch Configuration Guide, GC Appendix L. IBM System Storage N series documentation 307

344 IBM System Storage N series MetroCluster Redbook, REDP-4243 IBM System Storage N series Safety Notices, 46X6016 IBM Enironmental Notices and User Guide Z IBM Storage Solution Rack 2101 Rack Installation and Serice Guide: Models 200 and N00, GC IBM Storage Solution Rack 2101 Rack Installation and Serice Guide: Model N42, GC IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

345 Notices This information was deeloped for products and serices offered in the U.S.A. IBM may not offer the products, serices, or features discussed in this document in other countries. Consult your local IBM representatie for information on the products and serices currently aailable in your area. Any reference to an IBM product, program, or serice is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM product, program, or serice may be used. Any functionally equialent product, program, or serice that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may be used instead. Howeer, it is the user's responsibility to ealuate and erify the operation of any non-ibm product, program, or serice. IBM may hae patents or pending patent applications coering subject matter described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not gie you any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to: IBM Director of Licensing IBM Corporation North Castle Drie Armonk, NY U.S.A. The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other country where such proisions are inconsistent with local law: INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATIONS AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you. This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publications. IBM may make improements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or program(s) described in this publication at any time without notice. Any references in this information to non-ibm websites are proided for conenience only and do not in any manner sere as an endorsement of those websites. The materials at those websites are not part of the materials for this IBM product and use of those websites is at your own risk. IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it beliees appropriate without incurring any obligation to you. Attention: In compliance with the GNU General Public License (GPL), Version 2, June 1991, a complete machine-readable copy of the source code for the releant source code portions of the Remote LAN Module (RLM) Firmware that are coered by the GPL, is aailable from ftp://ftp.netapp.com/frm-ntap/opensource/. Copyright IBM Corp. 2005,

346 Copyrights Copyright 2005, 2014 IBM Corporation. All rights resered. Printed in the U.S.A. References in this documentation to IBM products, programs, or serices do not imply that IBM intends to make these aailable in all countries in which IBM operates. Any reference to an IBM product, program or serice is not intended to state or imply that only IBM's product, program or serice may be used. Any functionally equialent product, program or serice that does not infringe any of IBM's intellectual property rights may be used instead of the IBM product, program or serice. Ealuation and erification of operation in conjunction with other products, except those expressly designated by IBM, are the user's responsibility. Trademarks IBM, the IBM logo, and ibm.com are trademarks or registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. A complete and current list of other IBM trademarks is aailable on the web at NetApp, the Network Appliance logo, the bolt design, NetApp the Network Appliance Company, Data ONTAP, DataFabric, FASerer, FilerView, gfiler, MultiStore, NearStore, NetCache, SecureShare, SnapManager, SnapMirror, SnapMoer, SnapRestore, SnapVault, SyncMirror, and WAFL are registered trademarks of Network Appliance, Inc. in the United States, and/or other countries. gfiler, Network Appliance, SnapCopy, SnapLock, Snapshot, and The Eolution of Storage are trademarks of Network Appliance, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries and registered trademarks in some other countries. ApplianceWatch, BareMetal, Camera-to-Viewer, ComplianceClock, ComplianceJournal, ContentDirector, ContentFabric, EdgeFiler, FlexClone, FlexVol, FPolicy, HyperSAN, InfoFabric, LockVault, Manage ONTAP, NOW, NOW NetApp on the web, ONTAPI, RAID-DP, RoboCache, RoboFiler, SecureAdmin, Sering Data by Design, SharedStorage, Simulate ONTAP, Smart SAN, SnapCache, SnapDirector, SnapDrie, SnapFilter, SnapMigrator, SnapSuite, SnapValidator, SohoFiler, Filer, VFM, Virtual File Manager, VPolicy, and Web Filer are trademarks of Network Appliance, Inc. in the United States and other countries. NetApp Aailability Assurance and NetApp ProTech Expert are serice marks of Network Appliance, Inc. in the United States. Network Appliance is a licensee of the CompactFlash and CF Logo trademarks. Intel and Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Linux is a trademark of Linus Toralds in the United States, other countries, or both. Microsoft, Windows, and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries. All other brands or products are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respectie holders and should be treated as such. 310 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

347 Electronic emission notices This section contains the electronic emission notices or statements for the United States and other countries. Federal Communications Commission Statement This explains the Federal Communications Commission's (FCC s) statement. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital deice, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to proide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial enironment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, might cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to meet FCC emission limits. IBM is not responsible for any radio or teleision interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors, or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could oid the user's authority to operate the equipment. This deice complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this deice might not cause harmful interference, and (2) this deice must accept any interference receied, including interference that might cause undesired operation. Industry Canada Compliance Statement This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conform à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. Australia and New Zealand Class A Statement Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic enironment this product might cause radio interference in which case the user might be required to take adequate measures. European Union Electromagnetic Compatibility Directie This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of European Union (EU) Council Directie 2004/108/EC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility. IBM cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommended modification of the product, including the fitting of non-ibm option cards. Copyright IBM Corp. 2005,

348 Attention: This is an EN Class A product. In a domestic enironment this product might cause radio interference in which case the user might be required to take adequate measures. Responsible Manufacturer: International Business Machines Corp. New Orchard Road Armonk, New York European community contact: IBM Deutschland GmbH Technical Regulations, Department M372 IBM-Allee 1, Ehningen, Germany Tele: lugi@de.ibm.com Germany Electromagnetic Compatibility Directie Deutschsprachiger EU Hinweis: Hinweis für Geräte der Klasse A EU-Richtlinie zur Elektromagnetischen Verträglichkeit Dieses Produkt entspricht den Schutzanforderungen der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG zur Angleichung der Rechtsorschriften über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit in den EU-Mitgliedsstaaten und hält die Grenzwerte der EN Klasse A ein. Um dieses sicherzustellen, sind die Geräte wie in den Handbüchern beschrieben zu installieren und zu betreiben. Des Weiteren dürfen auch nur on der IBM empfohlene Kabel angeschlossen werden. IBM übernimmt keine Verantwortung für die Einhaltung der Schutzanforderungen, wenn das Produkt ohne Zustimmung der IBM erändert bzw. wenn Erweiterungskomponenten on Fremdherstellern ohne Empfehlung der IBM gesteckt/eingebaut werden. EN Klasse A Geräte müssen mit folgendem Warnhinweis ersehen werden: "Warnung: Dieses ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A. Diese Einrichtung kann im Wohnbereich Funk-Störungen erursachen; in diesem Fall kann om Betreiber erlangt werden, angemessene Mabnahmen zu ergreifen und dafür aufzukommen." Deutschland: Einhaltung des Gesetzes über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit on Geräten Dieses Produkt entspricht dem "Gesetz über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit on Geräten (EMVG)." Dies ist die Umsetzung der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland. Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit on Geräten (EMVG) (bzw. der EMC EG Richtlinie 2004/108/EG) für Geräte der Klasse A Dieses Gerät ist berechtigt, in übereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das EG-Konformitätszeichen - CE - zu führen. 312 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

349 Verantwortlich für die Einhaltung der EMV Vorschriften ist der Hersteller: International Business Machines Corp. New Orchard Road Armonk,New York Tel: Der erantwortliche Ansprechpartner des Herstellers in der EU ist: IBM Deutschland GmbH Technical Regulations, Abteilung M372 IBM-Allee 1, Ehningen, Germany Tele: Generelle Informationen: Das Gerät erfüllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN und EN Klasse A. People's Republic of China Class A Statement Taiwan Class A Statement Taiwan Contact Information This topic contains the product serice contact information for Taiwan. IBM Taiwan Product Serice Contact Information: IBM Taiwan Corporation 3F, No 7, Song Ren Rd., Taipei Taiwan Tel: Electronic emission notices 313

350 Japan Voluntary Control Council for Interference Class A Statement This explains the Japan Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) statement. Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association Statement This explains the Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA) statement for less than or equal to 20 A per phase. This explains the JEITA statement for greater than 20 A per phase. jjieta2 jjieta1 f2c00790 Korean Communications Commission Class A Statement This explains the Korean Communications Commission (KCC) statement. 314 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

351 Russia Electromagnetic Interference Class A Statement This statement explains the Russia Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) statement. rusemi Electronic emission notices 315